R PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10515-0319-4100

JANUARY 2010
Rev. E

AN/PRC-117G
MULTIBAND MANPACK
RADIO
REFERENCE GUIDE

The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval.

No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the
U.S. Government.
 PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10515-0319-4100
JANUARY 2010
Rev. E

AN/PRC-117G
MULTIBAND MANPACK
RADIO
REFERENCE GUIDE

The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export

approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written
approval from the U.S. Government.

Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of

Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be
copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed
without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, RF
Communications Division, 1680 University Avenue, Rochester, New
York 14610-1887.

This manual is based on Firmware Version 4.0 (Radio System)

Copyright 1982-2010. QNX Software Systems.

All rights reserved.
Copyright  2010 by Harris Corporation
All Rights Reserved

HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 585-244-5830. Fax: 585-242-4755. http://www.harris.com
 Important Information About the Administrator Passwords

A password is required in the AN/PRC-117G to access Terminal Mode,

perform radio frequency standard maintenance (Temperature Compensated
Crystal Oscillator [TCXO] tuning), or install software. When the radio is
shipped from the factory, it is Type-1 Initialized and contains the shipping
password A2345678. This password may be used for the above operations,
or it may be changed at any time. Refer to Paragraph 4.4.1.1 for changing
existing passwords.
If Type-1 Initialization is lost, the password will default to H2445830. The user
will be prompted to change the default password to a custom user password
for security purposes. The new password must be 8 to 12 characters in
length, and contain at least one letter and one number character. Refer to
Paragraph 3.5.2 for the complete procedure.

If the user programmed password is lost, send the radio to depot

maintenance for a factory default password reset.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 1 – EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.1 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1.1 Document Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.1.1 Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 RADIO CAPABILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.1 Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2 VULOS Fixed Frequency Plain Text (PT). . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.3 VULOS Fixed Frequency Cipher Text (CT) . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.4 SINCGARS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.5 HQ Frequency Hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.6 Dedicated UHF SATCOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.6.1 MIL-STD-188-181B, 5 kHz, and 25 kHz UHF SATCOM
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.7 HPW SATCOM Data Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.8 Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.9 Beacon Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.10 ANW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.11 OTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.2.12 ROVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.2.13 DAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

CHAPTER 2 – SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

2.1 ITEMS INCLUDED WITH AN/PRC-117G RADIO . . . . 2-1

2.2 SYSTEM SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.1 Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.2 Vehicular Power Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.3 Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.4 Data Cables and Auxiliary Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.5 Audio Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.6 GPS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.7 Unused Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.8 Initial Settings and Turn-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.9 Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.10 Radio Operating voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

i
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 3 – BASIC OPERATION

3.1 OPERATION TASK SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS . . . 3-1
3.3 COMMON TASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.1 Power On the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.2 Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.3 Test Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.4 Keypad Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.4.1 Locking the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.4.2 Unlocking the Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.5 System Preset Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.6 Front Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.4 LOADING COMSEC FILL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.4.1 Loading SINCGARS FH Fill Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.4.1.1 Parts of a SINCGARS Loadset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.4.1.2 Loading SINCGARS Loadset (Mode 2/3) Using
AN/CYZ-10, KIK-20, AN/PQY-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.4.1.3 Loading SINCGARS ESET (Mode 1) Using AN/CYZ-10,
KIK-20, AN/PYQ-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.4.1.4 Loading SINCGARS ESET TEK/KEK Using DS-101 . . 3-22
3.4.1.5 Loading SINCGARS ESET TEK/KEK Using DS-102,
KYK-13, KYX-15, or KOI-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.4.2 Loading HAVEQUICK FH Fill Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.4.2.1 Loading HAVEQUICK FH Data Using DS-101 . . . . . . . 3-25
3.4.2.2 Loading HAVEQUICK FH Data DS-102, KYK-13, KYX-15,
KOI-18, or MX-18290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.4.3 Loading VULOS COMSEC Fill Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.4.3.1 Loading VULOS COMSEC TEK, KEK, TRKEK Using .
DS-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.4.3.2 Loading VULOS TEK/KEK Using DS-102, KYK-13,
KYX-15, KOI-18, or MX-18290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.4.4 Loading HPW COMSEC Fill Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.4.4.1 Loading HPW COMSEC TEK/TSK Using DS-101 . . . . 3-33
3.4.4.2 Loading HPW COMSEC TEK/TSK Using DS-102,
KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-18, or MX-18290. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.4.5 Loading ANW2 COMSEC Fill Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 3 – BASIC OPERATION - CONTINUED

3.4.5.1 Loading ANW2 COMSEC TEK with DS-101 . . . . . . . . 3-36

3.4.6 Loading GPS Fill Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.4.6.1 Loading GPS Keys Using DS-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.5 CRYPTO FILL MENU SCREENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.5.1 Switch to [LD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.5.2 Crypto Fill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.5.3 Load OTAR Fillset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.6 MODE BUTTON OPERATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.6.1 Beacon Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.6.2 Clone Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.6.3 OTAR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.6.3.1 OTAR Receive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.6.3.2 OTAR Transmit Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.6.4 Scan Mode Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.7 REVIEWING KEY INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.8 ZEROIZE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.8.1 User-Selectable Zeroize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.8.2 Function Knob Z (Panic Zeroize) Position . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.9 DISPLAY LIGHT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.9.1 Display Light Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.10 OPTION MENU SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.10.1 Data Mode Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.10.2 Lock Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.10.3 Mission Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.10.4 Radio Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.10.4.1 System Clock Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.10.4.2 Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.10.4.2.1 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.10.4.2.2 VAA System Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.10.4.2.3 HUB Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.10.4.3 Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.10.5 GPS Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.10.5.1 GPS Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.10.5.1.1 GPS Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

iii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 3 – BASIC OPERATION - CONTINUED

3.10.5.1.2 GPS Position Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

3.10.5.2 GPS Key Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.10.6 Radio Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3.10.7 Situational Awareness (SA) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.10.8 System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.10.8.1 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.10.8.2 Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.10.8.3 Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.10.8.4 SW Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.10.8.5 Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.10.8.6 TCXO Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.10.9 Network Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.10.10 Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.10.11 TX Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.10.12 View Key Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3.10.13 VAA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.10.14 Active Waveform Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.11 REMOTE CONTROL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.12 RETRANSMIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.12.1 Black Digital Retransmit Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.12.2 Same Net ID Retransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.12.3 Hardware Setup for Retransmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.12.4 Frequency Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.12.5 SINCGARS Retransmit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.12.6 Leaving Retransmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81

CHAPTER 4 – RADIO PROGRAMMING

4.1 AN/PRC-117G PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION. . . 4-1

4.1.1 Front Panel Display/Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 RF-6650M CPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.3 ASCII Text Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 MENU TREES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 SOFTWARE AND MISSION PLAN INSTALLATION . . 4-3
4.3.1 Initial Install Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 4 – RADIO PROGRAMMING - CONTINUED

4.3.2 View Mission Plans/Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.3.3 Install Mission Plans/Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.3.1 Install Mission Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.3.2 Install Software Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.4 Uninstall Mission Plans/Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3.5 Waveform Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4 PROGRAMMING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4.1 Radio Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.4.1.1 Change Admin Password Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4.1.2 General Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4.1.2.1 Audio Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4.1.2.2 Autosave Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.4.1.2.3 CT Override Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.1.2.4 Data Port Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.1.2.5 External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4.1.2.6 External Keyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.1.2.7 GPS Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.4.1.2.8 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.1.2.9 Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.1.2.10 SA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4.1.2.11 VPOD Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.4.1.3 System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.4.1.3.1 Current Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.4.1.3.2 Current Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.1.3.3 UTC Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.1.3.4 System Clock Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.1.4 Maintenance Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.4.1.4.1 Reset HUB Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.4.1.4.2 Reset Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.4.1.4.3 Extending HUB Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4.2 System Preset Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4.2.1 System Preset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

v
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

APPENDIX A - VULOS

A.1 VULOS FIXED FREQUENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1.1 VULOS MAIN STATUS SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.2 VULOS Main Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 VULOS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.2.1 Plain Text VULOS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.2.2 Cipher Text VULOS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.2.3 Operational Overrides - VULOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.2.4 SATCOM Ping Tests (Call Menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.3 SCAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.4 BEACON MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.5 VULOS OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.6 VULOS PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.6.1 VULOS Waveform Preset Programming . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.6.2 Scan Mode Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.6.2.1 Automatic Scan Mode Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.6.2.2 Manual Scan Mode Preset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.6.2.3 Scan Mode Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.6.2.4 Beacon Mode Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21

APPENDIX B - SINCGARS

B.1 SINCGARS OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1.1 SINCGARS Main Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.1.1.1 SINCGARS Frequency Hopping Main Screens . . . . . . B-2
B.1.1.2 SINCGARS Single Channel Main Screens. . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.1.3 SINCGARS Retransmit Main Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.2 SINCGARS Startup Net Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.2.1 Hot Start Net Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.2.2 Cold Start ERF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.1.2.2.1 Master Station Cold Start Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.1.2.2.2 Member Station Cold Start Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.1.2.2.3 Updating Time Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.1.2.3 Passive LNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
B.1.3 Cue Channel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

APPENDIX B - SINCGARS - CONTINUED

B.1.3.1 Non-Net Member Station Operation for Cueing a

SINCGARS FH Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.1.3.1.1 Master Station Operation to Respond to a Cueing
Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.1.3.2 NORMAL ERF SINCGARS FH Update . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.1.3.2.1 MASTER Radio Operation for NORMAL ERF . . . . . . . B-9
B.1.3.2.2 Member Radio Operation for NORMAL ERF . . . . . . . . B-9
B.1.4 Sending Data Via RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B.1.5 Operational Overrides - SINCGARS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.1.6 Squelch (SC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.2 MAIN SINCGARS OPTIONS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.2.1 Global Time of Day (FH ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.2.2 Late Net Entry (FH ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.2.3 SINCGARS Retransmit Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B.2.4 Squelch (SC ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B.2.5 SINCGARS Call Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B.2.5.1 CUE Call Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B.2.5.2 Normal ERF Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B.2.5.3 Normal ERF Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B.2.5.4 Cold Start ERF Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B.2.5.5 Cold Start ERF Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B.3 SINCGARS PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B.3.1 SINCGARS Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
B.3.2 SINCGARS Preset Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
B.3.3 Master/Member Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B.3.4 Cue Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B.3.5 Hopset/Lockout Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B.3.6 Frequency Hopping Voice Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
B.3.7 Retransmit Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19

APPENDIX C - HAVEQUICK

C.1 HAVEQUICK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C.1.1 HAVEQUICK MAIN STATUS SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

vii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

APPENDIX C - HAVEQUICK - CONTINUED

C.1.2 HQ Operational Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

C.1.2.1 HQ FH TOD Programming Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.1.3 HQ Call Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.1.3.1 Request a TOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.1.3.2 Send a TOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.2 HQ OPTION SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.2.1 Viewing HQ TOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.2.2 Select WOD Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.2.3 Configure HQ TOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.3 HQ PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3.1 HAVEQUICK Programming Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3.2 HQ Waveform Preset Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3.2.1 HQ SWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.3.2.1.1 Configure SWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.3.2.1.2 View SWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.3.2.1.3 Erase SWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.3.2.2 HQ MWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.3.2.2.1 Configure MWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.3.2.2.2 View MWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.3.2.2.3 Erase MWOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.3.2.3 HQ FMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

APPENDIX D - HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW)

D.1 HPW DATA OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D.1.1 HPW Quick Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2 HPW MAIN STATUS SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.3 HPW OPTIONS MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.3.1 Run TRANSEC Validation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.4 HPW PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D.4.1 HPW Preset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9

viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

APPENDIX E - ADAPTIVE NETWORKING WIDEBAND

WAVEFORM
E.1 ANW2 GENERAL THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.2 ANW2 MISSION PLANNING FOR DEPLOYMENT . . . E-2
E.3 ANW2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.3.1 ANW2 Voice Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.3.2 ANW2 Data Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
E.4 ANW2 STATUS SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
E.4.1 ANW2 Main Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
E.4.2 BGAN Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
E.4.3 INE Top Level Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E.5 ANW2 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E.5.1 ANW2 Wideband (WB) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E.5.2 BGAN Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
E.6 ANW2 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.6.1 ANW2 Preset Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E.7 ANW2 CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . E-20

APPENDIX F - ROVER (Option)

F.1 ROVER FIXED FREQUENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1.1 ROVER MAIN STATUS SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1.2 ROVER Main Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.2 ROVER OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.3 ROVER OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.4 ROVER PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.4.1 ROVER Preset Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F.4.2 ROVER Configuration Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

APPENDIX G - REFERENCES
G.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
G.2 REFERENCE TABLES AND FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
G.2.1 CONUS SATCOM Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-31
G.2.2 Atlantic SATCOM Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-32
G.2.3 Indian Ocean SATCOM Footprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-33
G.2.4 Pacific SATCOM Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-34
ix
 LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Page
1-1 AN/PRC-117G Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2-1 Items Included with the AN/PRC-117G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 Equipment Setup and Teardown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 Radio Operating Voltage Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3-1 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors for AN/PRC-117G . 3-2
3-2 Test Options Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3 VULOS Crypto Fill Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-4 SINCGARS Crypto Fill Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-5 HAVEQUICK Crypto Fill Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-6 HPW Crypto Fill Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-7 ANW2 Crypto Fill Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-8 GPS Fill Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-9 Beacon Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3-10 Clone Mode Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3-11 OTAR Receive Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3-12 OTAR Transmit Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-13 Zeroize Button Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3-14 Panic Zeroize Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3-15 Display Light Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3-16 Options Main Menu Tree (Top Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3-17 Data Mode Options Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-18 Mission Plan Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-19 System Clock Options Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-20 Battery Information Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3-21 Network Status Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-22 GPS Options Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3-23 Radio Options Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3-24 SA Options Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3-25 System Information Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3-26 View Key Information Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3-27 VAA Options Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3-28 Black Digital Retransmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-29 Retransmission Setup for Standalone AN/PRC-117Gs . . . 3-80
4-1 Programming Main Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-2 Radio Config Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3 General Configuration Top Level Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-4 Audio Config Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-5 Autosave Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-6 CT Override Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

x
 LIST OF FIGURES - Continued

Figure Page
4-7 Data Port Config Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 External Device Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-9 External Keyline Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-10 GPS Config Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-11 Network Configuration Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-12 Port Configuration Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-13 Situational Awareness Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-14 VPOD CONFIG Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-15 System Clock Programming Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-16 System Preset Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
A-1 VULOS Programming Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A-2 Scan Mode Programming Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A-3 Beacon Mode Programming Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
B-1 SINCGARS Programming Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
C-1 HAVEQUICK Programming Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
D-1 HPW Programming Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
E-1 ANW2 Programming Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
F-1 ROVER VLC Launcher Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F-2 VLC Playlist Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F-3 ROVER Programming Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
G-1 CONUS 100 deg W, 105 deg W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-31
G-2 LANT 15 deg W, 23 deg W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-32
G-3 IO 72 deg E, 72.5 deg W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-33
G-4 PAC 172 deg E, 177 deg E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-34

xi
 LIST OF TABLES

Table Page
1-1 LOS Fixed Frequency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 Dedicated UHF SATCOM HPW Data Rates . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3 Scan Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-4 ANW2 Data Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2-1 Items Included With the AN/PRC-117G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 Typical Battery Life (BA-5590). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3-1 AN/PRC-117G Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . 3-3
3-2 System Preset Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-3 Front Panel Key and Control Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-4 Electronic Fill Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-5 Waveform and Crypto Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-6 SKL Load Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-7 SKL Load Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-8 SKL Load Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-9 SKL Load Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-10 LOS Receive Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
D-1 HPW Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
G-1 AN/PRC-117G Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
G-2 SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Non-Leap Year . . . . . . G-6
G-3 SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Leap Years: 2008,
2012, 2016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
G-4 5 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options. . . . . . . . . . G-7
G-5 25 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options. . . . . . . . . G-8
G-6 Satellite Channel Frequency Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9
G-7 Maritime Channels and Frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-19
G-8 NOAA Weather Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-28
G-9 CTCSS Frequencies and Designator Codes. . . . . . . . . . . G-29
G-10 CDCSS Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-30

xii
 CHAPTER 1

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

CL-0319-4100-0001B
Figure 1-1. AN/PRC-117G Transceiver

1.1 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

The AN/PRC-117G Multiband Manpack Radio is a tactical transceiver designed for

use by military/agency personnel requiring Type-1, National Security Agency (NSA)
certified, secure voice and data communications. See Figure 1-1. The AN/PRC-
117G provides ground-to-ground, ground-to-air, and Tactical Satellite (TACSAT)
communication links. Over these links, the type of communication traffic includes
voice and data for the purpose of command and control on the battlefield.

The AN/PRC-117G frequency range is continuous from 30.0000 MHz to 1999.9950

MHz. The radio supports AM, FM, and various data waveforms. Supported
waveforms are:

• VHF/UHF Line-of-Sight (LOS) Fixed Frequency FM and AM

• UHF Dedicated Channel Satellite Communications (SATCOM)
• Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS)
Frequency Hopping (FH) and Single Channel (SC)
• HAVEQUICK (HQ) Frequency Hopping
• High Performance Waveform (HPW)
• Adaptive Networking Wideband Waveform (ANW2)
1-1
 • Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA) Satellite Communications
- refer to DAMA Waveform Operation Supplement 10515-0319-4030
• (Optional) Remotely Operated Video Enhanced Receiver Waveform
(ROVER)
• (Optional) Special Communications Mode (SCM)
- refer to SCM Waveform Operation Supplement 10515-0319-4040

1.1.1 Document Purpose

This guide is provided as a pocket size field reference for the AN/PRC-117G radio
operator, offering brief descriptions of all radio functions, programming actions, and
reference tables.

NOTE
It is recommended that first time users become familiar
with the AN/PRC-117G Operation Manual (10515-0319-
4200), which contains complete operating instructions
and additional detailed descriptions.
This guide may contain information about features that are not included in all
radios. Some AN/PRC-117G features are optional and can be added in the future.
Contact Harris for further update information.

NOTE
It is assumed that the AN/PRC-117G has been type-1
initialized prior to performing the operating procedures.
The radio will need to be re-initialized if it has been
opened or tampered, or the Hold-Up Battery (HUB) has
been depleted. Refer to the Falcon III Application
Programming Manual (10515-0307-4100) for the type-1
initialization procedure. If further information is required,
refer to depot level support or contact Harris
Corporation.
The RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA) contains sample
plans with example nets for each of the radio waveforms. Sample plans provide a
starting point for programming a waveform in the radio. If additional support is
required, contact Harris at (866) 264-8040 or https://premier.harris.com/rfcomm.
1.1.1.1 Acronyms
All acronyms used are contained in the Glossary at the back of this manual.
1-2
1.2 RADIO CAPABILITIES

The following paragraphs discuss the capabilities of the AN/PRC-117G.

1.2.1 Self Test

The AN/PRC-117G has Built-In Test (BIT) capability that includes:

• BIT is run on all hardware modules during power up

• Operator initiated BIT on all hardware modules (under options menu)
• Transmission or reception of Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) patterns on the
narrowband portion of the radio
• Optional tests on the Global Positioning System (GPS) or Receiver
Exciter Synthesizer (RES) Flash
• Wideband transmit or receive tests on the high-band portion of the radio
• A Software (SW) validation that runs the entire red and black file systems
through the Crypto to verify that the software has not been changed since
it was first installed
• Keypad Test that allows the user to verify front panel keypad operation
• Memory Test that validates integrity of the radio’s volatile memory
• Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) test to check display segments

1.2.2 VULOS Fixed Frequency Plain Text (PT)

• Operating Frequency Bands (refer toTable 1-1):
- VHF Low Band – 30.0000 MHz to 89.9999 MHz
- VHF High Band – 90.0000 MHz to 224.9999 MHz
- UHF Band – 225.0000 MHz to 511.9950 MHz
- SATCOM Band – 243.0000 MHz - 270.0000 MHz receive and
291.0000 MHz - 318.3000 MHz transmit

Table 1-1. LOS Fixed Frequency Operation

Selection VHF-Low VHF-High UHF VHF-High UHF
FM FM FM AM AM
Squelch OFF X X X X X
Noise Squelch X X X X X

1-3
 Table 1-1. LOS Fixed Frequency Operation (Continued)
Selection VHF-Low VHF-High UHF VHF-High UHF
FM FM FM AM AM
150 Hz Tone Squelch X X X
Continuous Tone Coded X X X
Squelch System (CTCSS)
Squelch
Continuous Digital Coded X X X
Squelch System (CDCSS)
Squelch
TX FM Squelch (SQL) Tone X X X
AM Analog Voice X X
FM Analog Voice X X X
Amplitude Shift Keying X X
(ASK) 16 kbps Voice/Data
Frequency Shift Keying X X X
(FSK) 16 kbps Voice/Data
Simplex X X X X X
Half Duplex X X X X X
5 kHz Deviation X X X
6.5 kHz Deviation X X X
8 kHz Deviation X X X
25 kHz AM Spacing X X

1.2.3 VULOS Fixed Frequency Cipher Text (CT)

The following are the AN/PRC-117G LOS fixed frequency CT operating capabilities
and limitations:
• ANDVT – Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal (ANDVT) is
used for Dedicated SATCOM operation (243.0000 MHz - 270.0000 MHz
RX and 291.0000 MHz - 318.0000 MHz TX) and UHF band (225.00000
MHz to 511.9950 MHz RX/TX) LOS operation.
• VINSON – 16 kbps data rate, 25 kHz Wideband (WB) Communications
Security (COMSEC) mode for secure voice and data.
• VINSON PT Override – Alerts an operator that a receiving transmission
from an AN/PRC-117G in PT mode is being received.

1-4
 • KG-84C – (Data only) Supports secure data transmission in FM mode
from 30.0000 MHz to 511.9950 MHz and AM mode from 90.0000 MHz to
511.9950 MHz. Also used for UHF SATCOM and HPW operation.
• Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) – AES is used for VHF/UHF
Line-of-Sight (VULOS) operation. Support for Cipher Feedback (CFB)
and Counter (CTR) crypto modes (unclassified keys only).
• FASCINATOR – Enables interoperability with FED-STD 1023 Type-1
Fascinator encryption. Supports voice only using a 12 kbps data rate in
FM on the VHF-High and UHF bands (90.0000 MHz to 511.9950 MHz).
Support for both Standard (STD) and Alternate (ALT) modes.
• Traffic Encryption Keys (TEKs) – Electronically loaded 128-bit
transmission encryption keys used to secure voice and data
communications.
• COMSEC Fill – TEKs and Key Encryption Keys (KEKs) can be filled from
various devices as shown in Table 3-5.

1.2.4 SINCGARS Operation

The AN/PRC-117G can operate in SINCGARS FH mode and SC mode from 30.000
MHz to 87.975 MHz. SINCGARS operates in VINSON COMSEC mode using a
TEK. An AN/CYZ-10 Data Transfer Device (DTD) or Simple Key Loader (SKL) Fill
Device is required to load SINCGARS FH data to the radio. The following are
SINCGARS capabilities:
• Net Master/Member – Master station is responsible for establishing and
maintaining a net of member stations; normally is the Net Control Station
(NCS).
• VINSON - Required when using SINCGARS for secure voice and data
from 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz.
• Transmission Security Key (TSK) – TSK is used in SINCGARS
operations to establish the pseudo-random hopping pattern of frequency
hopping of the SINCGARS net.
• Hopset – The set of frequencies on which a SINCGARS radio net hops.
There are 2320 25-kHz channel assignments between 30.000 MHz to
87.975 MHz.
• Lockout Set – A set of frequencies that are excluded during frequency
hopping operations.

1-5
 • Frequency Hopping Sync Time – Global Time-Of-Day (GTOD) is used
to synchronize SINCGARS frequency hopping communications. This is
usually Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) from a GPS receiver. An
AN/PRC-117G set as the net master is responsible for maintaining
accurate GTOD for the net.
• Two-Digit Date – SINCGARS GTOD uses the last two digits of the Julian
date as part of the sync time. This is the joint United States (US)
standard. Refer to Table G-2 and Table G-3.
• Local Fill – The procedure used to load SINCGARS TSK, hopset, and
lockout set information from the front panel with an Electronic Counter-
Counter Measures (ECCM) fill device such as the AN/CYZ-10 or SKL.
The AN/PRC-117G supports fill modes 2 and 3 (which load all sections
of the loadset automatically).
• Hot Start Net Opening – Passive method of entering a SINCGARS FH
net by locally filling all necessary FH data and obtaining accurate time
from a GPS source. Member stations can instantly communicate with the
master station if within ± two seconds of each other. Members can use
Late Net Entry (LNE) function if time accuracy is still within ± one minute.
• Cold Start Net Opening – Method used by the Master AN/PRC-117G to
initially open a net of member radios by transmitting Over-The-Air (OTA)
hopset and GTOD data. All Member stations need basic ZULU Julian
initialization of their GTOD prior to receiving a cold start from the net
master.
• Single Channel – A separate fixed frequency channel used to
coordinate actions, selectable on each preset from the radio’s keypad.
• LNE Mode – LNE is a receive function that permits a member
SINCGARS radio to enter a SINCGARS net when its Time-of-Day (TOD)
clock has drifted away from the net TOD by more than ± four seconds,
but not more than ± one minute, or when an AN/PRC-117G must join an
existing net using hot start procedures. The entering transceiver must be
loaded with the proper TEK, TSK variable, hopset, and lockout set.
• Cue Channel – A predesignated LOS fixed frequency in the SINCGARS
operational frequency range of 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz that enables
an AN/PRC-117G not in a FH net to contact the NCS of a FH net. This
mode can be enabled or disabled by the user. 150 Hz tone squelch
operation on the Cue channel frequency activates the signal in all
SINCGARS radios monitoring the Cue frequency.
1-6
 • Copy/Rename Hopset – Support for up to 25 independent FH nets is
provided, allowing improved monitoring of SINCGARS communications.
Each FH Net Identification (ID) can be renamed (000 - 999) on-the-go to
improve FH Net access when mission plans change.
• Data/Voice Handling – This feature ensures seamless traffic reception
over both Frequency Hopping and Single Channel nets. Automatic
detection is included in Enhanced Data Mode (EDM) data rates.
Selectable traffic routing is supported in SINCGARS Data Mode (SDM)
via monitor button control.
• Retransmit – Retransmission supported for both voice and data.

1.2.5 HQ Frequency Hopping

The AN/PRC-117G is capable of HAVEQUICK frequency hopping in the UHF AM

band of 225.000 MHz to 399.975 MHz. The following are HAVEQUICK Frequency
Hopping capabilities:

• TOD – TOD allows for synchronization of all AN/PRC-117Gs in a

HAVEQUICK net. The TOD message includes the operational date.
• Word of Day (WOD) – WODs configure the frequency hopping pattern
and rate and may vary in length from one to six segments.
• Single Word of Day (SWOD) Mode – SWOD is a HAVEQUICK
frequency hopping mode that allows AN/PRC-117Gs with identical TOD,
WOD, and net number to synchronize and communicate.
• Multiple Word of Days (MWOD) Mode – HAVEQUICK frequency
hopping mode that allows AN/PRC-117Gs with identical TOD, WOD, and
net number to synchronize and communicate, and provides for automatic
multiple day operation. Up to 31 MWODs can be loaded. The MWOD
elements are entered into memory locations 1 – 31. The MWOD contains
a date and is only valid on the date assigned to it.
• Frequency Management Training (FMT) – HAVEQUICK training mode
of operation that allows operation on a selectable set of 16 training
frequencies. FMT frequencies must be in the operational range of
225.00000 MHz to 399.97500 MHz. FMT frequencies remain in the radio
after zeroizing. Uses specific FMT designated HAVEQUICK frequencies.
• Net Numbers – A five digit code that programs the entry point in the
WOD frequency hopping pattern allowing communication between
multiple AN/PRC-117Gs with a common WOD and TOD.
1-7
1.2.6 Dedicated UHF SATCOM

The AN/PRC-117G operates in UHF SATCOM mode using MIL-STD-188-181B

modulation. It supports encrypted voice and data communications using wideband
25 kHz and narrowband 5 kHz satellite channels.

1.2.6.1 MIL-STD-188-181B, 5 kHz, and 25 kHz UHF SATCOM Features

The AN/PRC-117G in UHF SATCOM mode (243.0000 MHz - 270.0000 MHz and
291.0000 MHz - 318.0000 MHz) is compatible with VINSON KY-57 (wideband 25
kHz), ANDVT KY-99/99A, and KG-84C cryptographic equipment:

• ANDVT, KY-99 - Compatible encryption used on 5 kHz SATCOM

channels providing 2400 bps CT voice and secure data at rates of 1200
and 2400 bps. ANDVT referenced data option codes provide backwards
compatibility to 181A-only AN/PRC-117Fs on narrowband 5 kHz
channels.
• KG-84C - Compatible encryption used for data-only encryption on data
rates of up to 9600 bps for 5 kHz channels, and up to 56 kbps on 25 kHz
channels.
• AES - Compatible encryption is supported for CFB and CTR crypto
modes.
• FASCINATOR - Compatible encryption allows interoperability with FED-
STD 1023 Type-1 Fascinator encryption. Supports voice only using a 12
kbps data rate in FM. Support for both STD and ALT modes.
• Frequency Code – All UHF SATCOM channels have been indexed to a
common Department of Defense (DOD) satellite channel listing to ease
programming of uplink and downlink frequencies. Operating frequencies
are selected by entering the three-digit frequency code. Refer to
Table G-6 for a listing of current codes. To manually enter non-standard
uplink and downlink frequencies, enter 999 as the frequency code.
• Data Option Code – Depends on frequency code selected and
COMSEC type programmed. Data rate and applicable modulation is
selectable by option code for ease of programming and operation. Refer
to Table G-4 and Table G-5 for currently available data option codes.
• Continuous Phase Modulation (CPM) – Modulation mode for data
operation under KG-84C. Allows autobauding on receive end to the
speed selected by the sending station when both stations have a net
preset set to CPM data option.
1-8
 • Adjustable Power Output – Power output adjusts from +27 dBm (0.5
watts) to +43 dBm (20 watts) to allow for proper output within authorized
Effective Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP) levels.
• SATCOM Ping Test – Available under the Call button in SATCOM net
presets to test satellite link quality. Provides the operator with a relative
score from 000 to 100 to aid in antenna pointing and troubleshooting. A
COMSEC mode providing 1200 or 2400 baud must be used to perform
a Ping Test.

1.2.7 HPW SATCOM Data Waveform

HPW is a SATCOM modulation waveform that uses KG-84C encryption in

Redundant Mode 1 synchronization for increased data rates over UHF satellite
links. Refer to Table 1-2 for HPW UHF Follow On Satellite (UFO) data rates. Built-
in Automatic Repeat reQuest (ARQ) data modem reduces COMSEC overhead by
providing black side ARQ processing with automatic speed adjustment. A separate
TSK and TOD synchronization (±30 seconds) are also required when using HPW.
HPW only supports data communications and is used in conjunction with Harris
Wireless Message Terminal (WMT) software.

The following COMSEC capabilities are supported in HPW mode:

• KG-84C – (Data only) Supports secure data transmission in from
243.0000 MHz - 270.0000 MHz and 291.0000 MHz - 318.0000 MHz
• TEK – Electronically loaded 128-bit transmission encryption key used to
secure data communications.
• TSK – Electronically loaded key used in HPW operations for
transmission security.

Table 1-2. Dedicated UHF SATCOM HPW Data Rates

Channel Type HPW Using UFO Satellite HPW Using Non-UFO Satellite

25 kHz WIDEBAND 56 kbps 42 kbps

37 kbps 21 kbps
18 kbps
5 kHz 8.5 kbps
NARROWBAND 4.2 kbps

1-9
1.2.8 Scan List

The AN/PRC-117G can scan up to 10 LOS fixed frequency or dedicated SATCOM

radio voice operation nets in the modes listed in Table 1-3. In CT operation, only
VINSON mode is scannable (KG-84C and ANDVT are not scannable). The radio
does not scan HAVEQUICK or SINCGARS frequency hopping nets. Digital squelch
cannot be used.

When the AN/PRC-117G is keyed in scan mode, it transmits on one of the following
nets:
• The net currently paused on (if actively receiving traffic or still in the
return-to-scan hang time).
• The priority transmit net if the radio is actively scanning.
The following are AN/PRC-117G scan operating capabilities and limitations:

• Priority Transmit Channel - The net on which the AN/PRC-117G

transmits if the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button is pressed when the radio is
actively scanning.
• Hold Time - The length of time the AN/PRC-117G dwells on a net before
returning to scan even with a signal present. Useful for monitoring
multiple active nets by using a value long enough to determine receiver
of call. It also allows it to continue scanning automatically.
• Hang Time - The length of time the AN/PRC-117G dwells on a net after
a signal ends before returning to scan. Helpful if occupied with other
tasks while monitoring the radio.
• Priority Receive Channel - The AN/PRC-117G can scan a designated
priority receive net. It samples the priority receive net every other net. For
example:
• If Channel 4 = Priority receive net, and
• 1 through 10 = AN/PRC-117G nets selected for scanning, then
• Scan sequence is: 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 1 4...
• Manual Scanning - Pressing [CLR] while the AN/PRC-117G is scanning
puts the radio in a manual scan mode, where the radio stays on one
channel until the operator chooses to go to another channel.

1-10
 Table 1-3. Scan Modes

Mode Description

FM (PT, CT) Voice

Wideband SATCOM (CT) Voice
AM (PT, CT) Voice
Narrowband SATCOM (CT) Voice, ANDVT

1.2.9 Beacon Mode

Beacon mode sets the AN/PRC-117G to transmit a beacon signal for supporting
direction-finding efforts. Output signal is modulated by an audio tone swept from
300 Hz to 3300 Hz. The operational frequency in Beacon mode is 90.0000 MHz AM
by default, but the frequency can be changed by the user. The power level of the
radio can be adjusted along with the transmit period to extend battery life in Beacon
mode.

1.2.10 ANW2

ANW2 is a high-speed high-bandwidth waveform in the 225 - 1999.9950 MHz high-

band portion of the radio that allows simultaneous voice and high-speed data
capabilities. The high-speed data is multidirectional traffic that operationally
appears as full-duplex. BATON or MEDLEY encryption is used for both voice and
data channels. TEKs and TSKs are both loaded for this waveform. Refer to
Table 1-4 for data rate capabilities.

ANW2 supports:

• Ad-Hoc Networking
• Network Forms Automatically - No preassigned net master or
infrastructure is needed
• Self Healing - Tolerates loss of any node in the network
• Relay - Any radio is able to relay data packets between two
radios not within range of each other
• Simultaneous Voice and Data - Voice and data over network at the same
time
• Conventional Half-Duplex Voice - One station talks as is the case with a
conventional digital voice channel
1-11
 • Multiple Data Transmissions - Multiple data exchanges are supported
between radios at the same time
• Flexible Waveform - Each connection can use a different auto-negotiated
data rate, if needed, and only for as much time as needed to transmit the
data. This provides improved performance in varying channel conditions
(i.e. mobile communications or local noise).
• Transport Standard Internet Protocol (IP) Packets - Supports IPv4
protocol and any application that sends unicast or multicast traffic over
IP such as Command and Control Personal Computer (C2PC) or
Tactical Chat (TacChat) IP (via Ethernet interface).
• Encryption - Voice encryption using MEDLEY TEK, AES based
Transmission Security (TRANSEC), and Type-1 IP security for user IP
data utilizing the BATON or MEDLEY encryption algorithms with either a
Pre-Placed Key (PPK) or a key generated via Internet Key Exchange
(IKE). IKE is dependent on the communicating stations to have
compatible vectors loaded.
• Situational Awareness - embedded situational awareness application
sends IP-based position reports based on user configuration for location
or time/periodic reports. Packet formats include Harris or Cursor on
Target (CoT).
• Simultaneous ANW2, Broadband Global Area Network (BGAN), Black
Local Area Network (LAN) and Associated IP Network Topologies
• Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Acceleration - Space
Communications Protocol Standard Transport Protocol (SCPS-TP)
compliant

Table 1-4. ANW2 Data Rates

Bandwidth Data Rates

1.2 MHz 50 kbps to 2.8 Mbps

5 MHz 200 kbps to 5 Mbps

1-12
1.2.11 OTAR

The AN/PRC-117G is capable of Over The Air Rekey (OTAR). The AN/PRC-117G
supports:

• VINSON Manual Key (MK) in transmit

• Cooperative VINSON MK in receive
• Cooperative VINSON Automatic Key (AK) in receive
• Non-Cooperative VINSON AK in receive
To receive a TEK using AK, both the receiving AN/PRC-117G and the fill device
attached to the transmitting AN/PRC-117G must have the same KEK. For AK the
KEK must be loaded into the AN/PRC-117G by an external fill device. Refer to
Paragraph 3.6.3.

1.2.12 ROVER

Remotely Operated Video Enhanced Receiver (ROVER) operation from the

AN/PRC-117G is the reception of ROVER video feeds over the high-band portion
(1000.00 MHz to 2000.00 MHz) of the radio in PT only.

1.2.13 DAMA
The AN/PRC-117G provides 5 kHz and 25 kHz DAMA UHF Satellite
Communications (SATCOM) operation as well as MIL-STD-188-181B dedicated
SATCOM. Refer to the DAMA Supplement (10515-0319-4030) for a complete
description of the DAMA waveform, its operation and programming.

1-13
 This page intentionally left blank.

1-14
 CHAPTER 2

SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

2.1 ITEMS INCLUDED WITH AN/PRC-117G RADIO

Table 2-1 provides a list of items included with the AN/PRC-117G. Figure 2-1
displays all of the items included with the AN/PRC-117G.

Table 2-1. Items Included With the AN/PRC-117G

Description Part Number

Low-Band/High-Band Radio Assembly With Military Global 0N707070-7 or

Positioning System (GPS) 0N707070-9
Modified H-250/U Handset 10075-1399
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Programming Cable Assembly 12043-2750-A006
Falcon III Communications Planning Application (CPA) RF-6650M (CPA)
Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System 10515-0319-4000
(SINCGARS) Pocket Guide
Adaptive Networking Wideband Waveform (ANW2) Pocket 10515-0319-4010
Guide
Reference Guide (This Manual) 10515-0319-4100
Electronic Publication Compact Disk (CD) 10515-0319-6000

Contains AN/PRC-117G Multiband Manpack Radio:

SINCGARS System Pocket Guide (10515-0319-4000)
ANW2 Pocket Guide (10515-0319-4010)
DAMA Waveform Operation Supplement (10515-0319-4030)
Reference Guide (10515-0319-4100)
Operation Manual (10515-0319-4200)
Falcon III Multiband Vehicular Radio Systems
RF-300M-V150/V250/V255, RF-7800M-V150 System
Installation/Maintenance Manual (10515-0333-4200)

2-1
 LOW-BAND/HIGH-BAND
RADIO ASSEMBLY
WITH MIL GPS FALCON III COMMUNICATIONS
(0N707070-7) PLANNING APPLICATION
(RF-6650M)

MODIFIED H-250/U
HANDSET (10075-1399)

ELECTRONIC
USB PROGRAMMING PUBLICATION CD
CABLE ASSEMBLY (10515-0319-6000)
(12043-2750-A006)

SINCGARS POCKET GUIDE

(10515-0319-4000)
ANW2 POCKET GUIDE REFERENCE GUIDE
(10515-0319-4010) (THIS MANUAL)
(10515-0319-4100)
CL-0319-4100-0042F

Figure 2-1. Items Included with the AN/PRC-117G

2.2 SYSTEM SETUP

See Figure 2-2. The following paragraphs provide information on set up of the
AN/PRC-117G.

NOTE
If the Hold-Up Battery (HUB) expires or is removed
without a charged main battery connected, the radio will
require type-1 initialization (level III maintenance). A
radio requiring type-1 initialization cannot be used in
Cipher Text (CT).

2-2
 225 MHZ TO
30 MHZ TO 2000 MHZ (HB)
512 MHZ (LB) ANTENNA
ANTENNA
L1/L2 GPS SATCOM
ANTENNA ANTENNA

LOW-BAND/HIGH-BAND
RADIO ASSEMBLY
WITH MIL GPS

BATTERY
LATCH

BATTERY BOX
INDIVIDUAL
ACCESSORIES
WILL VARY

CL-0319-4100-0002E

Figure 2-2. Equipment Setup and Teardown

2.2.1 Battery Installation

Perform the following procedure to install batteries:

a. Place battery in the battery box so connector aligns with the radio power
connector.
b. Set radio chassis on battery box containing battery.
c. Latch the side clasps.

2.2.2 Vehicular Power Installation

The radio chassis assembly can be mounted in vehicular configurations. The radio
is powered via the rear power connector.

2.2.3 Antenna Installation

Antennas attach to the AN/PRC-117G by the following connections:

2-3
 • J8 High Band (HB) Antenna (ANT) - N Connector, High-Band Port 20
watts, 225 MHz - 1999.9950 MHz
• J5 Low Band (LB) ANT - Threaded Neill-Concelman (TNC) Connector,
Low-Band Port 10 watts, 30.0000 MHz - 511.9950 MHz
• J7 Satellite Communications (SATCOM) - Bayonet Neill-Concelman
(BNC) Connector, SATCOM 20 watts, only activated with SATCOM
channel selection (243.0000 MHz - 270.0000 MHz RX and 291.0000
MHz - 318.0000 MHz TX)

2.2.4 Data Cables and Auxiliary Cables

Connector pinouts are provided in the operation manual (10515-0319-4200). A

summary of the connectors follows:

CAUTION

Failure to power down the AN/PRC-117G before

connecting or disconnecting equipment to the Red or
Black Data Connectors could damage the AN/PRC-117G
or accessory equipment.
• Black Data Connector (Top Left, J6) - 10/100BaseT Ethernet, High
Assurance Internet Protocol Encryptor (HAIPE), Electronics Industries
Alliance (EIA)-644/899 Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS)
Vehicular Interface Unit (VIU), black USB On-The-Go (OTG), External
Power Amplifier (PA) (key, hop clock, feedback, control), and console
• Red Data Connector (Top Right, J3) - 10/100BaseT Ethernet, EIA-422/3
Synchronous Serial Data, RS-232 Asynchronous Remote, RS-232
Synchronous Serial Data, console, fixed audio, and Wireless Local Area
Network (WLAN)
• USB Connector (J4) - Red USB OTG
• AUDIO (J1) - Used for DS-101/DS-102 Fill Device or Sierra Terminal
Interface (STI)

2-4
2.2.5 Audio Connections

Summary of the connectors are as follows:

• AUDIO (J1) - Connect handset

2.2.6 GPS Connections

Summary of the connectors follows:

• GPS (J2) - Antenna connection for internal Ground-Based GPS Receiver

Application Module Selective Availability Anti-Spoofing Module (GB
GRAM SAASM).

2.2.7 Unused Connections

Place rubber boots over unused front panel connectors.

CAUTION

Failure to cover unused connectors may damage the

connectors due to moisture related shorts or cause the
connectors to be unusable due to dirt or mud being
packed into the connector.

2-5
2.2.8 Initial Settings and Turn-On

Perform the following procedure to power up the radio and run Built-In Test (BIT):

WARNING

RF shock could occur from coming into contact with

the antenna while radio is transmitting.
a. Rotate the Cipher switch to Plain Text (PT) or CT position. This initializes
the AN/PRC-117G software and performs a Power-On Self-Test (POST).
When the radio is first turned on, the HARRIS logo screen is displayed,
followed by the FALCON III screen. The Initializing Screen is displayed
next, which shows the radio’s operating software version. This screen will
remain on the display until the radio has completed powering up. All key
presses are disabled during this process.
b. Observe battery meter next to Battery (BAT) on the front panel. (Volume
[VOL] appears in place of this display when user adjusts the volume.)
BAT flashes when the battery voltage is critically low. If this happens,
replace the batteries with freshly charged ones.
c. Press [OPT]>TEST OPTIONS>SELF TEST> RUN SELF TEST>YES.
Select YES or NO to EMIT RF FOR TEST? (NO is automatically selected
if no selection is made). This begins the user initiated BIT functionality. If
no failures occur during testing, then the screen will display TEST
PASSED. If failures do occur during testing, then fault codes are
displayed, which indicate the module that the failure occurred on and the
type of failure that has occurred.
d. Press [OPT] > RADIO INFORMATION > BATTERY INFORMATION to
access the battery test menu. The screen displays information about the
main battery. Actual DC voltage is shown along with the battery charge
status (NOMINAL, LOW, HIGH). If the radio is placed in a Vehicular
Amplifier Adapter (VAA), this screen shows the voltage as Not Applicable
(N/A) and the Status as CHARGING. Refer to Paragraph 2.2.10 for
proper battery voltage.
e. Press [ENT] to continue. If the radio is connected to a VAA, this Battery
Information screen displays the VAA system voltage.
f. Press [ENT] to continue. The HUB Capacity screen is shown. A bar
graph represents the approximate HUB life remaining. Any time the main
battery is disconnected from the radio, the HUB is being used to maintain
system time.
2-6
2.2.9 Battery Life

Typical battery life is shown in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2. Typical Battery Life (BA-5590)

Radio Conditions Battery Life (Hours)

SINCGARS, CT, 10 watts, 6:3:1 Standby/RX/TX 14

HAVEQUICK II, 10 watts, 6:3:1 Standby/RX/TX 11
SATCOM 181B, 20 watts, 6:3:1 Standby/RX/TX 13
ANW2, 5 watts (average), 6:3:1 Standby/RX/TX 10

2.2.10 Radio Operating voltages

See Figure 2-3 for radio operating voltages.

34.8 VDC OPERATION CEASES*

34.3 VDC OVERVOLTAGE WARNING

NORMAL OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE

19 VDC MINIMUM FULL-FEATURE OPERATING VOLTAGE

OPERATION WITH REDUCED CAPABILITY

17.5 VDC OPERATION CEASES*

*RADIO SHUTDOWN OCCURS AT >34.8 VDC ± 0.5 VDC, and AT <17.5 VDC ± 0.5 VDC.

F-0319-4100-0003B

Figure 2-3. Radio Operating Voltage Range

2-7
 This page intentionally left blank.

2-8
 CHAPTER 3

BASIC OPERATION

3.1 OPERATION TASK SUMMARY

AN/PRC-117G operating tasks are generally performed in the following order:

• Turn on and self-test radio – Paragraph 3.3.1

• Unlock the keypad (if locked) – Paragraph 3.10.2
• Load Communications Security (COMSEC) Fill Data for Cipher Text (CT)
Operation – Paragraph 3.4
• Load waveform-specific plans – Paragraph 4.4
• Set Cipher Switch for Plain Text (PT) or CT operation
• Select proper System Preset – Paragraph 3.3.5
• Verify communications with other net members per local directives
Some operations can be performed at any time during normal usage. These
operations include:

• Display light/contrast adjustments – Paragraph 3.9

• Perform optional internal tests – Paragraph 3.3.2
• Set radio options – Paragraph 3.10
• Zeroize radio – Paragraph 3.8.2
• Remote Control Operation – Paragraph 3.11
• Retransmit Operation – Paragraph 3.12
• Scan Mode Operation – Paragraph 1.2.8
• Beacon Mode Operation – Paragraph 1.2.9
• Clone Mode Operation – Paragraph 3.6.2
• Over The Air Rekey (OTAR) Operation – Paragraph 3.6.3

3.2 CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS

Figure 3-1 shows the radio controls, indicators, and connectors for the AN/PRC-
117G with a Global Positioning System (GPS). Table 3-1 describes the controls,
indicators, and connectors for both models.

3-1
 1 2

TOP VIEW

3 4 * 5 6

7
11 **
10 9 8
FRONT VIEW
*USB/CIK ON SOME VERSIONS
**HB ANT ON SOME VERSIONS
CL-0319-4100-0004C

Figure 3-1. Controls, Indicators, and Connectors for AN/PRC-117G

3-2
 Table 3-1. AN/PRC-117G Controls, Indicators, and Connectors

Key Control/Indicator Function

1 Black Side Top Provides interface for various black data devices.
Connector
2 Red Side Top Provides interface for various red data devices.
Connector
3 GPS Antenna Connector for GPS antenna.
Connector
4 Universal Serial Bus Connector for red USB and external Keypad Display Unit
(USB)/KDU (KDU).
Connector
5 Display Displays operational and programming screens.
6 Cipher Switch

OFF A pull-to-turn action is required to enter or leave this

position. Turns radio off.
[CT] Places the radio in the cipher text encryption mode.

[PT] Places the radio in plain text non-encrypted mode.

[LD] Places the radio off-line for security or installation. In

security, the radio is ready to load encryption. In install, the
radio is ready to load software or mission plans.
[Z] A pull-to-turn action is required. This zeroizes all
programmed variables, including encryption variables.
7 6-Pin AUDIO/Fill Provides a connection for an H-250 handset or crypto fill
Connector device that uses a 6-pin connector.
8 Satellite Provides a 50-ohm SATCOM antenna port via Bayonet
Communication Neill-Concelman (BNC). This connection is used for
(SATCOM) Antenna SATCOM and High Performance Waveform (HPW).
Connector
9 Keypad
Switches the display to alternate screens for additional
information.
([Next])

3-3
Table 3-1. AN/PRC-117G Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (Continued)

Key Control/Indicator Function

[CALL] Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System

(SINCGARS) - Accesses CUE and Electronic Remote Fill
(ERF) commands in Frequency Hopping Frequency
Hopping (FH) mode.
HAVEQUICK - Accesses Time-of-Day (TOD) Sync.
Keypad Display Unit (VULOS) - Accesses SATCOM Ping
Test.
[LT] Provides access to the Keypad/Display backlight control
menu. Refer to Paragraph 3.9.1.
[MODE] Used to select OTAR, Beacon, Clone, or Scan features.
Refer to Paragraph 3.6.
[SQL] Used to select squelch type.
[ZERO] Provides access to the zeroize menus. Refer to
Paragraph 3.8.2.
[OPT] Provides access to the options menus. Refer to
Paragraph 3.10
[PGM] Provides access to the radio's programming menus. Refer
to Paragraph 4.1
[CLR] Returns a field to its previous value, or activates the
previous menu or screen.
[ENT] Enter - Selects scroll field choices or locks in entry field
data.
[PRE +/-] Allows the operator to scroll through the programmed nets.
[VOL +/-] Up (+) increases volume, down (-) decreases volume. (Not
lockable.)
 or  Allow the operator to move the cursor to the left or right, or
([Left Arrow] or to select a new menu field.
[Right Arrow])

3-4
Table 3-1. AN/PRC-117G Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (Continued)

Key Control/Indicator Function

 or  ([Up Arrow] Allow the operator to step through a scroll field list.
or [Down Arrow])
10 Low-Band Antenna Provides a 50-ohm antenna port via Threaded Neill-
Connector Concelman (TNC) for 30.0000 - 511.9950 MHz. This
connection is used for VHF/UHF VULOS, SINCGARS, and
HAVEQUICK. For Vehicular Amplifier Adapter (VAA)
connections, refer to the Falcon III Multiband Vehicular
Radio System Installation/Maintenance Manual (10515-
0333-4200).
11 High-Band Antenna Provides a 50-ohm antenna port via N-Type TNC
Connector Connector for 225.0000 MHz to 1999.9950 MHz. This
connection is used for the Adaptive Networking Wideband
Waveform (ANW2). For VAA connections, refer to the
Falcon III Multiband Vehicular Radio System
Installation/Maintenance Manual (10515-0333-4200).

3-5
3.3 COMMON TASKS

The following list describes most of the common tasks performed during normal
operation.

3.3.1 Power On the Radio

Rotate the Cipher switch to [PT] or [CT]. This initializes the AN/PRC-117G software
and performs a Power-On Self-Test (POST). When the radio is turned on, the
HARRIS logo screen is displayed, followed by the FALCON III screen, and then the
INITIALIZING screen is activated. All key presses are disabled during this process.
The screen will remain on the display until the radio has completed powering up.
When powered on, the AN/PRC-117G starts on the last selected operating preset.

3.3.2 Test Options

See Figure 3-2 and refer to Paragraph 3.3.3. The Test Options menu allows the
user to run Built-In Test (BIT) functions, perform other internal radio system checks,
and report specific problems when found.

3-6
 7 STU
OPT

TEST OPTIONS
BERT
SELF TEST

RUN SELF TEST

NO
YES
EMIT RF FOR TEST?
NO, YES

OPTIONAL TESTS
GPS
RES FLASH

WIDEBAND TESTS

LCD TEST

SW VALIDATION

KEYPAD TEST
MEMORY TEST
F-0319-4100-0005F

Figure 3-2. Test Options Menu Tree

3.3.3 Test Options Menu

Select [OPT] > TEST OPTIONS to access the radio’s internal test functions.
Choose the type of test to be performed.

• BERT - Use this to transmit or receive Bit Error Rate Test (BERT)
patterns on the narrowband portion of the radio.
• SELF TEST - Runs BIT for all hardware modules.

NOTE
If tests are run while in CT without a VINSON, Advanced
Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal (ANDVT), Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES), FASCINATOR, or KG-84
key loaded, a fault will occur.
3-7
 • OPTIONAL TESTS - Use this to run a test on the GPS or Receiver
Exciter Synthesizer (RES) Flash.
• LCD TEST - Use this to verify the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
segments.
• SW VALIDATION - Runs the entire internal file system through the
Crypto to verify that the software (SW) has not been changed since it was
first installed.

NOTE
The SW VALIDATION test can run for 30 minutes.
• WIDEBAND TESTS - Use this to run transmit or receive tests on the
high-band portion of the radio.
• KEYPAD TEST - Use this to verify front panel key operation.
• MEMORY TEST - Validates the integrity of the radio’s volatile memory.

3.3.4 Keypad Lock

The Keypad Lock function provides the capability to lock the AN/PRC-117G front
panel keypad. This reduces the potential for inadvertent key presses that could
affect radio operation or programming. See Figure 3-1 and refer to Table 3-1.
3.3.4.1 Locking the Keypad
Perform the following procedure to lock the keypad:
a. Press [OPT].
b. Use the up/down arrow keys to select LOCK KEYPAD, and press [ENT].
3.3.4.2 Unlocking the Keypad
When a Keypad is Locked message is displayed, press buttons in the sequence
of [1], [3], [7], and [9] to unlock the keypad. If there is more than a two second delay
between key presses, the sequence will time out and you must begin the key-press
sequence over again.

3.3.5 System Preset Selection

System presets are used to quickly change between preprogrammed radio nets.
Refer to Table 3-2.

3-8
 Table 3-2. System Preset Selection

System Preset Selection Shows the system preset that is currently

enabled.
The user can scroll through the complete list
of system presets by pressing [PRE +/-] up
or down. To select a new preset, press
[ENT] while viewing that preset, or simply
wait two seconds and the system preset will
change automatically.
Another method of changing system presets
is to press [Left Arrow] or [Right Arrow]
until the system preset number is
highlighted, and then use the number
buttons to type in the desired system preset
number. Press [ENT] to make the change.
While entering a new System Preset
Number, the Preset Name for that new
System Preset Number will be displayed and
an equals character (=) will be displayed
between the System Preset Number and
Name.

System Preset Changing Displayed whenever a new system preset is

being activated. This includes switching the
cipher switch out of [LD]. The operator will
see this screen until the system preset
change has completed

System Preset Change Failed Displays when the system preset change
was unsuccessful. Prompts user to select
another system preset.

NOTE
Not all PT screens are updated in this book to show the
black background. This background makes the
difference between PT and CT clearer.

3-9
3.3.6 Front Panel Keys

A list of the available character values for each key is shown in Table 3-3.
Some keys on the front panel keypad have multiple uses based on what is currently
being displayed on the screen. For keys that have multiple labels, the typical
function of the key, called the Hot Key function, is the label found at the bottom of
the key (i.e., [CALL] for [1] key). The other two labels (a number and a series of
letters) are valid when updating an edit field. For keys that have only one label (such
as the [ENT] or [CLR] keys), they are dedicated to that purpose only and will not
be used for any other function.
When updating an edit field, the alphanumeric keys provide multiple character
values. Each press of the same key will cycle through the list of available character
values. For example, the [1] key will display 1 on the first key press, A on the
second key press, B on the third key press, C on the fourth key press, 1 on the fifth
key press, and so on until a different key is pressed.

3-10
.

Table 3-3. Front Panel Key and Control Definitions

[CLR] Clear Button

This button is used to exit out of a screen or menu without accepting any
CLR changes to the current parameters on the screen.

[ENT] Enter Button

This button is used to accept the current value on the screen and
ENT proceed to the next item to configure. Once the last item to configure is
reached, the next [ENT] button key press will return to the menu that
was displayed before entering the configuration screens.

[CALL]/[1]/[A]/[B]/[C] Button
Behavior is waveform specific. For example:
SINCGARS - Accesses CUE and ERF commands when in Frequency
1 ABC Hopping mode.
CALL HAVEQUICK - Accesses TOD Sync.
VULOS - Accesses Satellite Ping Test.
This button is also used to enter the following characters: ‘1’, ‘A’, ‘B’, and
‘C’.

[LT]/[2]/[D]/[E]/[F] Button
This button will display the menu that is used to adjust the light display,
2 DEF
light intensity and screen contrast. This button is also used to enter the
LT
following characters: ‘2’, ‘D’, ‘E’, and ‘F’. (Refer to Paragraph 3.9.1.)

[MODE]/[3]/[G]/[H]/[I] Button
This button is used to select Beacon, Clone, OTAR, and Scan modes.
3 GHI
It is also used to enter the following characters: ‘3’, ‘G’, ‘H’, and ‘I’.
MODE

[SQL]/[4]/[J]/[K]/[L] Button
This button is used to enable or disable squelch. It is also used to enter
4 JKL
SQL the following characters: ‘4’, ‘J’, ‘K,’ and ‘L’.

[ZERO]/[5]/[M]/[N]/[O] Button
This button displays the Zeroize menu that allows a radio operator to
reset the configuration of the entire radio or a specific component in the
5 MNO radio. The results of this operation can result in the loss of
ZERO communications between radios and should only be performed by
advanced users. This button is also used to enter the following
characters: ‘5’, ‘M’, ‘N’, and ‘O’.

[Up Arrow]/[6]/[P]/[Q]/[R] Button

This button is used to scroll up by one in a menu screen or a scrolling
6 PQR list field. Scrolling up typically involves displaying the previous item in
the list. This button is also used to enter the following characters: ‘6’, ‘P’,
‘Q’, and ‘R’.

3-11
 Table 3-3. Front Panel Key and Control Definitions (Continued)

[OPT]/[7]/[S]/[T]/[U] Button
This button is used to display the Option Menu that allows changes to
7 STU the configuration of “run-time” operational parameters for the radio and
OPT the current Waveform. All other installed Waveforms will not have any
items in this menu. This button is also used to enter the following
characters: ‘7’, ‘S’, ‘T, and ‘U’.

[PGM]/[8]/[V]/[W]/[X] Button
This button displays the Program Menu, which allows changes to
8 VWX configuration. The radio will not enter programming when transmitting.
PGM This button is also used to enter the following characters: ‘8’, ‘V’, ‘W,’
and ‘X’.

[Down Arrow]/[9]/[Y]/[Z]/[?] Button

This button is used to scroll down by one in a menu screen or a scrolling
9 YZ? list field. The “down” operation typically involves displaying the next item
in the list. This button is also used to enter the following characters: ‘9’,
‘Y’, ‘Z’, and ‘?’.

[Next]/[0]/[Space] Button
This button is used to switch between multiple layers of the top level
0
screen. If multiple views are available for the top level screen, the Next
indicator  (also may be referred to as Circular Arrow button) will be
displayed on the screen. This button is also used to enter the following
characters: ‘0’, Blank Space (press twice).

[Left Arrow] and [Right Arrow] Buttons

If there are multiple fields that can be selected on the current screen,
these buttons are used to move between them in the direction of the
button that was pressed. On some configuration screens, [Left Arrow]
and [Right Arrow] can be used to decrease or increase the current
value displayed. These buttons also allow moving left or right, by one
space at a time, in an edit field while updating its contents.

[PRE + / -] Button
This button is used to scroll up or down through the list of System
+ Presets programmed in the radio.
PRE
-

[VOL + / -] Button
This button is used to increase or decrease the radio volume.
+
VOL
-

3-12
 Table 3-3. Front Panel Key and Control Definitions (Continued)

Cipher Switch
This switch is used to turn the radio on, select crypto mode, load
keys/software/mission plans, or zeroize the radio.

[CT] Turns on the crypto for normal radio operation. Any voice or data
transmitted over the air will be encrypted while the radio is in cipher text.
As such, the radio can only receive properly encrypted voice and data
from other radios. (Plain text voice can be received using the plain text
override function).

[PT] Turns off the crypto for normal radio operation. Any voice or data
transmitted over the air will be unencrypted while the radio is in plain
text. In addition, the radio cannot interpret any encrypted data or voice
that is received from other radios.

[LD] Places the radio switch in Load Mode so crypto keys can be loaded
from a fill device. (Refer to Paragraph 3.4.)

[Z] - This position is utilizes a pull-to-turn action and is used to perform

an emergency zeroize of the radio. (Refer to Paragraph 3.8.2.)

3.4 LOADING COMSEC FILL DATA

Operating the AN/PRC-117G in embedded COMSEC requires loading of COMSEC

fill data. Secure communications are only possible between stations using the
same COMSEC key. There are 25 keys per crypto type per waveform to a
maximum of 300. There is only one Transfer Key Encryption Key (TRKEK) per
waveform regardless of the crypto type. Refer to Table 3-4 and Table 3-5.
Perform the following procedure to load electronic fill data into the AN/PRC-117G:
a. Place the cipher switch in the [LD] position.
b. Select FILL and press [ENT]. The radio will be offline and the fill port is
now set to interface with COMSEC fill devices.

CAUTION

Do not connect COMSEC fill devices to the Audio Fill (AF)

connector until after the AN/PRC-117G cipher switch is
placed in the [LD] position. After finishing electronic fill
loading, disconnect the fill device before switching from
[LD]. Failure to do so may cause the AN/PRC-117G to
transmit undesired transmissions.

3-13
 NOTE
FILL will not show as a menu item choice if the radio
needs to be Type 1 Initialized. Refer to the Falcon III
Application Programming Manual for Type 1 initialization
information.
c. Refer to the specific paragraphs in this chapter for loading SINCGARS,
HAVEQUICK, or other COMSEC fills.
Table 3-4. Electronic Fill Types
Fill Type Qty Purpose Fill Device

Traffic Encryption Key Refer to Transmission Encryption Common Fill Device

(TEK) Table 3-5 (CFD) or Data
Transfer Device
(DTD)
TRKEK Refer to Black key unwrapping DTD
Table 3-5
Transmission Security Refer to Transmission Security CFD or DTD
Key (TSK) Table 3-5
Vector Refer to Transmission Security CFD or DTD
Table 3-5
HAVEQUICK Single Word 1 HAVEQUICK I FH Manually enterable or
of Day (SWOD) DTD
HAVEQUICK Multiple 31 HAVEQUICK II FH Manually enterable or
Word of Day (MWOD) DTD
Frequency Management 16 HAVEQUICK training Manually enterable
Training Frequencies
(FMT_FREQS)
SINCGARS HOPSETS 25 SINCGARS FH DTD
SINCGARS LOCKOUTS 8 SINCGARS FH locked out DTD
frequencies
GPS Black Key Algorithm 1 GPS CFD or DTD
Update Parameter
(BKAUPD)
GPS Black Group Unique 1 GPS CFD or DTD
Variable (BGUV)*
GPS Black Crypto 1 GPS CFD or DTD
Variable Monthly (BCVm)*

3-14
*Note: Either BGUV or BCVm is used in addition to BKAUPD. Uses Portable
Lightweight GPS Receive (PLGR)/Defense Advanced GPS Receiver (DAGR)
compatible keys.

Table 3-5. Waveform and Crypto Modes

Waveform Fill Device Crypto Mode Key Type Qty

VULOS CYZ-10 DS-101* KG-84 TEK 25

CYZ-10 DS-102
Simple Key Loader ANDVT TEK 25
(SKL) DS-101 FASCINATOR TEK 25
SKL DS-102
KIK-20 DS-101 AES TEK 25
KIK-20 DS-102
KYK-13 VINSON TEK 25
KYX-15
KOI-18 Key 1
Encryption
Key (KEK)
HAVEQUICK CYZ-10 DS-101* VINSON TEK 25
CYZ-10 DS-102
SKL DS-101
SKL DS-102
KIK-20 DS-101
KIK-20 DS-102
KYK-13
KYX-15
KOI-18
SINCGARS CYZ-10 DS-101* VINSON TEK 25
CYZ-10 DS-02
SKL DS-101* KEK 1
SKL DS-102
SKL Mode 2/3*
KIK-20 DS-101
KIK-20 DS-102
KYK-13
KYX-15
KOI-18
CYZ-10 Mode 1
CYZ-10 Mode 2/3*
SKL Mode 2/3
HPW CYZ-10 DS-101* KG-84 TEK 25
CYZ-10 DS-102
SKL DS-101 Satellite TSK 1
SKL DS-102
KIK-20 DS-101
KIK-20 DS-102
KYK-13
KYX-15
KOI-18

3-15
 Table 3-5. Waveform and Crypto Modes (Continued)
Waveform Fill Device Crypto Mode Key Type Qty

ANW2** CYZ-10 DS-101* MEDLEY/ TEK 120

SKL DS-101 MEDLEY
KIK-20 DS-101 (Data)*** Vector 4

MEDLEY TEK 25
(Voice)***
Transmission TSK 1
Security
(TRANSEC)
Accordion TRKEK 1
* CYZ-10 DS-101 and CYZ-10 Mode 2/3 fills are initiated at the fill device.
** TSK for ANW2 is part of the mission plan programmed via RF-6650M Communications
Planning Application (CPA).
***Baton and Medley Data keys share TEK numbers. Vectors (Point to Point networks) are
automatically loaded into their correct slot. (Refer to Paragraph E.1 for additional
information.)

3-16
3.4.1 Loading SINCGARS FH Fill Data

See Figure 3-4. Time synchronization is an important part of the SINCGARS FH

mode. A TRANSEC fill device such as an AN/CYZ-10 DTD is required to load the
SINCGARS FH data into the AN/PRC-117G. The AN/CYZ-10 requires user
application software Revised Battlefield Electronic Communications-Electronics
Operating Instructions (CEOI) System (RBECS) DTD Software (RDS) or Common
Tier 3 (CT3) for SINCGARS FH fill data.
• Master Station Operation - Typically requires an operator to set as close
to ZULU Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) time as possible and use the
proper Julian date. Refer to Table G-2 and Table G-3 for Julian date
conversion calendars.
• Member Station Operation - An operator should set the time to either
± four seconds for a hot start capability or to± one minute for Late Net
Entry (LNE). Cueing procedures must be used if accurate time cannot be
obtained. Cueing is needed to contact the master station. Refer to
Paragraph B.3.4 for the procedure to cue a SINCGARS radio net.
3.4.1.1 Parts of a SINCGARS Loadset
A SINCGARS Electronic Set (ESET) loadset consists of sections in the following
order:
• One to five VINSON TEKs
• Manual preset TSK (cold start portion of the Loadset)
• Remaining one to six slots of ESET
• TOD information (Mode 3 only)
• Frequency lockout sets
The AN/PRC-117G supports Mode 1, 2, and 3 COMSEC Fill. When using mode 2
fill, an AN/CYZ-10 RDS Integrated COMSEC (ICOM) mode is used to load all the
sections of the loadset automatically. Mode 3 is similar, except the user can load
TOD information.
3.4.1.2 Loading SINCGARS Loadset (Mode 2/3) Using AN/CYZ-10, KIK-
20, AN/PQY-10
When using Modes 2 and 3, the user must be aware of the COMSEC slots used by
the AN/PRC-117G during this automated process due to the fact that SINCGARS
fill uses VINSON modes 2 and 3 COMSEC data.

3-17
 • TEKs one (1) through five (5) are loaded into VINSON slots one (1)
through five (5), respectively, on the AN/PRC-117G.
• The VINSON KEK is stored separately.
• Hopsets are stored in compartments 1 through 25.
• The coldstart portion of the loadset is stored in compartment 19 as
TSK19.
When using an AN/CYZ-10 with the RDS or CT3 application for a Mode 2/3 fill,
perform the following procedure to load SINCGARS FH Fill Data:

NOTE
Do not switch the cipher switch or press any key unless
prompted on the AN/PRC-117G during this process, as
improper loading or COMSEC alarm conditions may
result.
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select SINCGARS.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20 or SKL (PYQ-10) from FILL DEVICE
screen, and press [ENT].
f. Select MODE 2/3 (LOADSET) from FILL PORT TYPE screen and press
[ENT]. The AN/PRC-117G displays INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE.
g. Do not touch any key on the AN/PRC-117G until the fill device has
completed its fill.
h. Connect fill device to the AUDIO/Fill connector.
i. Turn fill device on.
j. If using AN/CYZ-10 RDS, perform the following:
1. Start RDS application on the AN/CYZ-10; this may vary slightly
depending on which version is being used. Select RADIO and then
SEND. If RDS or RADIO is not initially displayed on AN/CYZ-10,
press the MAIN button or select APPL to access all installed user
application software, then select RADIO.

3-18
 2. On DTD, select RADIO again and then ICOM for device type.
AN/CYZ-10 displays CONNECT TO RT AUD/FILL CONN.
3. On DTD, press [ENTR]. AN/CYZ-10 displays SET FCTN SWITCH
TO LD ON RT.
4. On DTD, press [ENTR]. AN/CYZ-10 displays DO YOU WANT TO
INCLUDE TIME? Y/N. This is the TOD information.
5. On DTD, select Y or N. DTD displays PRESS LOAD ON RT. The
AN/PRC-117G will now display the Key Classification screen. Wait
until the fill is done (the fill device indicates ICOM Transfer
Complete).
k. If using AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) perform the following:
1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch User Application Software (UAS).
2. From SKL Main Menu, select the Eqs tab. An equipment listing is
displayed on the SKL screen.
3. Select an entire SINCGARS equipment item. SINCGARS
equipment may be listed as an RT-1523 based item, or as either
Harris or 117G.
4. After selection is complete, load complete loadset by selecting File
> Transmit > Load.
5. At the SINCGARS Mode screen, select ICOM Transfer. Check
Include Time as required.
The radio will load successfully without selecting the Include Time
feature.
6. On the SKL, select Next.
7. On the SKL, review the reminders on the Load ECU Wizard and
click on Send.
8. On the SKL, the Status screen will display Press LOAD Button.
l. If using KIK-20, select Transmit > Automatic, select the platform
containing a mode 2/3 loadset, and select ICOM mode in the menu.

NOTE
Depending on the number of items being stored, storage
can take up to 50 seconds.
3-19
 m. Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to select classification. Press [ENT]
to exit this screen.
n. Scroll through load information: TEKs, TOD, LOCKOUTS, TSKs,
HOPSETS, and KEKs.
o. Press [ENT], and a screen appears asking LOAD ANOTHER KEY?
Select YES to load more keys, or NO to finish the session.
p. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
q. When complete, rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating
position of either [PT] or [CT].
3.4.1.3 Loading SINCGARS ESET (Mode 1) Using AN/CYZ-10, KIK-20,
AN/PYQ-10
By using the RDS or CT3 procedure to fill with a DTD, the ESETs can be separately
loaded from the associated TEKs as required in Mode 1. Be sure to also load the
required VINSON TEKs associated with the SINCGARS loadset, and manually set
the Global Time-Of-Day (GTOD) in the Options menu.
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select SINCGARS.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20, SKL (PYQ-10), or MX-18290 from FILL
DEVICE screen, and press [ENT].
f. Select MODE 1 (ESET) from FILL PORT TYPE screen and press [ENT].
The AN/PRC-117G displays PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL. Do not
press anything until fill device is set up.
g. Connect fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
h. If using AN/CYZ-10 RDS:
1. Start RDS application on the AN/CYZ-10; this may vary slightly
depending on which version is being used. Select RADIO and then
SEND. If RDS or RADIO is not initially displayed on AN/CYZ-10,
press the MAIN button or select APPL to access all installed user
application software, then select RADIO.

3-20
 2. On DTD, select RADIO again and then Abn for device type.
AN/CYZ-10 displays CONNECT TO RT AUD/FILL CONN. Press
[ENTR] on the AN/CYZ-10.
3. Select NO to KY-58 question and YES to airborne radio fill.
4. On DTD, press [ENTR]. AN/CYZ-10 displays SET FCTN SWITCH
TO LD ON RT. Press [ENTR] on the AN/CYZ-10. After pressing
the down arrow, select LOAD STO 1 ON RT, press [ENT] on radio.
i. If using AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) perform the following:
1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch UAS.
2. From SKL Main Menu, select the Eqs tab. An equipment listing is
displayed on the SKL screen.
3. Expand the SINCGARS equipment item and highlight a hopset fill
location. Select H0 to H6 and click on OK. It is normally best to load
all Hopset fill locations.
4. After selection is complete, load only HOPSETS by selecting File >
Transmit > Load Selected Locations.
5. At the SINCGARS Mode screen, select ICOM Transfer. Check
Include Time as required.
The radio will load successfully without selecting the Include Time
feature.
6. On the SKL, select Next.
7. On the SKL, review the reminders on the Load ECU Wizard and
click on Send.
8. On the SKL, the Status screen will display Press LOAD Button.
j. If using KIK-20, select a platform to send manually that contains the
ESET data and then get to the point where the fill device wants you to
press INITIATE button and wait.
k. At the radio, press [ENT].
l. Radio will prompt to select hopset compartment to store the data in.
Choose compartment number.
m. The screen will allow the user to check that keys, lockouts, or hopsets are
loaded into the radio.

3-21
 n. Press [ENT]. LOAD ANOTHER KEY? appears. Select YES to load
more data.
o. Repeat until all parts of the ESET are loaded into the radio.
p. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
q. When complete, rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating
position of either [PT] or [CT].
3.4.1.4 Loading SINCGARS ESET TEK/KEK Using DS-101
When using DS-101, the ESETs can be separately loaded from the associated
TEKs as required in Mode 1. Be sure to also load the required VINSON TEKs
associated with the SINCGARS loadset, and manually set the GTOD in the Options
menu.
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select SINCGARS.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20 or SKL (PYQ-10) from FILL DEVICE
screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-101 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE. Connect
fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
h. At fill device, load key information and initiate the fill. Do not send multiple
keys. FILL IN PROGRESS displays on the radio.
i. After Transfer complete appears on the fill device, radio will prompt for
key number.
j. Scroll to select slot for key type TEK, and press [ENT]. Note that a slot
with an existing key will be overwritten.
k. Note the classification level is temporarily displayed (DS-101 includes
this additional tagging and no input is required).
l. Press [ENT]. LOAD ANOTHER KEY? appears. Select YES to load more
data.
m. Repeat until all TEKs/KEKs are loaded into the radio.

3-22
 n. When all keys are loaded into the radio, Select NO press [ENT] at the
LOAD ANOTHER KEY? prompt to return to the Load menu.
o. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
p. When complete, rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating
position of either [PT] or [CT].
3.4.1.5 Loading SINCGARS ESET TEK/KEK Using DS-102, KYK-13, KYX-
15, or KOI-18
When using DS-102, the ESETs can be separately loaded from the associated
TEKs as required in Mode 1. Be sure to also load the required VINSON TEKs
associated with the SINCGARS loadset, and manually set the Global Time-Of-Day
(GTOD) in the Options menu.
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select SINCGARS.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20, SKL (PYQ-10), KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-
18, or MX-18290 from FILL DEVICE screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-102 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL. Do not
press anything until fill device is set up.
h. Connect fill device to AUDIO/FILL connector.
i. Prepare fill device and load key information.
1. Select Word of Day locations.
j. If using AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) perform the following:
1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch UAS.
2. From Main Menu, select the Keys tab.
3. Select a key to load using the short title and click on load button, or
select File > Transmit > Load Selected Keys from the SKL Main
menu.

3-23
 4. From the Key Load Select Keys menu, check the key(s) to load
into the AN/PRC-117G.

NOTE
At least one key must be checked to proceed.
5. When all required keys have been checked, click on OK.
6. The Key Load Settings menu is displayed. Using the drop-down
list, select DS-102 Protocol.
7. Ensure other settings are set as listed in Table 3-6.

Table 3-6. SKL Load Settings

Key Load Settings Field Entry

Bus Address Not used

Activate Mode KYK-13
Baud Rate Not used
Send Wake Up Not used
Seconds Not used
Send Tag Not used
Mode Not used

8. After settings are made, click on OK.

9. The Ready to Send Key screen displays. Click on OK.
k. For other fill devices, select key(s) and get to the point where the fill
device wants you to press INITIATE button and wait.
l. At the AN/PRC-117G, press [ENT].
m. After Transfer Complete appears on the fill device, the radio will prompt
for key.
n. Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to select TEK or KEK. Use [Left
Arrow] or [Right Arrow] to select Key Number and then scroll to select
slot (01 to 25) for key type TEK. Press [ENT] when done.
o. Choose compartment, if prompted to select hopset compartment to store
the data in, and press [ENT]. Radio will prompt for classification.
3-24
 p. Scroll to select CLASSIFICATION level, and press [ENT].
q. Check that the keys, lockouts, or hopsets are loaded into the radio.
r. Press [ENT]. LOAD ANOTHER KEY? appears. Select YES to load
more data.
s. Repeat until all TEKs/KEKs are loaded into the radio.
t. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
u. When complete, rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating
position of either [PT] or [CT].

3.4.2 Loading HAVEQUICK FH Fill Data

See Figure 3-5. Time synchronization between stations is a required part of the
HAVEQUICK frequency hopping mode. A TRANSEC fill device is required to load
the FH data into the AN/PRC-117G (Words Of Day may be loaded by hand). The
frequency data is stored in the radio and the MWOD/SWOD determine the hopping
pattern and frequencies to use. For the UTC time:
• All stations are required to get accurate ZULU UTC time either from GPS
sync or transmitted from another station which has received it from a
GPS source. HAVEQUICK time can be started in an emergency and sent
to other stations, but normal operation is always from accurate ZULU
time.
• HAVEQUICK requires the complete ZULU UTC time and date. Other
radios are placed in HAVEQUICK (HQ) mode by use of certain digits in
HQ Net Number and/or MWOD segments. This may be true for these
systems, but the AN/PRC-117G would always be programmed to the
same HAVEQUICK data elements as the other systems.
3.4.2.1 Loading HAVEQUICK FH Data Using DS-101
Perform the following procedure to electronically load HAVEQUICK Frequency
Hopping data using DS-101:
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select HAVEQUICK II.

3-25
 e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20 or SKL (PYQ-10) from FILL DEVICE
screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-101 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE. Connect
fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
h. At fill device, prepare to transmit key information. Do not send multiple
keys. Use DS-101 and select Issue as transmit mode. Initiate the fill at fill
device.
i. Scroll to select slot for key type TEK, and press [ENT].
j. Note the classification level is temporarily displayed (DS-101 includes
this additional tagging and no input is required).
k. COMPLETING FILL will appear momentarily, followed by LOAD
ANOTHER KEY. Select YES to load more keys or NO to continue.
l. Select Word of Day (WOD) as the KEY TYPE; press [ENT].
m. At the LOAD ANOTHER KEY prompt, select YES to enter more fill data.
Repeat Step d through Step l.

NOTE
Additional HAVEQUICK MWODs can be loaded, as
electronic MWOD data is date coded with the day of the
month.
n. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the MORE FILL DATA
prompt displays.
o. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
p. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].
3.4.2.2 Loading HAVEQUICK FH Data DS-102, KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-18,
or MX-18290
Perform the following procedure to load HAVEQUICK Frequency Hopping data
electronically:
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.

3-26
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select HAVEQUICK II.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20, SKL (PYQ-10), KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-
18, or MX-18290 from FILL DEVICE screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-102 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL. Do not
press anything until fill device is set up.
h. Connect fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
i. If using an AN/CYZ-10 for DS-102, use procedure for loading
HAVEQUICK radio and continue to where AN/CYZ-10 prompts to initiate
on radio:
1. Select SEND.
2. Select SEND TO RADIO.
3. Select HAVEQ.
4. Select SWOD or MWOD, then OPERATIONAL or TRAINING.
5. Select Word of Day locations.
j. If using AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) perform the following:
1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch UAS.
2. From Main Menu, select the Keys tab.
3. Select a key to load using the short title and click on load button, or
select File > Transmit > Load Selected Keys from the SKL Main
menu.
4. From the Key Load Select Keys menu, check the key(s) to load
into the AN/PRC-117G.

NOTE
At least one key must be checked to proceed.
5. When all required keys have been checked, click on OK.
6. The Key Load Settings menu is displayed. Using the drop-down
list, select DS-102 Protocol.

3-27
 7. Ensure other settings are set as listed in Table 3-7.

Table 3-7. SKL Load Settings

Key Load Settings Field Entry

Bus Address Not used

Activate Mode KYK-13
Baud Rate Not used
Send Wake Up Not used
Seconds Not used
Send Tag Not used
Mode Not used

8. After settings are made, click on OK.

9. The Ready to Send Key screen displays. Click on OK.
k. If using other DS-102 fill devices, KIK-20, KYK-13, KYX-15, or KOI-18,
prepare device to point where radio can initiate fill.
l. At the radio, with PRESS ENT TO INITIATE still displayed, press [ENT].
FILL IN PROGRESS displays.
m. Scroll to select slot for key type TEK, and press [ENT].
n. Scroll to select CLASSIFICATION level, and press [ENT].
o. COMPLETING FILL appears momentarily, followed by LOAD
ANOTHER KEY. Select YES to load more keys or NO to continue.
p. At prompt MORE FILL DATA, select YES to enter more fill data. Repeat
Step d through Step o.

NOTE
Additional HAVEQUICK MWODs can be loaded, as
electronic MWOD data is date coded with the day of the
month.
q. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the MORE FILL DATA
prompt displays.
r. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.

3-28
 s. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].

3.4.3 Loading VULOS COMSEC Fill Data

See Figure 3-3. This paragraph provides procedures for loading VULOS fill data.
3.4.3.1 Loading VULOS COMSEC TEK, KEK, TRKEK Using DS-101
Use of the AN/CYZ-10 DTD varies due to differences in user application software.
The RDS or CT3 application operates using procedures for common fill devices
outlined in Paragraph 3.4.3.2, except use KYK-13 instead of AN/CYZ-10 on the
AN/PRC-117G load menus. AN/CYZ-10's use of the DTD FILL program should be
set to the DS-101 protocol.
Perform the following procedure to load keys using DS-101:
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select VULOS.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20 or SKL (PYQ-10) from FILL DEVICE
screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-101 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE. Connect
fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
h. If using AN/CYZ-10 DTD:
1. Use DTD FILL program to initiate loading of required key.
2. Ensure DTD FILL program is set to D101 (DS-101) protocol before
beginning. Always select ISSUE as transmit mode in the DTD
loading process. If FILL transmit mode is used, it results in a BAD
KEY LOAD. If using a protocol other than DS-101, select the fill
device from the AN/PRC-117G load menu and follow the procedure
in Paragraph 3.4.3.2.
3. Select XMIT on the DTD.
4. Select ISSUE.

3-29
 5. Select one key (page up and down to display keys). Do not send
multiple keys. Press [ENTR].
6. Press SEND.
7. Select SEND TO: DIRECT. Press [ENTR].
8. At CONNECT TO STATION, select SEND, or press [ENTR] if
highlighted.
i. At fill devices other than AN/CYZ-10, prepare to transmit key information.
Do not send multiple keys. Use DS-101 and select Issue as transmit
mode. Initiate the fill at fill device. FILL IN PROGRESS displays on the
radio.
j. Select the desired CRYPTO MODE then press [ENT].
• VINSON
• ANDVT
• KG-84
• AES
• FASCINATOR
k. Select the KEY TYPE, then select the key compartment position number
(01 - 25) the press [ENT]. If a KEK or TRKEK is selected to be loaded,
no key position is shown as only one can be loaded for VINSON, ANDVT,
or KG-84.
l. Note the classification level is temporarily displayed (DS-101 includes
this additional tagging and no input is required).
m. At prompt LOAD ANOTHER KEY, select YES to enter more fill data.
Repeat Step d through Step k as necessary to fill more keys.
n. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the LOAD ANOTHER KEY
prompt displays.
o. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
p. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].
q. Perform a secure communications check using loaded TEKs and TSKs
to ensure correct fills have been loaded. Key loading can also be
checked by going to [OPT] > VIEW KEY INFO.

3-30
3.4.3.2 Loading VULOS TEK/KEK Using DS-102, KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-
18, or MX-18290
Perform the following procedure to load COMSEC fill data with common fill devices:
a. Turn on AN/PRC-117G and rotate cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select VULOS.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20, SKL (PYQ-10), KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-
18, or MX-18290 from FILL DEVICE screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-102 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL. Do not
press anything until fill device is set up.
h. Connect fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector using a fill cable interface.
i. If using AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) perform the following:
1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch UAS.
2. From Main Menu, select the Keys tab.
3. Select a key to load using the short title and click on load button, or
select File > Transmit > Load Selected Keys from the SKL Main
menu.
4. From the Key Load Select Keys menu, check the key(s) to load
into the AN/PRC-117G.

NOTE
At least one key must be checked to proceed.
5. When all required keys have been checked, click on OK.
6. The Key Load Settings menu is displayed. Using the drop-down
list, select DS-102 Protocol.
7. Ensure other settings are set as listed in Table 3-8.

3-31
 Table 3-8. SKL Load Settings

Key Load Settings Field Entry

Bus Address Not used

Activate Mode KYK-13
Baud Rate Not used
Send Wake Up Not used
Seconds Not used
Send Tag Not used
Mode Not used

8. After settings are made, click on OK.

9. The Ready to Send Key screen displays. Click on OK.
j. For other fill devices, select key position on fill device.
k. PRESS ENT TO INITIATE displays on AN/PRC-117G; press [ENT].
FILL IN PROGRESS displays.
l. Scroll to select Crypto Mode; press [ENT].
m. Scroll to select slot number for KEK or TEK. Press [ENT].
n. Scroll to select CLASSIFICATION; press [ENT].
o. At prompt LOAD ANOTHER KEY, select YES to enter more fill data.
Repeat Step d through Step n. If another COMSEC type is desired to be
loaded at this point, press [CLR] to back up to COMSEC type selection
and reselect a different COMSEC type.
p. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the LOAD ANOTHER KEY
prompt displays.
q. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
r. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].
s. Perform a secure communications check using loaded TEKs to ensure
correct fills have been loaded. Key loading can also be checked by going
to [OPT] > VIEW KEY INFO.

3-32
3.4.4 Loading HPW COMSEC Fill Data

See Figure 3-6. This paragraph provides a procedure for loading HPW fill data.
3.4.4.1 Loading HPW COMSEC TEK/TSK Using DS-101
Perform the following procedure to load COMSEC Fill data with common fill
devices:
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select HPW.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20 or SKL (PYQ-10) from FILL DEVICE
screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-101 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE. Connect
fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
h. At fill device, prepare to transmit key information. Do not send multiple
keys. Use DS-101 and select Issue as transmit mode. Initiate the fill at fill
device.. FILL IN PROGRESS displays on the radio.
i. Select CRYPTO MODE type (KG-84, or SATELLITE) and press [ENT].
j. Scroll to select slot for key type TEK (KG-84) or TSK (Satellite) then
press [ENT].
k. Note the classification level is temporarily displayed (DS-101 includes
this additional tagging and no input is required).
l. At prompt LOAD ANOTHER KEY, select YES to enter more fill data.
Repeat Step d through Step l.
m. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the LOAD ANOTHER KEY
prompt displays.
n. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
o. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].

3-33
 p. Perform a secure communications check using loaded TEKs and TSKs
to ensure correct fills have been loaded. Key loading can also be
checked by going to [OPT] > VIEW KEY INFO.
3.4.4.2 Loading HPW COMSEC TEK/TSK Using DS-102, KYK-13, KYX-
15, KOI-18, or MX-18290
Perform the following procedure to load COMSEC Fill data with common fill
devices:
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select HPW.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20, SKL (PYQ-10), KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-
18, or MX-18290 from FILL DEVICE screen, and press [ENT].
f. For DTD/KIK-20 or SKL, select DS-102 from FILL PORT TYPE screen
and press [ENT].
g. The AN/PRC-117G displays PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL. Do not
press anything until fill device is set up.
h. Connect fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
i. If using AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) perform the following:
1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch UAS.
2. From Main Menu, select the Keys tab.
3. Select a key to load using the short title and click on load button, or
select File > Transmit > Load Selected Keys from the SKL Main
menu.
4. From the Key Load Select Keys menu, check the key(s) to load
into the AN/PRC-117G.

NOTE
At least one key must be checked to proceed.
5. When all required keys have been checked, click on OK.
6. The Key Load Settings menu is displayed. Using the drop-down
list, select DS-102 Protocol.

3-34
 7. Ensure other settings are set as listed in Table 3-9.

Table 3-9. SKL Load Settings

Key Load Settings Field Entry

Bus Address Not used

Activate Mode KYK-13
Baud Rate Not used
Send Wake Up Not used
Seconds Not used
Send Tag Not used
Mode Not used

8. After settings are made, click on OK.

9. The Ready to Send Key screen displays. Click on OK.
j. For other fill devices, prepare fill device to point where radio can initiate
fill.
k. At the radio, with PRESS ENT TO INITIATE still displayed, press [ENT].
FILL IN PROGRESS displays.
l. Scroll to select Crypto Mode (KG-84 or SATELLITE); press [ENT].
m. Scroll to select slot for key type TEK (KG-84) or TSK (Satellite) then
press [ENT].
n. Scroll to select CLASSIFICATION then press [ENT].
o. At prompt LOAD ANOTHER KEY, select YES to enter more fill data.
Repeat Step d through Step n.
p. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the LOAD ANOTHER KEY
prompt displays.
q. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
r. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].

3-35
 s. Perform a secure communications check using loaded TEKs and TSKs
to ensure correct fills have been loaded. Key loading can also be
checked by going to [OPT] > VIEW KEY INFO.

3.4.5 Loading ANW2 COMSEC Fill Data

See Figure 3-7. This paragraph provides procedures for loading ANW2 fill data.
3.4.5.1 Loading ANW2 COMSEC TEK with DS-101
Use of the AN/CYZ-10 DTD varies due to differences in user application software.
The RDS application operates using procedures for common fill devices outlined in
Paragraph 3.4.6, except RDS or CT3 uses the KYK-13 instead of the AN/CYZ-10
on the AN/PRC-117G load menus. When the AN/CYZ-10 uses the DTD FILL
program, the AN/CYZ-10 should be set to the DS-101 protocol.
Before loading keys or vectors, it is recommended to become familiar with
additional detail in the AN/PRC-117G Operation Manual (10515-0319-4200).
Perform the following procedure for loading the AN/PRC-117G with a DTD with
FILL application set to DS-101 protocol:
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.
c. Select WAVEFORM.
d. Select ANW2 to load a MEDLEY TEK.
e. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20 or SKL (PYQ-10) from FILL DEVICE
screen, and press [ENT]. The AN/PRC-117G displays INITIATE FILL AT
FILL DEVICE.
f. Connect fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
g. If using AN/CYZ-10 DTD:
1. Use DTD FILL program to initiate loading of required key.
2. Ensure DTD FILL program is set to D101 (DS-101) protocol before
beginning.
3. Select XMIT on the DTD.
4. Select ISSUE.

3-36
 5. Use [PUP] and [PDN] until key is displayed, if using preplaced
keys. Otherwise, select vector. Do not send multiple keys. Press
[ENTR].
6. Press SEND.
7. Select SEND TO: DIRECT. Press [ENTR].
8. At CONNECT TO STATION, select SEND, or press [ENTR] if
highlighted. The radio displays FILL IN PROGRESS.
h. At fill devices other than AN/CYZ-10, prepare to transmit key information
and initiate the fill. Do not send multiple keys. FILL IN PROGRESS
displays on the radio.
i. Scroll to select TEK number (01-25) (Multipoint Networks) for voice key.
VOICE keys do not share TEK numbers. Press [ENT].
j. At prompt LOAD ANOTHER KEY, select YES to enter more fill data.
Repeat Step d through Step j. Otherwise, select NO to return to the Load
Menu.
k. Select FILL.
l. Select HAIPE.
m. Connect fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
n. If using AN/CYZ-10 DTD:
1. Use DTD FILL program to initiate loading of required key.
2. Ensure DTD FILL program is set to D101 (DS-101) protocol before
beginning.
3. Select XMIT on the DTD.
4. Select ISSUE.
5. Use [PUP] and [PDN] until key is displayed. Press [ENTR].
6. Press SEND.
7. Select SEND TO: DIRECT. Press [ENTR].
8. At CONNECT TO STATION, select SEND, or press [ENTR] if
highlighted. The radio displays FILL IN PROGRESS.

3-37
 o. At fill devices other than AN/CYZ-10, prepare to transmit key information
(use DS101, Tag, and Issue) and initiate the fill. Do not send multiple
keys. FILL IN PROGRESS displays on the radio.
p. Select the appropriate TEK Number (001-120) for the pre-defined key
chain. High Assurance Internet Protocol Encryptor (HAIPE) keys share
TEK numbers. With Vector keys, the message PROCESSING FILL
DATA is displayed, and when loaded, VECTOR VEC01 LOADED.
Additional vectors are assigned VEC02 through VEC04.Press [ENT].

NOTE
For HAIPE, each TEK number must be loaded with a
different key.
q. At prompt LOAD ANOTHER KEY, select YES to enter more fill data.
Repeat Step l through Step q as necessary to fill more keys.
r. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the LOAD ANOTHER KEY
prompt displays.
s. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
t. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].
u. Perform a secure communications check using the loaded TEKs and
CPA generated TSKs to ensure correct fills have been loaded. Key
loading can also be checked by going to [OPT] > VIEW KEY INFO.

3.4.6 Loading GPS Fill Data

See Figure 3-8. AN/PRC-117G GPS keys are PLGR/DAGR compatible. Two GPS
keys are required.
3.4.6.1 Loading GPS Keys Using DS-101
Use of the AN/CYZ-10 DTD varies due to differences in the user application
software. AN/CYZ-10's using the DTD FILL program should be set to DS-101
protocol.
Perform the following procedure for loading the AN/PRC-117G with a DTD and the
FILL application set to the DS-101 protocol:
a. Move cipher switch to [LD].
b. Select FILL.

3-38
c. Select GPS.
d. Select DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20, KYK-13, or KOI-18 from FILL DEVICE
screen, and press [ENT].
e. For DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20, use FILL PORT TYPE to select DS-101 and
press [ENT].
f. The AN/PRC-117G displays INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE.
g. Connect fill device to AUDIO/Fill connector.
h. If using AN/CYZ-10 DTD:
1. Use DTD FILL program to initiate loading of required key.
2. Ensure DTD FILL program is set to D101 (DS-101) protocol before
beginning.
3. Select XMIT on the DTD.
4. Select ISSUE.
5. Use PUP and PDN until GPS key is displayed (refer to Table 3-4).
Do not send multiple keys. Press [ENTR].
6. Press SEND.
7. Select SEND TO: DIRECT. Press [ENTR].
8. At CONNECT TO STATION, select SEND, or press [ENTR] if
highlighted. The radio displays FILL IN PROGRESS.
i. At fill devices other than AN/CYZ-10, prepare to transmit key information
(refer to Table 3-4) and initiate the fill. Do not send multiple keys. FILL IN
PROGRESS displays on the radio.
j. At prompt LOAD ANOTHER KEY, select YES to enter more fill data.
k. Repeat Step c through Step j selecting additional GPS key that may be
required.
l. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the LOAD ANOTHER KEY
prompt displays.
m. Disconnect fill device from the AUDIO/Fill connector. Follow screen
prompts to close session and log out.
n. Rotate cipher switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT] or
[CT].

3-39
 o. Perform a secure communications check using loaded TEKs and TSKs
to ensure correct fills have been loaded. Key loading can also be
checked by going to [OPT] > VIEW KEY INFO.

3.5 CRYPTO FILL MENU SCREENS

The following paragraphs graphically describe the steps used to enter crypto fill
data into the AN/PRC-117G.

3.5.1 Switch to [LD]

Begin a crypto fill by moving the top cipher switch to the [LD] position. See
Figure 3-3, Figure 3-4, Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6, Figure 3-7, and Figure 3-8 for crypto
menu trees. Screens are displayed in Paragraph 3.5.2.

3-40
 SWITCH TO [LD]

FILL
WAVEFORM, WAVEFORM FOR KEY
VULOS
FILL DEVICE
DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20
FILL PORT TYPE
DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
SKL (PYQ-10)
FILL PORT TYPE

DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
KOI-18
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KYK-13
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KYX-15
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
MX-18290
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

TRANSFER COMPLETE (AT FILL DEVICE)

CRYPTO MODE
VINSON, ANDVT, KG84 AES, FASCINATOR
KEY TYPE AND KEY NUMBER
##
CLASSIFICATION
UNCLASSIFIED, CONFIDENTIAL, SECRET,
TOP SECRET

LOAD ANOTHER KEY

YES, NO
NOTE:
ARROWS INDICATE TOP LINE DISPLAY.
F-0319-4100-0006D
DASHES INDICATE FILL PROCESS.

Figure 3-3. VULOS Crypto Fill Menu Tree

3-41
 SWITCH TO [LD]

FILL
WAVEFORM, WAVEFORM FOR KEY
SINCGARS
FILL DEVICE
DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20
FILL PORT TYPE
DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
MODE 2/3 (LOADSET)
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
MODE 1 (ESET)
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

SKL (PYQ-10)
FILL PORT TYPE
DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
MODE 2/3 (LOADSET)
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
MODE 1 (ESET)
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

KOI-18
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

KYX-15
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

KYK-13
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

MX-18290
DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
MODE 1 (ESET)
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
(A)
NOTE:
ARROWS INDICATE TOP LINE DISPLAY.
DASHES INDICATE FILL PROCESS. F-0319-4100-0007D-1

Figure 3-4. SINCGARS Crypto Fill Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 2)

3-42
 (A)

TRANSFER COMPLETE (AT FILL DEVICE)

KEY TYPE AND KEY NUMBER
##
CLASSIFICATION
UNCLASSIFIED, CONFIDENTIAL, SECRET,
TOP SECRET
COMPLETING FILL
TOD, LOCKOUTS, HOPSETS, KEKS, TEKS
LOAD ANOTHER KEY
YES, NO
F-0319-4100-0007D-2

Figure 3-4. SINCGARS Crypto Fill Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 2)

3-43
 SWITCH TO [LD]

FILL
WAVEFORM, WAVEFORM FOR KEY
HAVEQUICK II
FILL DEVICE
DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20
FILL PORT TYPE
DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
SKL (PYQ-10)
FILL PORT TYPE

DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
KOI-18
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KYK-13
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KYX-15
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
MX-18290
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

TRANSFER COMPLETE (AT FILL DEVICE)

KEY TYPE AND KEY NUMBER

##
CLASSIFICATION
UNCLASSIFIED, CONFIDENTIAL, SECRET,
TOP SECRET

LOAD ANOTHER KEY

NOTE: YES, NO
ARROWS INDICATE TOP LINE DISPLAY.
DASHES INDICATE FILL PROCESS. F-0319-4100-0008D

Figure 3-5. HAVEQUICK Crypto Fill Menu Tree

3-44
 SWITCH TO [LD]

FILL
WAVEFORM, WAVEFORM FOR KEY
HPW
FILL DEVICE
DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20
FILL PORT TYPE
DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
SKL (PYQ-10)
FILL PORT TYPE

DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
KOI-18
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KYK-13
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KYX-15
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
MX-18290
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL

TRANSFER COMPLETE (AT FILL DEVICE)

CRYPTO MODE
SATELLITE, KG84
KEY TYPE AND KEY NUMBER
##
CLASSIFICATION (DS-102 ONLY)
UNCLASSIFIED, CONFIDENTIAL, SECRET,
TOP SECRET

LOAD ANOTHER KEY

YES, NO
NOTE:
ARROWS INDICATE TOP LINE DISPLAY.
DASHES INDICATE FILL PROCESS. F-0319-4100-0009D

Figure 3-6. HPW Crypto Fill Menu Tree

3-45
 SWITCH TO [LD]

FILL
WAVEFORM
ANW2
FILL DEVICE
DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE

SKL (PYQ-10)
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE

TEK
##

LOAD ANOTHER KEY

YES, NO

HAIPE
FILL DEVICE
DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE

SKL (PYQ-10)
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE

TEK
##
VECTOR VEC01 LOADED
(AUTOMATICALLY LOADED INTO SLOT)

LOAD ANOTHER KEY

YES, NO

NOTE:
ARROWS INDICATE TOP LINE DISPLAY.
DASHES INDICATE FILL PROCESS. F-0319-4100-0047E

Figure 3-7. ANW2 Crypto Fill Menu Tree

3-46
 SWITCH TO [LD]

FILL
GPS
FILL DEVICE
DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20
DS-101
INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE
DS-102
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KYK-13
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
KOI-18
PRESS ENT TO INITIATE FILL
LOAD ANOTHER KEY
NOTE: YES, NO
ARROWS INDICATE TOP LINE DISPLAY.
F-0319-4100-0010F
DASHES INDICATE FILL PROCESS.

Figure 3-8. GPS Fill Menu Tree

3-47
3.5.2 Crypto Fill Mode

Switch To [LD] This screen is displayed after the user moves the
cipher switch to [LD]. If the radio is not Type-1
Initialized or radio software is not validated, the fill
items will not be shown in the menu. TYPE 1
INITIALIZE will display in the menu if the radio is
not Type-1 initialized.
• Select FILL to load crypto key information.
Press [ENT] to continue.
• TERMINAL MODE is used for Type-1
Initialization using the Sierra Terminal
Programming Application. Refer to the
Falcon III Application Programing Manual
(10515-0307-4100) for initialization
procedures.
• INSTALL is used for software and mission
plan installation. Refer to Paragraph 4.3.

Fill Menu This screen displays the different fill items such as
waveform, GPS, Load OTAR TEK, and Digital
Signature Standard (DSS) public key.
Load OTAR TEK is used to load OTAR COMSEC
Fill information into the crypto. The crypto is
configured to allow the radio to be connected to a
fill device to load OTAR key information. Refer to
Paragraph 3.5.3.

For DSS Public Key, refer to the Falcon III

Application Programming Manual (10515-0307-
4100) for information about transferring a DSS
Public Key from a DTD to the radio.

Fill Waveform This screen displays a list of the installed

waveforms in the radio and an additional item for
loading a DSS Key.
Choices are VULOS, SINCGARS, HAVEQUICK
II, DAMA, HPW, and ANW2. SCM is an option.
DAMA and SCM are described in supplements.
Waveform Name Selected Use the arrow keys to select the waveform to be
assigned to the key and press [ENT].

Fill Device Type This screen provides a list of available fill device
types. The types will vary based on the waveform
selected. Choices are: DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20,
SKL (PYQ-10), KOI-18, KYX-15, KYK-13, or MX-
18290.

Press [ENT] to continue.

3-48
Fill Port Type If DTD (CYZ-10)/KIK-20 or SKL (PYQ-10) was
previously selected, this screen will provide a
scrollable list of available fill port types. Choices
are: DS-101, DS-102, MODE 1 (ESET)
(SINCGARS Only), and MODE 2/3 (LOADSET)
(SINCGARS Only).

If MX-18290 was previous selected after selection

of SINCGARS waveform, the port choices appear.

Press [ENT] to continue.

Initiate Fill These screens provide a way to initiate the fill for
all protocols. Refer to Paragraph 3.4 for
configuring the fill device.

If DS-101 was previously selected, the fill is

initiated at the fill device.

For KOI-18, KYX-15, KYK-13, and MX-18290

devices, the fill is initiated at the radio. Initiate the
fill by pressing [ENT] on the radio.

A progress screen will be displayed, followed by a

screen that will indicate BAD FILL if not filled
properly. Pressing [CLR] will cancel the Fill
Operation, and the FILL FAILED screen will be
displayed.

Fill Progress Screens These screens provide the user with notification
that a key fill is in progress and when the fill is
completed.

Fill Crypto Mode This screen will be displayed if the selected

Waveform and Key Type support multiple crypto
modes. This screen does not appear for GPS. The
possible Crypto Mode choices are:
ANDVT
KG84
SATELLITE
VINSON
AES - only with CYZ-10 [DS-101]
FASCINATOR

Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to scroll

through the available choices.

Press [ENT] to accept the type and proceed to the

next screen. Press [CLR] to abort the Fill
operation and display the Fill Aborted screen.

3-49
 Fill Key Type The KEY TYPE selection is based on the
Waveform and Port Type.

The possible KEY TYPE choices are:

TEK
KEK
(Empty key slot selected) TSK (ANW2 TSK loaded from CPA)
TRKEK

If TEK is selected, the operator will be prompted

for the key number. The key number range is from
01-25. If the selected key number is already
loaded, the display will indicate that pressing the
[ENT] key will overwrite the current key.
(Filled key slot selected)

Fill Classification This screen provides the user with the option for
setting the classification level of the loaded key.

If the classification level of a previously stored key

does not match the current level of the key being
stored, the ABORTED MISMATCH
CLASSIFICATION screen will be displayed. For
example, if key “TEK01-Top Secret” is stored, and
then “TEK02-Unclassified” is attempted, the
message will be displayed.

The possible choices are:

UNCLASSIFIED
CONFIDENTIAL
SECRET
TOP SECRET

Press [ENT] to proceed to either the Fill Crypto

Mode screen or the Fill Key Type screen, based
on the waveform selected for the fill operation.

3-50
Fill SINCGARS Info Screen These screens display information about the
contents of the COMSEC Fill that was loaded in
the radio.

Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to display all

the information.
Number of TEKs Press [CLR] or [ENT] to display the Fill Load
Another screen.

Presence of TOD

Number of Lockouts

Number of Hopsets

Number of KEKs

Fill In Progress This screen appears briefly and notifies the user
that the key information is being stored.
Key presses are disabled while this screen is
displayed.

Additional Fill This screen confirms whether the user wants to

load another key. If YES is selected, the menu
returns to the Fill Menu screen.

If NO is selected, the menu returns to the Load

Menu screen. Move the cipher switch out of the
[LD] position when loading is complete.

3-51
3.5.3 Load OTAR Fillset

Switch To [LD]] This screen is displayed after the user moves the
cipher switch to [LD]. Select FILL and press [ENT]
to continue.

Fill Menu. If the radio will be used for transmitting keying data
(TX OTAR), select LOAD OTAR TEK to load
OTAR information from another device. Press
[ENT] to continue.
Refer to Paragraph 3.6.3.2 for the OTAR Transmit
operation.

Initiate Fill This screen is displayed to prompt the operator to

initiate the Fill operation on the COMSEC loading
device. The radio will time out if it takes too long for
the Fill operation to begin.

Press [CLR] to abort the operation and display

FILL STORE ABORTED.
All other keys are disabled while this screen is
displayed.

Classification Screen This screen displays the different Classification

types for the COMSEC Fill. It is not allowed to
have Top Secret COMSEC information in the radio
if there is any other classification of COMSEC Fill
already in the radio.

The classification choices are:

CLASSIFIED
SECRET
TOP SECRET
UNCLASSIFIED

Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to scroll

through the available choices.
Press [ENT] to continue and the In Progress
screen will be displayed.
Press [CLR] to abort the OTAR fill and display the
In Progress Screen notification screen.

Fill Info Screen This screen displays the number of TEKS and
KEKS loaded from the OTAR fill.

Pressing [CLR] or [ENT] will continue to the

Notification screen.

3-52
 Notification Screen This screen is displayed after the OTAR fill
procedure has been completed successfully.
Refer to Paragraph 3.6.3 for information about
transmitting OTAR to other AN/PRC-117G radios.

If the OTAR fill is unsuccessful, the following error

notifications may be displayed to the operator:
OTAR FILLSET UNAVAILABLE
OTAR AK NOT SUPPORTED
CLASSIFICATION MISMATCH
FILL STORE FAILURE
FILL STORE ABORTED

Pressing [CLR] or [ENT] will exit to the Fill Menu.

3.6 MODE BUTTON OPERATIONS

The [MODE] button is used to select various functions that may require quick or
easy access by the operator. These items include the following features:
• Beacon activation
• Wireless Cloning of configuration parameters (does not include
COMSEC Fill data)
• OTAR allows the radio to transmit or receive COMSEC Fill data over the
air while in cipher text
• SCAN allows VULOS presets to be scanned

3-53
3.6.1 Beacon Operation

The Beacon Mode Screen allows the user to activate and deactivate Beacon mode
from any waveform. The VULOS waveform must be installed before activating
Beacon Mode. For Beacon operation, see Figure 3-9. For Beacon Mode
programming, refer to Paragraph A.4.

3 GHI
MODE

BEACON
PRESS ENTER TO START
BEACON OPERATING

PRESS CLR TO STOP

TERMINATE BEACON?
YES, NO
F-0319-4100-0011A

Figure 3-9. Beacon Menu Tree

Use the following procedure to perform Beacon operations:

a. Turn on AN/PRC-117G and rotate cipher switch to [PT].
b. Press [MODE]. The radio cannot be actively transmitting.
c. Select BEACON and press [ENT]. Beacon mode will then start.
d. To exit Beacon mode transmission, press [CLR]. Use the Terminate
Beacon screen to actually stop the beacon.

3.6.2 Clone Mode Operation

Cloning is the copying of configuration files by wireless transmission from one radio
to another. Cloning is performed as a cipher text operation only and must have a
TEK. Only Mission Plan data can be cloned. For the Cloning operation, see
Figure 3-10 and refer to the following procedure.

3-54
 3 GHI
MODE

CLONE MODE

SET FREQUENCY

SELECT VULOS KEY

CLONE TYPE

RECEIVE CLONE

TRANSMIT CLONE

SELECT FILE
F-0319-4100-0012

Figure 3-10. Clone Mode Menu Tree

Use the following procedure to perform clone mode operations:

a. Turn on AN/PRC-117G and rotate cipher switch to [CT].
b. Press [MODE]. The radio must not be actively transmitting.
c. Select CLONE MODE and press [ENT]. Press [CLR] to return to the
main screen.
d. Choose a frequency between 30.0000 MHz and 224.9999 MHz and
press [ENT]. The default setting is 075.0000 MHz.
e. Select the correct encryption key to be used for cloning and press [ENT].
The key must be VINSON and the choices are TEK01 through TEK25.
f. Select whether this radio will receive RECEIVE CLONE or transmit
TRANSMIT CLONE the information to be cloned and press [ENT]. Press
[CLR] at any time to abort the transfer. For receiving, various screens
appear showing status. If TRANSMIT CLONE was selected, use the
SELECT FILE screen to select which clone file in the radio will be
transmitted for cloning and press [ENT]. Various screens appear
showing the status.

3.6.3 OTAR Operation

OTAR allows COMSEC variables to be transmitted and received by any VULOS net
member radio. These operations require an OTAR Fill to be loaded into the transmit
radio using the KYX-15 Net Control Device (NCD) or AN/CYZ-10 DTD in KYX-15

3-55
interface mode. The sending and receiving radios must be at the same
classification from prior key loads.
This section is divided into two subsections:
• OTAR Receive Mode - Used for radios that will receive keying data from
an Net Control Station (NCS) or other radio.
• OTAR Transmit Mode - Used for radios that will send keying data to other
radios.
3.6.3.1 OTAR Receive Mode
The [MODE] button displays a menu that is used for performing an OTAR Receive,
which allows the radio to receive COMSEC Fill over the air while in CT mode. Once
the OTAR is received, the operator can select where the key should be stored.
The following description describes the process of either Automatic Key (AK) or
Manual Key (MK). The AN/PRC-117G supports RX AK and RX MK.
AK rekeying operations require that the receiving AN/PRC-117G to be loaded with
the same KEK used to send the rekey from the NCD or DTD. The KEK must be
distributed and loaded prior to using AK operations. After each AK OTAR operation,
the KEK loaded in the receiving AN/PRC-117G is updated automatically by the
rekey process. The sending operator must then update the KEK in their DTD or
NCD after confirmation of successful OTAR at the receiving radios. For OTAR
Receive menus, see Figure 3-11.

3 GHI
MODE

OTAR RECEIVE
OTAR RX
RECEIVE MK
RECEIVE AK
KEY RECEIVED

WAVEFORM FOR KEY

CRYPTO MODE

KEY NUMBER
F-0319-4100-0013

Figure 3-11. OTAR Receive Menu Tree

3-56
Use the following procedure to perform OTAR receive operations:
a. Turn on AN/PRC-117G and rotate cipher switch to [CT].
b. Press [MODE]. The radio must not be actively transmitting.
c. Select OTAR RECEIVE and press [ENT]. Press [CLR] to return to the
main screen.
d. Choose between RECEIVE AK or RECEIVE MK and press [ENT]. The
corresponding OTAR In Progress screens will appear.
e. Press [CLR] to abort OTAR operations. Once the OTAR operation is
complete, the OTAR Received screen will be displayed.
f. Once the key has been received, press [ENT] to display the OTAR
waveform screen.
g. Select the waveform and press [ENT].
h. The crypto mode screen appears. VINSON is the only crypto mode
choice. Press [ENT]. A screen appears showing the TEK key slot
choices.
i. Select TEK slot: 01 through 25. The help text on the bottom of the screen
will indicate whether the slot is already filled. When the slot choice is
selected, press [ENT]. Status will display. If the OTAR is successful and
a TEK count was received, the new count is displayed.
3.6.3.2 OTAR Transmit Mode
The [Mode] button displays a menu that is used for performing an OTAR Transmit,
which allows the radio to send COMSEC Fill over the air while in cipher text. To be
able to transmit OTAR, the sending radio must first be loaded from a fill device as
described in Paragraph 3.5.3. For OTAR transmit menus, see Figure 3-12.

3 GHI
MODE
OTAR TRANSMIT
OTAR TRANSMIT MK
NO
YES
OTAR TRANSMITTING
F-0319-4100-0014

Figure 3-12. OTAR Transmit Menu Tree

3-57
Use the following procedure to perform OTAR transmit operations:
a. Turn on AN/PRC-117G and rotate cipher switch to [CT].
b. Press [MODE]. The radio must not be actively transmitting.
c. Select OTAR TRANSMIT and press [ENT]. Press [CLR] to return to the
main screen. If no fills are loaded in the radio, NO FILL LOADED will
appear.
d. Select YES or NO under TRANSMIT OTAR MK and press [ENT]. An
OTAR progress screen will appear.
e. Press [CLR] to abort OTAR operations. Once the OTAR operation is
complete, the OTAR transmit successful screen will be displayed.

3.6.4 Scan Mode Operation

The Scan Preset screens display radio status while the radio is scanning. The Scan
Preset is activated using [MODE] > SCAN. Currently VULOS is the only waveform
that supports scanning. Scanning is configured by defining a Scan List of specific
VULOS Waveform Presets. While the radio is scanning, it progresses through the
Scan List and uses the parameters in each waveform preset for detecting an RF
signal. Once a signal is detected, the radio stops on that waveform preset. The
radio will resume scanning either after a specified amount of time or after a timeout
once the reception is complete. Until the radio resumes scanning, the operator can
transmit on that preset to respond to the reception. Scanning can be manually
stopped and resumed using the [CLR] button. Select SCAN and press [ENT] to
view the SCAN DISABLE screen. Press [ENT] to disable scan mode and return to
the preset top level screen. For information about enabling Scan Mode, refer to
Paragraph A.6.2.

3.7 REVIEWING KEY INFORMATION

COMSEC Key status in the AN/PRC-117G can easily be determined to ensure

proper cipher text operation. Refer to Paragraph 3.10.10 for menu information and
operating procedures.

3-58
3.8 ZEROIZE FUNCTIONS

There are two separate methods used to zeroize the AN/PRC-117G. Each method
allows different zero operations:
• User-Selectable Zeroize Menu - Paragraph 3.8.1
• Panic Zeroize - Paragraph 3.8.2

3.8.1 User-Selectable Zeroize Menu

See Figure 3-13. This menu allows the operator to select a zeroize operation for
clearing a component or resetting a component back to the factory defaults.
[ZERO] ([5] on the keypad) is intended to remove specific data from memory as
described in the following paragraphs. Refer to Paragraph 3.8.2 for the separate
Panic Zeroize function.
The Zeroize Menu Screen will display the following selectable menu options:
• Zeroize All deactivates the current Mission Plan and erase all COMSEC
fills. DSS Public Key, Type 1 Initialization, and installed Mission Plan files
are not affected. A Mission Plan should be activated after the Zeroize All
operation. The radio will need to be COMSEC Filled for CT operations.
A default System Preset will be created for each installed waveform to
provide minimal operating functions.
• Deactive Mission Plan deactivates the current Mission Plan. A Mission
Plan should be activated after this operation. A default System Preset will
be created for each installed waveform to provide minimal operating
functions.
• Selective Zeroize provides the ability to delete individual COMSEC Fill
items associated with waveforms and to zeroize GPS. Once an item has
been zeroized, the Key location associated with that item will be empty
and cannot be used for secure communications. This operation requires
the Admin Access password.
• The Erase Mission Plans operation is used to remove all loaded
Mission Plans from the radio. Once the plans are deleted, they are no
longer available to run from the Activate Mission Plan screen. After this
operation is performed, a new Mission Plan will need to be either loaded
from the RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA), or the
radio must be configured from the front panel or American Standard
Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) remote commands.

3-59
 5 MNO
ZERO
ZEROIZE ALL
ZEROIZE RADIO
YES, NO
ZEROIZE IN PROGRESS
ZEROIZE COMPLETE/FAILED
DEACTIVATE MISSION PLAN
DEACTIVATE PLAN
YES, NO
CLEAR PLAN IN PROGRESS OR
CLEAR PLAN COMPLETE/FAILED
SELECTIVE ZEROIZE
ZEROIZE WAVEFORM*
ADMIN PASSWORD
SELECT WAVEFORM
SINCGARS
SELECT TYPE
TEK ##, LOCKOUT, TSK, HOPSET, KEK ##, TRKEK
VULOS
SELECT TYPE
TEK, KEK, TRKEK
SELECT CRYPTO TYPE
VINSON, KG-84, FASCINATOR, AES, ANDVT
ZEROIZE VINSON TEK
TEK ##
HAVEQUICK II ZEROIZE TEK ##
SELECT TYPE YES, NO
TEK
ZEROIZE VINSON TEK
TEK ##
ZEROIZE TEK ##
WOD YES, NO
ZEROIZE SWOD
YES, NO
TRKEK
ZEROIZE SWOD
(A) (B) (C) YES, NO F-0319-4100-0015E-1

Figure 3-13. Zeroize Button Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 2)

3-60
(A) (B) (C)
HPW
SELECT TYPE
TEK
ZEROIZE KG84 TEK
TEK ##
ZEROIZE TEK ##
TSK YES, NO
ZEROIZE TSK
TSK ##
ZEROIZE TSK ##
TRKEK YES, NO
ZEROIZE TSK
YES, NO
ANW2
SELECT TYPE
TEK
ZEROIZE VOICE TEK
TEK ##
ZEROIZE TEK ##
YES, NO
TSK
ZEROIZE TSK

ZEROIZE GPS TSK ##

YES, NO ZEROIZE TSK ##

YES, NO
ZEROIZE HAIPE
ADMIN PASSWORD
SELECT TYPE
ZEROIZE HAIPE TEK
TEK ##
ZEROIZE TEK ##
YES, NO
VECTOR
VEC ##
ZEROIZE VEC ##

ERASE MISSION PLANS YES, NO

YES, NO F-0319-4100-0015E-2

Figure 3-13. Zeroize Button Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 2)

3-61
3.8.2 Function Knob Z (Panic Zeroize) Position

See Figure 3-14. When the AN/PRC-117G function knob is set to [Z], all crypto fills
are deleted from the radio. Also, the radio presets and all other configuration
programming are reset to factory defaults. The current mission plan file is
deactivated; however, all loaded mission plans remain in the radio memory. Panic
Zeroize can be performed with or without the main battery attached.

PULL TO
TURN

ALARM OCCURED
POWER CYCLE RADIO

F-0319-4100-0040C

Figure 3-14. Panic Zeroize Menu Tree

3.9 DISPLAY LIGHT MENU

See Figure 3-15. The diagram describes how to adjust the display’s backlight
features. These settings are held in memory and will not change if [CLR] is
pressed.

2 DEF
LT

LIGHT MODE
OFF
MOMENTARY
ON*
LIGHT INTENSITY
SCREEN CONTRAST

*NOT PRESENT ON BATTERY POWER

F-0319-4100-0016

Figure 3-15. Display Light Menu Tree

3-62
3.9.1 Display Light Screens

Light Mode - Provides the option to change the light setting. Choices are:
• OFF – light is off.
• MOMENTARY – light stays on for five seconds after each key press.
• ON – light is on continuously (not present on battery power).
Light Intensity - Provides the option to increase or decrease the light intensity level.
There are 10 levels. This option is not available if the Light Mode is set to OFF.
Screen Contrast - Provides the option to increase or decrease the display’s contrast
level. There are 10 levels.

3.10 OPTION MENU SCREENS

See Figure 3-16. The Options menu is used to control a variety of radio functions
that do not specifically affect radio transmit/receive parameters. Pressing the [OPT]
key during normal operation accesses the Options menu, which allows
programming changes to the currently used net preset. Accessing the [OPT] menu
keeps the AN/PRC-117G online and able to function in operating nets. Available
options are dependent on the type of net preset currently in use.

7 STU
OPT
DATA MODE
GPS OPTIONS
LOCK KEYPAD
MISSION PLAN
NETWORK OPTIONS
RADIO INFORMATION
RADIO OPTIONS
SA OPTIONS
SYSTEM INFORMATION
TEST OPTIONS
TX POWER OPTIONS
VIEW KEY INFO
VAA OPTIONS (APPEARS WHEN INSTALLED IN VAA)
<WAVEFORM DEPENDENT OPTIONS >
F-0319-4100-0017D

Figure 3-16. Options Main Menu Tree (Top Level)

3-63
3.10.1 Data Mode Options

The Data Mode screen allows the user to select the mode of operation for the data
port. See Figure 3-17. Press [OPT] > DATA MODE to access this menu. The Data
Mode Screen allows the user to select the mode of operation for the data port.
When ON, the AN/PRC-117G will automatically switch between SYNC/ASYNC and
PPP. When DATA AUTOSWITCH is OFF, available options are SYNC/ASYNC and
Point-To-Point Protocol (PPP). When performing HPW operations, this option must
be manually set to PPP unless DATA AUTOSWITCH is ON.

7 STU
OPT

DATA MODE

DATA AUTOSWITCH

ON

OFF

DATA MODE

SYNC/ASYNC

PPP

F-0319-4100-0031A
Figure 3-17. Data Mode Options Menu Tree

3.10.2 Lock Keypad

Press [ENT] to lock the keypad to prevent inadvertent key presses. Once locked,
press [1], [3], [7], [9] to unlock. Note that this screen is not secured by a password.

3.10.3 Mission Plan

Mission Plan is used to enable a mission plan file previously loaded in the radio.
See Figure 3-18. Press [OPT] > MISSION PLAN > ACTIVATE MISSION PLAN to
access the plan menu. The radio will look for files installed on the radio. Use the
up/down arrows to scroll through the list of files, and press [ENT] to select. The
radio will display whether the plan activation was successful or failed. If there are
any operational errors (such as wrong/missing crypto, etc.), they will be displayed.

3-64
To view the history of a mission plan that has been activated or in use, press [OPT]
> MISSION PLAN > MISSION PLAN HISTORY.

7 STU
OPT
MISSION PLAN

ACTIVATE MISSION PLAN

PLAN FILE (SELECT NAME)

ACTIVATE PLAN

NO, YES
MISSION PLAN HISTORY

F-0319-4100-0020A

Figure 3-18. Mission Plan Menu Tree

3.10.4 Radio Information

This paragraph provides information on the radio information option menus.

3.10.4.1 System Clock Options
See Figure 3-19. Press [OPT] > RADIO INFORMAION > SYSTEM CLOCK to
access this menu. The System Time screen displays the current time and date in
the radio. The UTC Offset screen displays the current UTC offset for the system
clock.

7 STU
OPT
RADIO INFORMATION

SYSTEM CLOCK
DATE:, TIME:

UTC OFFSET

F-0319-4100-0029

Figure 3-19. System Clock Options Menu Tree

3-65
3.10.4.2 Battery Information
See Figure 3-20. Press [OPT] > RADIO INFORMATION > BATTERY
INFORMATION to access this menu. Battery information is displayed for the main
radio battery, the VAA system voltage, and the Hold Up Battery (HUB) capacity.
3.10.4.2.1 Battery Voltage
The battery voltage screen shows actual DC voltage along with the battery charge
status (NOMINAL, LOW, HIGH). If the radio is placed in a VAA, this screen shows
the VOLTAGE as N/A and the STATUS as CHARGING. Press [ENT] to continue.
3.10.4.2.2 VAA System Voltage
When used with a VAA, press [ENT] under the BATTERY INFORMATION menu to
view the VAA status. When a VAA is detected, the battery status displays the VAA
system voltage.
3.10.4.2.3 HUB Capacity
Press [ENT] under the BATTERY INFORMATION menu to view the HUB
CAPACITY screen. This displays the estimated remaining life of the internal HUB
and provides an indicator for maintenance scheduling. Refer to
Paragraph 4.4.1.4.1 for the HUB Capacity reset procedure.
A bar graph represents the approximate HUB life remaining. Any time the main
battery is disconnected from the radio, the HUB is being used to maintain system
time. The life of the HUB can be extended by keeping a charged main battery
connected to the radio. A fresh HUB is good for at least one year without the main
battery attached. If the HUB Capacity is Low, Expired, or Invalid, the System BIT
will indicate a HUB STATUS failure when run.

7 STU
OPT
RADIO INFORMATION
BATTERY INFORMATION
BATTERY VOLTAGE*
HUB CAPACITY

* VOLTAGE IS N/A IN VAA SYSTEM

F-0319-4100-0044B

Figure 3-20. Battery Information Menu Tree

3-66
3.10.4.3 Network Status
Network Status screens allow the operator to view the current state of the network
and the port configuration parameters. See Figure 3-21. Currently, the only
available networking port type is the Remote Data PPP port, which can be
connected with a client data device for HPW waveform operation.
Press [OPT] > RADIO INFORMATION > NETWORK STATUS to access this
menu. If the PPP port is connected to a device, then additional information can be
viewed (Internet Protocol [IP] Address, Peer IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway IP Address). Pressing [ENT] will scroll through the menu and display
parameters for the selected PPP port.

7 STU
OPT
RADIO INFORMATION
NETWORK STATUS
DATA PPP STATE
OFFLINE
ONLINE
IP ADDRESS
PEER IP ADDRESS
F-0319-4100-0021A

Figure 3-21. Network Status Menu Tree

3.10.5 GPS Options

See Figure 3-22. Press [OPT] > GPS OPTIONS to view the GPS information
displays. This menu is used to view the information acquired from GPS satellites.
GPS data formats are configured under the Programming menu, as described in
Paragraph 4.4.1.2.7. Internal GPS uses this signal to determine accurate time and
current position. An external GPS device can also be connected to the radio to
provide time and position information. Press [ENT] to continue.
3.10.5.1 GPS Status
The screen displayed is either GPS STATUS or GPS POSITION. The selected
screen displays SEARCHING while it acquires satellites, and then it will display
TRACKING when GPS is locked in and ready. If an external GPS is being used,

3-67
the TRACKING state indicates only time information is being received from the
GPS. There should be at least four satellites shown in the lower left corner to track
location information accurately. Press [ENT] to continue.
3.10.5.1.1 GPS Status Screen
The following displays may be seen:
• SLEEPING_GOOD_SIGNAL - When the radio is tracking, but GPS is in
Sleep Mode.
• SLEEPING_NO_SIGNAL - If the radio loses its tracking lock while in
Sleep Mode.
• TRACKING POSITION - Indicates both position and time information are
being received.
• RESYNCING - If the radio is in process of re-acquiring satellite lock.
• DISCONNECTED (external GPS) - Radio is configured for ext. GPS and
is not connected to PLGR or DAGR.
• NOT DETECTED (external GPS) - Radio cannot read information from
PLGR or DAGR.
3.10.5.1.2 GPS Position Screen
The following displays may be seen:
• GPS Position - Displays the current position coordinates and TOD.
Position Format is defined in the programming menu.
• GPS Heading and Velocity - Based on the Angle Format selected in the
programming menu.
• GPS Altitude and EPE - Displays altitude. Estimated Position Error
(EPE), which is determined from Figure Of Merit (FOM), is also
displayed.
• GPS FOM and Key Stat - The FOM indicates the accuracy of the GPS
information. KEY STAT displays the Crypto Variable Status (CVS), which
is status of the type of keys loaded: NONE, Group Unique Variable
(GUV), or Crypto Variable Monthly (CVM).
• GPS Satellite Info - Displays information about each acquired satellite,
such as elevation and azimuth. Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) is also
displayed to show the relative strength of the received signal (maximum
is 99).
3-68
3.10.5.2 GPS Key Information
Press [ENT] to continue. The following screens may be displayed:
• GPS CV STATUS - GPS Crypto Variable (CV) Status
• DAYS WITH KEYS - Number of days GPS keys have been loaded.

7 STU
OPT

GPS OPTIONS

GPS STATUS

GPS STATUS SCREEN

GPS POSITION SCREEN

GPS HEADING/VELOCITY SCREEN

GPS ALTITUDE/EPE SCREEN

GPS FOM/KEY STAT SCREEN

GPS SAT INFO SCREEN

GPS KEY INFO

GPS CV STATUS

DAYS WITH KEYS

PASSTHRU MODE

PASSTHRU MODE

RS232 MODE
RS422 MODE
F-0319-4100-0019B

Figure 3-22. GPS Options Menu Tree

3-69
3.10.6 Radio Options

7 ST U
OPT
RADIO OPTIONS

RADIO SILENCE

OFF, ON

RF FAULTS PERSIST

ON, MOMENTARY

PA FAILSAFE OVR

DISABLED, ENABLED

REMOTE KDU

DISABLED, ENABLED

F-0319-4100-0018F

Figure 3-23. Radio Options Menu Tree

RADIO SILENCE: Disables the radio from automatically responding to incoming

signals. If Radio (R) Silence is ON, the R in the upper left corner of the display
flashes. Keying audio while Radio Silence is ON will produce a hold-off tone and
Keyline Ignored will be displayed on the bottom line.

RF FAULTS PERSIST: The RF Faults Persist option allows the operator to choose
between continual or momentary display of RF faults.
Power Amplifier (PA) FAILSAFE Override (OVR): The PA Failsafe Override option
allows the operator to override the PA Failsafe that occurs during a temperature
fault. Power cutback will occur (failsafe) to keep the case temperature below 60 °C
(140 °F). During a failsafe override, power cutback does not occur, and as a result,
equipment damage from overheating is possible.
REMOTE KDU: The remote KDU option allows the user to enable the AN/PRC-
117G for use with a remote KDU.
If an optional Remote KDU is to be used, the KDU requires firmware v1.7 or higher
to operate with the AN/PRC-117G. Any KDU supplied with Falcon II radios may be
used (10511-1300-03), but the firmware must be upgraded to v1.7 for compatibility
on both systems. The KDU Extension Cable part number is 10511-0704-012.

3-70
3.10.7 Situational Awareness (SA) Options

See Figure 3-24. The SA feature in the radio allows a VULOS SATCOM preset to
transmit the current GPS position to one or more receiving radios over the air. This
feature can be enabled or disabled by using the SA Options menu. Press [OPT] >
SA OPTIONS to access this menu. The screen allows the operator to enable or
disable the SA transmission.
This feature is only available if SA has been configured to ON in Program Mode
(refer to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.10). If the SA TRANSMIT type is configured to OFF,
then DISABLE is displayed. If GPS STATUS is either DISABLED or NOT
INSTALLED, then DISABLE will be displayed and the field will not be changeable.
If the SA TRANSMIT type is configured to AUTO, then ENABLE will be displayed,
and the field will be editable.

7 STU
OPT
SA OPTIONS

SA TRANSMIT
ENABLE
DISABLE

SA CONFIGURED IN PGM

F-0319-4100-0043

Figure 3-24. SA Options Menu Tree

3.10.8 System Information

See Figure 3-25. Press [OPT] > SYSTEM INFORMATION to see the system
information displays. Press [ENT] to continue.
3.10.8.1 Versions
The VERSIONS screen displays the versions of HARDWARE modules installed,
SOFTWARE and INFOSEC versions currently loaded, and system revision
numbers for the INFOSEC and SOFTWARE versions.
When radio is installed in a VAA, there are additional hardware and software
components added to the menu.

3-71
3.10.8.2 Serial Number
The SERIAL NUMBER screen displays the radio serial number. When radio is
installed in a VAA, VAA serial number is also displayed.
3.10.8.3 Part Number
The PART NUMBER screen displays the radio part number.
3.10.8.4 SW Options
The SW OPTIONS screen displays the software components on the radio.
3.10.8.5 Elapsed Time
The ELAPSED TIME screen displays uptime and keyed time of the radio.
3.10.8.6 TCXO Tuning
The Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) TUNING screen is used
to change center TX frequency (Depot level maintenance only).

7 STU
OPT
SYSTEM INFORMATION

VERSIONS
HARDWARE
INFOSEC
SOFTWARE
SYSTEM
SERIAL NUMBER
PART NUMBER
SW OPTIONS
ELAPSED TIME
HOURS UP
HOURS TX
TIMES KEYED

TCXO TUNING

F-0319-4200-0022C
Figure 3-25. System Information Menu Tree

3-72
3.10.9 Network Options

Press [OPT] > NETWORK OPTIONS to access the network options menu. Use
this menu to DO THE FOLLOWING
• SEND PING - Use this to enter a target address (IP ADDRESS) to which
an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request (ping) packet
will be sent. At the conclusion of the ping operation, the amount of time
in milliseconds that it took to receive the response packet is displayed or
NO RESPONSE if the user terminated by pressing [CLR].
• INTERFACES - Displays the red IP Address of the current preset.
• KEYCHAIN VERIFICATION - Entering this screen causes a calculation
that gives a unique checksum for each keychain. From each of the keys
within the chain, a checksum is calculated along with short title, edition,
and segment. Use this screen to scroll through keychain table entries [1-
10] and view the calculated value for each entry.

3.10.10 Test Options

Refer to Paragraph 3.3.3 for the Test Options menu which includes Self Test and
Software Validation procedures.

3.10.11 TX Power Options

Press [OPT] > TX POWER OPTIONS to access the power menu. The TX power
level can be set from the POWER LEVEL screen:
• HIGH - 10 watts low-band, 20 watts SATCOM, or 5 watts ANW2
• MEDIUM - 4 watts low-band, 8 watts SATCOM, or 2 watts ANW2
• LOW - 1 watt low-band, 2 watts SATCOM, or 0.5 watts ANW2
• USER - Custom power level
When used in a VAA, power levels are 50 watts HIGH, 20 watts MEDIUM, and 5
watts LOW, anywhere in the 30 MHz to 512 MHz frequency range. Above 512 MHz,
the amplifier is bypassed and the 5-Watt, 2-Watt, and 0.5-Watt ANW2 power level
is present. Refer to Table G-1 for more detailed power ratings.

3-73
3.10.12 View Key Information

See Figure 3-26. Press [OPT] > VIEW KEY INFO to display COMSEC key status
in the AN/PRC-117G for the key types of each of the installed waveforms.

7 STU
OPT

VIEW KEY INFO

SELECT WAVEFORM

SINCGARS
HAVEQUICK II
VULOS
DAMA
DSS PUBLIC KEY
HAIPE
ANW2
SCM
HPW
ROVER

SELECT TYPE (DEPENDS ON WAVEFORM)

TEK
KEK
LOCKOUT
HOPSET
TSK
WOD
TRKEK
VECTOR
F-0319-4100-0023A

Figure 3-26. View Key Information Menu Tree

3-74
3.10.13 VAA Options

This menu only appears when the AN/PRC-117G is inserted into a VAA. Press
[OPT] > VAA OPTIONS. See Figure 3-27. This menu is used to set the VAA
options:
• LOS RX PATH - Use this screen to enter the Line-of-Sight (LOS) receive
path cosite and Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) filter settings. Refer to
Table 3-10 for settings.
• SATCOM COSITE FILTER - Use this screen to change the VAA
SATCOM cosite filter settings.
• SATCOM EXTERNAL LNA- Use this screen to change the VAA
SATCOM external LNA settings.
• VAA FAN - Use this screen to enable or disable the VAA's external fan.

7 STU
OPT
VAA OPTIONS*
LOS RX PATH

COSITE ONLY (NO LNA)

NORMAL (COSITE + LNA)

BYPASS ALL
SATCOM COSITE FILTER

OUT

IN

SATCOM EXTERNAL LNA

DISABLED

28V

VAA FAN

OFF

ON

*ONLY WHEN VAA IS CONNECTED

F-0319-4100-0048A

Figure 3-27. VAA Options Menu Tree

3-75
 Figure 3-27. VAA Options Menu Tree
Table 3-10. LOS Receive Path
VHF/UHF
Menu Setting VHF/UHF LNA
Cosite Filter
COSITE ONLY(NO LNA) IN OUT
NORMAL (COSITE+LNA) IN IN
BYPASS ALL OUT OUT

3.10.14 Active Waveform Options

The final options menu is variable and changes to include settings that are unique
to the presently active waveform type. For example, if a SINCGARS preset is
selected, the GTOD setting will be available. Refer to the related appendix for each
specific waveform and its settings. Refer to the waveform supplement for DAMA
and SCM waveforms.
• VULOS - Appendix A
• SINCGARS - Appendix B
• HAVEQUICK - Appendix C
• HPW - Appendix D
• ANW2 - Appendix E

3.11 REMOTE CONTROL MODE

The AN/PRC-117G can be controlled by an optional remote control device such as

a Personal Computer (PC). The remote port must be configured to communicate
with the remote control device. Terminal emulation programs can be used to enter
ASCII command line text for programming and control of the radio. Refer to Harris
Falcon III Application Programming Manual, part number (10515-0307-4100), for
complete information.
During remote control operation the following functions can be performed at the
radio. Some functions may be temporarily unavailable depending on the operation
being performed remotely (such as [PGM] or INSTALL).
• Volume control ([VOL +/-])
• Front panel backlight control via [LT]

3-76
 • Display alternate operational displays using [Next]
Perform the following procedure to enable Remote Control Mode:
a. Verify the port connections are matched between the radio and the PC.
b. Connect the ASCII programming cable, part number (12043-7150),
between the red top connector of the radio and the PC’s serial
Communications (COM) port.
c. Power the radio and start the computer.
d. Refer to the ASCII command list (supplied separately) for starting
Remote Control Mode. From the PC enter commands as required.
ASCII programming screens are displayed when the Remote install service is in
progress. The keypad is disabled during this operation.

3.12 RETRANSMIT OPERATION

The AN/PRC-117G may be used for retransmission with the SINCGARS waveform.
The Retransmission station consists of two radios: one radio receives a signal on a
SINCGARS net, and the other radio retransmits that signal on a SINCGARS net,
thus enabling communications between two different SINCGARS radios on the
same or different nets. Both SINCGARS SC and FH modes are supported for
retransmit functions using the Black Digital Retransmit operation.

WARNING

To prevent electrical shock and RF burns, avoid contact with

antennas in retransmit mode operation, since each AN/PRC-
117G in the system transmits automatically in response to
incoming calls on the opposite AN/PRC-117G.

3.12.1 Black Digital Retransmit Operation

Figure 3-28 shows an example of the Black Digital retransmit operation. The
retransmit station consists of two radios connected by a cable.
The retransmit station uses F1 (FH or SC mode) on one radio to transmit and
receive with one group of radios. The retransmit station uses F2 (FH or SC mode)
to transmit and receive with a second group of radios.

3-77
The retransmission operation can be summarized as follows:
• Signals received on F1 are retransmitted on F2.
• Signals received on F2 are retransmitted on F1.
F1 and F2 can be any SINCGARS FH or SC system preset. In the black digital
retransmit scenario, all outstations operate in CT with the same COMSEC mode
and key, while the retransmit site AN/PRC-117Gs are operated in PT and simply
pass the already encrypted digital signal through the retransmit cable.

RETRANS STATION

F1 F2

RETRANS RADIOS EACH RETRANS RADIO WILL HAVE A

ARE AN/PRC-117G DIFFERENT SINCGARS HOPSET (FH),
OR DIFFERENT FREQUENCY (SC)
PT PT

F1 POSSIBLE MODES: F2 POSSIBLE MODES:

SINCGARS FH SINCGARS FH
SINCGARS SC ELEVATION SINCGARS SC

F1 F1 F2 F2

* * * *

CT CT

*OUTSTATION RADIOS ARE EITHER AN/PRC-117G OR ANY

OTHER SINCGARS RADIO. F-0319-4100-0024

Figure 3-28. Black Digital Retransmission Operation

3.12.2 Same Net ID Retransmission

Retransmission between radios on the same network ID (F1 to F1 retransmission)
is made possible by setting the retransmit roles to SAME NET ID TX-ONLY and
SAME NET ID RX-ONLY. The amount of elevation required in this configuration will
3-78
depend upon the antenna. Also, some isolation is required between the transmitting
and receiving station. Having a separation of 50 feet (15.24 meters) in between
stations with no natural barriers is a typical arrangement.

3.12.3 Hardware Setup for Retransmission

The following equipment is used for retransmission operation:

• Two AN/PRC-117Gs, each with antenna and battery pack.
• One retransmit cable, part number (12043-0740-AX), where X is the
cable length in feet. (X is typically 3, 6, or 50 ft.)
A Red retransmit cable is used in the Black retransmit case because the radios are
configured for PT and simply pass encrypted Black data.
Figure 3-29 shows the retransmit station hardware configuration for standalone
radio operation. Connect the retransmit cable between the red 32-pin connectors
of the two retrans radios.

CAUTION

Damage to equipment may result if the retransmit cable is

connected or disconnected from an operating AN/PRC-
117G. Ensure that AN/PRC-117Gs on both ends of the
retransmission cable are turned off.

3.12.4 Frequency Separation

Considerations for simplex operation:

• Frequencies F1 and F2 must not be within 20% of each other when
operating in SC mode.
• Frequencies F1 and F2 must not be harmonics of each other.
A Red retransmit cable is used in the Black retransmit case since retransmit radios
are configured for PT transmission and pass encrypted Black data.

3-79
 RECOMMENDED FREQUENCY
SEPARATION IS 20% MINIMUM
(NOT HARMONICALLY RELATED)

RETRANSMIT CABLE
12043-0740

CL-0319-4100-0027

Figure 3-29. Retransmission Setup for Standalone AN/PRC-117Gs

3.12.5 SINCGARS Retransmit Configuration

Perform the following procedure to configure the two retransmit station AN/PRC-
117Gs. No special retransmit configuration is required for outstation radios in the
net.

CAUTION

Power off both radios before connecting or disconnecting

the retransmit cable. Equipment damage could result if the
cable is connected to powered-on radios.
a. Ensure the retransmit cable, part number (12043-0740-AX, where X is
the cable length in feet) is connected properly, as described in
Paragraph 3.12.3.
b. Power on each AN/PRC-117G and set the cipher switch to [PT] position
for black digital operation.
c. From a SINCGARS net preset, press [OPT] > SINCGARS OPTIONS,
and use the up/down arrows to scroll to RETRANSMIT ROLE. Press
[ENT].
3-80
 d. Use the up/down arrows to select the Retransmit Role choice:
• NONE: This is the default setting used for all outstation radios.
• RETRANSMIT STATION: Use this setting for the two
retransmit station radios. Each Retransmit radio must have a
different Hopset or GTOD selected in FH mode. In SC
operation, the radios must be on different frequencies.
• SAME NET ID TX ONLY: Use this setting for the retransmit
station radio when retransmitting in the same F1-F1 net. The
transmit and receive radios must have the same Hopset or
GTOD selected in FH mode. In SC operation, the radios must
be on the same frequencies.
• SAME NET ID RX ONLY: Use this setting for the retransmit
station radio that is receiving in the same F1-F1 net.
e. When RETRANSMIT STATION is selected, the main screen will display
RXMT, indicating that this radio is part of the retransmit station. Traffic
Mode will automatically be set to DAT (data). The Large Font screen will
show the Hopset ID and the Retransmit frequency. For operation in the
same net ID (F1 to F1), the transmitting station displays RXMT TX and
the receiving station RXMT RX.
f. Begin retransmission operations. If one radio locks into continuous
transmit:
• Check to see if both radios in RXMT are set on the same
frequency (SC / SC operation), or hopset (FH / FH operation).
• Check for presence of interfering signals on the receiving
radio.
• Check squelch settings to determine if squelch falsing
condition exists.
g. The retransmit function will automatically disable itself if the cipher switch
is moved from [PT] to [CT]. The screen will display RXMT NOW
DISABLED when switching to [CT]. The main screen will display RXMT
OFF. When the cipher switch is returned to [PT], the screen will display
RXMT NOW RE-ENABLED.

3.12.6 Leaving Retransmission Operation

Perform the following procedure to leave the retransmission operation:

a. Place each retransmit station radio cipher switch in the [PT] position.
b. Press [OPT] > SINCGARS OPTIONS and use [Up Arrow] or [Down
Arrow] to scroll to RETRANSMIT ROLE. Press [ENT].
3-81
 c. Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to select NONE, and press [ENT].
d. Turn each retransmit station radio OFF.
e. Disconnect the retransmission cable, part number (12043-0740-AXXX),
from both radios.
f. Normal operation will resume.

3-82
 CHAPTER 4

RADIO PROGRAMMING

4.1 AN/PRC-117G PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION

The AN/PRC-117G must be programmed before it can be used for radio network
operation. There are three methods of programming the radio:
• Front Panel Display/Keypad
• RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA)
• American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) Text
Commands

4.1.1 Front Panel Display/Keypad

This chapter provides information to program the radio using the front panel keypad
and display. Refer to Paragraph 4.2 for a description of the display menu trees.
4.1.2 RF-6650M CPA

The RF-6650M CPA is used to program Falcon III radios and to define the radio
nets in which they are used. This application may also be used to program all
AN/PRC-117G radios in the mission plan. Sample plans are included with the
application that contain example nets for each of the waveforms in the radio. The
program also provides the ability to generate Digital Signature Standard (DSS)
keys for file authentication required for loading the plan into the radio.
4.1.3 ASCII Text Commands

The Remote Control feature of the AN/PRC-117G allows programming of radio

parameters from a Personal Computer (PC) equipped with a terminal program such
as Hyper Terminal™ or Procomm™ Plus. Contact Harris for guidance on the use
of the ASCII commands.

4-1
 CAUTION

The AN/PRC-117G cannot receive radio traffic while in

Program Mode (PGM) Mode. Program Mode will
automatically time out after approximately five minutes of
no key presses, and the radio will revert to the previous
system preset. The Keypad Lock feature
(Paragraph 3.3.4) may be used to avoid inadvertently
placing the radio in Program mode.

4.2 MENU TREES

Menu tree diagrams are provided throughout this chapter to provide a visual map
and guide the user through all front panel programming functions.
System presets have the following characteristics:
• Up to 99 system presets can be programmed into the AN/PRC-117G.
• System preset names consist of up to 11 alphanumeric characters (with
the exception of Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System
(SINCGARS) names, which are limited to nine (9) characters). The
default name for each system preset is PRESET##, where ## represents
a number from 01 to 99.
• One system preset for each waveform type is enabled by default. Each
system preset may be enabled or disabled during programming. This
allows for waveform presets to be programmed and set aside for later
use and not seen.
• Programming should be accomplished in the sequential order of the
menu. Menu tree diagrams are designed to show all possible settings;
however, only valid selections are actually displayed on the radio and are
dependent on previously selected settings.
• After the AN/PRC-117G is programmed, a communications check with
other radios should be performed on each system preset programmed.
This ensures the AN/PRC-117G is programmed correctly and is ready for
operation.

4-2
4.3 SOFTWARE AND MISSION PLAN INSTALLATION

The Install screens allow the operator to view, install, or uninstall software packages
and mission plans in the radio. A software package consists of basic radio operating
applications. Mission plan files contain specific radio configuration settings and are
used so that multiple radios can be programmed to have compatible
communications parameters. The mission plan files contain ASCII commands and
are typically created using the RF-6650M CPA. Once a mission plan file is
transferred to the radio Universal Serial bus (USB) drive, it becomes available for
installation. Use the radio front panel controls to install the plan. Multiple plans can
be installed. An installed mission plan is made active using the options menu.

CAUTION

Make sure the battery is fully charged before performing

these procedures. If a power cycle occurs during loading,
the radio may need to be returned to Harris for service.

NOTE
USB drive is deactivated when the radio is in the install
screens. All contents must be transferred into the USB
before the radio is placed in install.

4.3.1 Initial Install Screens

The Install screens allow the operator to view, install, or uninstall software packages
and mission plans in the radio. A software package consists of basic radio operating
applications. Mission plan files contain specific radio configuration settings, and are
used so that multiple radios can be programmed to have compatible
communications parameters. The mission plan files are typically created using the
RF-6650M CPA. Once a mission plan file is transferred to the radio from the CPA,
it must still be installed using the [LD] menu, and then activated from the [OPT]
menu. Refer to the Falcon III Application Programming Manual (10515-0307-4100)
for software installation instructions.

4-3
The initial install screens are displayed after the user moves the cipher switch to
[LD]. If the radio is not Type-1 Initialized or radio software is not validated, the fill
items will not be shown in the menu. TYPE 1 INITIALIZE will display in the menu if
the radio is not Type-1 initialized. Choices are:
• FILL - Refer to Paragraph 3.5 for information on fill screens.
• TERMINAL MODE - Is used for Type-1 Initialization. Refer to the Falcon
III Application Programming Manual (10515-0307-4100).
• INSTALL - is used to access VIEW, INSTALL, UNINSTALL, and WF
LOCKOUT menu choices as described below.

4.3.2 View Mission Plans/Software

Press [LD] > INSTALL > VIEW to view information about installed/available
mission plans and software. The following choices are available:
• MISSION PLAN - Views information on installed or available mission
plan files.
• SOFTWARE - Views information on waveform or platform software.
• OPTIONS - Views information on optional software such as Rover.

4.3.3 Install Mission Plans/Software

Press [LD] > INSTALL > VIEW to install mission plans and software. The following
choices are available:
• MISSION PLAN - Installs mission plan files.
• SOFTWARE - Installs waveform or platform software.
• OPTIONS - Installs software option enabling keys.
4.3.3.1 Install Mission Plans
When MISSION PLAN is selected for installation, the installation service will
retrieve a list of mission plan files transferred to the radio. Choose a mission plan
file to install or select ALL PLAN FILES.
4.3.3.2 Install Software Packages
When SOFTWARE is selected for installation, the administrator password is
required. Refer to the Falcon III Application Programming Manual (10515-0307-
4100) for software installation instructions.

4-4
4.3.4 Uninstall Mission Plans/Software

When UNINSTALL is selected, the uninstall mission plans and software screen is
displayed. The screen allows the user to remove mission plan files, options, and
software from a radio. The administrator password is required to uninstall options
and software.

4.3.5 Waveform Lockouts

When WF LOCKOUT is selected, the waveform (WF) lockouts screen is displayed

(the administrator password is required). The screen allows the waveform files to
be viewed and changed from ACTIVE to INACTIVE, or vice versa. All waveform
files that have been installed are subject to selection with the exception of
VHF/UHF Line-of-Sight (VULOS).

4.4 PROGRAMMING SCREENS

The Programming menus allow the user to configure the AN/PRC-117G for
operation. See Figure 4-1 for the main programming menu. Subsequent menu
trees and tables break down each main structure into the individual submenu
settings. Use the menu tables as a guide to proceed through typical radio settings.

NOTE
When in [PGM], the radio will automatically time out and
return to normal operation after approximately five
minutes if there are no key presses. [PGM] mode is only
accessible when the cipher switch is in [PT] or [CT], not
in [LD].
All menu settings are returned to a factory default value after the radio is zeroized
or the Hold-Up Battery (HUB) is replaced. The factory default value is shown in the
following tables as the first (or top) value in each section. It is recommended that
the programmer step through each menu, verifying settings to ensure correct
configuration of the AN/PRC-117G.

4-5
 8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG

SYSTEM PRESETS

<WAVEFORM TYPE> CONFIG

F-0319-4100-0026

Figure 4-1. Programming Main Menu Tree

4.4.1 Radio Config Menu

See Figure 4-2. Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.3 to begin RADIO CONFIG menu
programming.

8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG

CHANGE ADMIN PSWD

GENERAL CONFIG
SYSTEM CLOCK

MAINTENANCE

F-0319-4100-0027B

Figure 4-2. Radio Config Menu Tree

4-6
4.4.1.1 Change Admin Password Menu
A password is required to access Terminal Mode, perform radio frequency standard
maintenance (Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator [TCXO] tuning), or
install software. When the radio is shipped from the factory, it is Type-1 Initialized
and contains the shipping password A2345678. This password may be used for the
above operations, or it may be changed at any time. To change the administrator
password, perform the following procedure:
a. Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > CHANGE ADMIN PSWD to access
the menu.
b. The first screen allows the user to enter the old password for verification.
c. The next screen allows the user to enter the new password. Enter a
password from 8 to 12 characters. It must include at least one number
and one letter. with no spaces.
d. Re-enter the new password for confirmation. A status screen tells the
user the password was successfully changed. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to
return to the main menu.
4.4.1.2 General Configuration Menu
See Figure 4-3. Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > GENERAL CONFIG to access
the following General Configuration (CONFIG) menu choices.
• AUDIO CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.1.
• AUTOSAVE CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.2.
• CT OVERRIDE CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.3.
• DATA PORT CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.4.
• EXTERNAL DEVICE - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.5.
• EXTERNAL KEYLINE - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.6.
• GPS CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.7 for Global Positioning
System (GPS) configuration.
• NETWORK CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.8.
• PORT CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.9.
• SA CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.10 for Situational
Awareness (SA) configuration.
• VPOD CONFIG - Proceed to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.11.

4-7
 8 VWX
PGM

RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG

AUDIO CONFIG
AUTOSAVE CONFIG

CT OVERRIDE CONFIG
DATA PORT CONFIG

EXTERNAL DEVICE

EXTERNAL KEYLINE
GPS CONFIG
NETWORK CONFIG
PORT CONFIG
SA CONFIG
VPOD CONFIG

F-0319-4100-0049B

Figure 4-3. General Configuration Top Level Menu Tree

4.4.1.2.1 Audio Config

See Figure 4-4. Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > AUDIO CONFIG. Perform the
following procedure to set the audio configuration:
a. Choose how the audio sidetone will operate:
• ENABLED – Operator will hear own voice in the handset
earpiece while transmitting.
• DISABLED – Operator will not hear own voice in the handset
earpiece while transmitting.
b. Choose how the voice key up timeout will operate:
• ENABLED – Radio will automatically unkey after specified
period of time. Time is adjustable from 30 to 120 seconds.
• DISABLED – Radio will not automatically unkey after specified
period of time.

4-8
 8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG

AUDIO CONFIG

AUDIO SIDETONE

ENABLED
DISABLED
VOICE KEY UP TIMEOUT

ENABLED

10 - 120 SECONDS
DISABLED
F-0319-4100-0058A

Figure 4-4. Audio Config Menu Tree

4.4.1.2.2 Autosave Configuration Menu

See Figure 4-5. The General Config menu is used to access the Preset Autosave
function. The Preset Autosave screen allows the operator to turn the option ON or
OFF. If turned to ON, changed (or dirtied) system presets will be automatically
stored. Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > GENERAL CONFIG > AUTOSAVE
CONFIG to access the menu.

Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to select ON or OFF.

Press [ENT] to accept the selection and proceed to the next screen.
Press [CLR] to return to the Radio Config menu screen.
.

8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG
GENERAL CONFIG
AUTOSAVE CONFIG

ON, OFF
F-0319-4100-0028B

Figure 4-5. Autosave Menu Tree

4-9
4.4.1.2.3 CT Override Config
See Figure 4-6. Use CT Override Configuration screen to Enable or Disable
software switching between Plain Text (PT) and Cipher Text (CT). If Enabled, a
radio with the cipher switch in PT can be switched by software to CT operation by
changing the preset only (cipher switch can be left in PT). The front panel display
will indicate the current configured traffic mode (CT or PT).
For example, if one preset is configured for SINCGARS PT and another for
SINCGARS CT, a single net up/down on a remote Keypad Display Unit (KDU) will
also change the PT/CT mode without changing the cipher switch. Using Remotely
Operated Video Enhanced Receiver (ROVER) (PT only) and Adaptive Networking
Wideband Waveform (ANW2) (CT only) presets provides another example of this
simplified switching between waveforms. All PT Beeps in voice will operate as
usual, based upon the current PT/CT state.
If the cipher switch is in CT, then only CT is supported (all communication will be
CT). Cloning requires that the cipher switch actually be set to CT to send a clone.
.

8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG
GENERAL CONFIG
CT OVERRIDE CONFIG

CT OVERRIDE

DISABLED, ENABLED

F-0319-4100-0080

Figure 4-6. CT Override Menu Tree

4.4.1.2.4 Data Port Config

See Figure 4-7. Use the Data Port Configuration screens to configure operation of
the AN/PRC-117G Data Port. This port is typically used for transmitting Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) or retransmit data, but it can also be configured as a
Point-To-Point Protocol (PPP) port for use with High Performance Waveform
(HPW) data. The PPP port will attempt to connect to a host device when HPW is
started. When configured for PPP, the connection will remain active until user
changes to a non-PPP data preset or switches the cipher switch to the LD position.

4-10
8 VWX
PGM

RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG
DATA PORT CONFIG

GENERAL HW CONFIG
HW INTERFACE
POLARITY
SYNC CONFIG
TX CLOCK SOURCE

EDGE
ASYNC CONFIG

DATA RATE

CHARACTER LENGTH

PARITY

STOP BITS

FLOW CONTROL
PPP CONFIG
DATA PORT CONFIG

BAUDRATE

CHARACTER LENGTH
PARITY

STOP BITS

FLOW CONTROL

NET CONFIG
IP ADDRESS
PEER IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY ADDRESS

F-0319-4100-0031B

Figure 4-7. Data Port Config Menu Tree

4-11
Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > GENERAL CONFIG > DATA PORT CONFIG.
The Data Port Config menu is defined as follows:
The GENERAL HW CONFIG menu includes the following Hardware (HW)
selections:
a. HW INTERFACE - Set the DTE hardware interface format to RS232
(read only), USB, or RS422.
b. POLARITY - Select DTE Data Line Polarity:
• NORMAL – Default value
•
INVERTED – Supports inverted data polarity on both TX and
RX
• TX INVERTED – Supports inverted data polarity on transmit
only
• RX INVERTED – Supports inverted data polarity on receive
only
The SYNC CONFIG menu includes the following:
c. TX CLOCK SOURCE - The Synchronous Clock Source is shown:
• INTERNAL – Uses internal clock for synchronization
• EXTERNAL – Uses external clock for synchronization
• INTERNAL ON CTS – Radio uses internal clock, however, the
clock signal is gated by the Clear-to-Send (CTS) signal. Clock
line on the DTE (either pin 5 or 7) is low until a CTS is received.
• RECOVERED – The radio will take clocking information from
the data stream. On transmit, the clock line between the DTE
device and the radio may be cut off, but the radio will still be
able to derive the clock from the incoming data. On receive,
the radio operates the same as INTERNAL mode.
d. EDGE - Set the edge detection point for the data signal:
• RISING
•
FALLING
The ASYNC CONFIG menu includes the following Asynchronous (ASYNC)
selections:
a. DATA RATE - Set this value to 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600.
b. CHARACTER LENGTH - Read Only, set at 8
c. PARITY - Read Only, set at NONE
4-12
 d. STOP BITS - Read Only, set at 1
e. FLOW CONTROL - This is read only and set to NONE.
The PPP CONFIG menu includes the following:
a. DATA PORT CONFIG - Allows the user to view the PPP data port
characteristics for BAUDRATE, CHARACTER LENGTH, PARITY, STOP
BITS, and FLOW CONTROL.
b. NET CONFIG
1. IP ADDRESS - Enter PPP Internet Protocol (IP) Address for the
data port. Allowed range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
2. PEER IP ADDRESS - Enter PPP Peer IP Address for the data port.
Allowed range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
3. SUBNET MASK - Enter PPP Subnet Mask for the data port.
Allowed range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
4. GATEWAY ADDRESS - Enter PPP Gateway Address for the data
port. Allowed range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
4.4.1.2.5 External Device
See Figure 4-8. External Device screens allow the operator to configure the
AN/PRC-117G for optional external devices.

8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG

EXTERNAL DEVICE

ANTENNA
REMOTE KDU

F-0319-4100-0051

Figure 4-8. External Device Menu Tree

Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > GENERAL CONFIG> EXTERNAL DEVICE to
access this menu.This screen displays the different options that can be changed for
the data port.

4-13
The ANTENNA menu includes the following:
• DISABLED – Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) is disabled
• RX ENABLED – LNA is enabled during receive only
• ALWAYS ENABLED – LNA is always enabled
The REMOTE KDU menu allows the user to upgrade the remote KDU firmware as
long as its firmware is version 1.7 or higher.
4.4.1.2.6 External Keyline
See Figure 4-8. External Device screens allow the operator to configure the
AN/PRC-117G for optional external devices. When the radio is placed in an
external Power Amplifier (PA) after programming, the configuration programmed
here is ignored. While in an external PA, the user is not allowed to change the
external keyline setting.

8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG

EXTERNAL KEYLINE

DISABLED
ENABLED

F-0319-4100-0052

Figure 4-9. External Keyline Menu Tree

Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > GENERAL CONFIG> EXTERNAL KEYLINE to
access this menu.This screen displays the different options that can be changed for
the data port.
Choices are:
• DISABLED – External keyline is disabled.
• ENABLED – External keyline is enabled.

4-14
4.4.1.2.7 GPS Config
See Figure 4-10. The GPS Config Program screens allow the operator to specify
the type of GPS that will be used and the display format for the position information.
The operator can also specify the datum to be used for calculating an accurate
position for specific areas on the globe. If an external GPS type (i.e., Portable
Lightweight GPS Receiver [PLGR]/Defense Advanced GPS Receiver [DAGR]) is
selected, the Red Serial Port on the side connector will be configured to be used
with the GPS, and ASCII will be disabled on this port.

8 VWX
PGM

RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG
GPS CONFIG
GPS TYPE
GPS SLEEP CYCLE
GPS SLEEP TIME
POSITION FORMAT
LINEAR UNITS
ELEVATION BASIS

ANGULAR UNITS
GRID DIGITS (MGRS AND UTM FORMATS ONLY)

GPS DATUMS

GROUP: ##, NAME: XX

F-0319-4100-0030C

Figure 4-10. GPS Config Menu Tree

NOTE
GPS does not operate when the receive frequency is in
the range of 353.0 MHz to 357.0 MHz.

4-15
Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > GENERAL CONFIG and select GPS CONFIG.
The GPS config menu is defined as follows:
a. GPS TYPE:
• INTERNAL – The internal GPS is used. Configure internal
GPS as described in remaining steps.
• DISABLED – No GPS will be used.
• INTERNAL PASS-THRU – This routes the GPS signals
outside the radio so the customer can use for GPS functions
b. GPS SLEEP CYCLE - This is only used when GPS TYPE is INTERNAL.
GPS Sleep Cycle is a power-saving feature used to conserve battery
power. Enabling runs a sleep cycle based on the sleep time in the next
step.
c. GPS SLEEP TIME - This is only used when GPS SLEEP CYCLE is
ENABLED. The Sleep Time sets the length of time that the GPS module
is powered off before powering on to acquire new GPS data from the
satellites. The radio default setting is 15 minutes; the range of the setting
is 0001 to 9999 minutes.
d. POSITION FORMAT - Choose the format of the position display:
• Latitude/Longitude Degrees/Minutes/Seconds (LAT LONG
DMS)
• Latitude/Longitude Degrees/Minutes (LAT LONG DM)
• Military Grid Reference System (MGRS)-OLD (based on 3
ellipsoids)
• MGRS-NEW (based on 8 ellipsoids)
• Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)/Universal Plotting
Sheet (UPS)
e. LINEAR UNITS - Select units of measure for the GPS display:
• METRIC - Kilometers per hour
• STATUTE - Miles per hour
• NAUTICAL - Knots
f. ELEVATION BASIS - Select the reference for elevation reading:
• MEAN SEA LEVEL
• DATUM BASED

4-16
g. ANGULAR UNITS - Select the format of angular units:
• DEGREES MAGNETIC
• DEGREES TRUE
• MIL MAGNETIC
• MIL TRUE
• STRECK MAGNETIC
• STRECK TRUE
h. GRID DIGITS - If MGRS-OLD, MGRS-NEW, or UTM/UPS was
previously selected under POSITION FORMAT, scroll to select the
number of Grid Digits to be displayed: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14.
i. DATUM PROGRAMMING - To choose the GPS map datum type for the
radio’s operating location, first select either the COMMON group which
contains: WGD, WGS, USER 1 (custom), USER 2 (custom), or select
one of the Groups. The datums are grouped alphabetically and the
locations are described in detail as you scroll up/down through the
abbreviation choices.
To modify custom USER datums, refer to the AN/PRC-117G Operation
Manual, part number (10515-0319-4200).

4-17
4.4.1.2.8 Network Configuration
See Figure 4-11. This menu allows for configuration of network settings.

8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG
NETWORK CONFIG

PPP SETTINGS (RESERVED)

IPV4 CONFIG
RED ICMP CONFIG

MESSAGE PROCESSING

ENABLED, DISABLED
RED PING REPLY

ENABLED, DISABLED
IKE CONFIG

TIMEOUT (SECONDS)

5 TO 30
MAX RETRANS ATTEMPTS

0 TO 10

TCP ACCEL CONFIG

TCP ACCEL CONFIG

ENABLED, DISABLED

RED ETHERNET CONFIG

RED ETHERNET PORT

BUILTIN, USB

F-0319-4100-0081

Figure 4-11. Network Configuration Menu Tree

4-18
4.4.1.2.9 Port Configuration
See Figure 4-12. This menu allows for configuration of the J3 Red Port.

8 VWX
PGM

RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG
PORT CONFIG

PORT J3

ASCII
BAUDRATE

9600, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200

CHARACTER LENGTH

8, 7
PARITY

NONE, EVEN, ODD

STOP BITS

1, 2
F-0319-4100-XXX

Figure 4-12. Port Configuration Menu Tree

4.4.1.2.10 SA Configuration
See Figure 4-13. Situational Awareness in the AN/PRC-117G allows the operator
to transmit the current radio position every time the operator keys the radio for
voice. Position information is as reported by the GPS. Each radio needs to be
configured with a unique Combat Identification (ID) to distinguish that radio from all
the others configured on the same net. The GPS position is only transmitted in CT
mode, and in the VULOS and Satellite Communications (SATCOM) frequency
range 30.0000 to 511.9950 MHz. If SA is enabled, the radio will broadcast its
position every time the operator keys the radio. The radio must have received a
current position from an internal or external GPS receiver with the last five minutes
from an internal or external GPS receiver. The receiving station must be a radio that
supports receiving SA reports such as: AN/PRC-152, a AN/PRC-117G, or an
AN/PRC-117F.

4-19
 8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG

GENERAL CONFIG
SA CONFIG

COMBAT ID
SA COMBAT ID
VULOS SA CONFIG

SA TRANSMIT MODE
AUTO, OFF
VULOS VOICE TX ONLY
SA RECEIVE
ON, OFF

SA PACKET TYPE
HARRIS, CURSOR ON TARGET
COT EXPIRATION

SA DEST IP ADDRESS
PPP PEER, CUSTOM IP
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
SA PORT
XXXX
LOCAL SA PORT
ON, OFF F-0319-4100-0032B

Figure 4-13. Situational Awareness Menu Tree

Perform the following procedure to configure SA:

a. Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > GENERAL CONFIG > SA CONFIG.
b. Select COMBAT ID from the SA CONFIG menu. Set the Combat ID to a
unique number for this radio. Press [ENT] to continue.
c. Select SA TRANSMIT MODE from the SA CONFIG menu. Options are:
• OFF - Disables the SA feature. You may also disable the SA
feature through [OPT] > SA OPTIONS.
• AUTO - SA transmits at start of Push-To-Talk (PTT) keying.
GPS must be enabled.
Select the desired option and press [ENT].
4-20
 d. If AUTO was selected for the SA TRANSMIT MODE, then the VULOS
VOICE TX ONLY screen is displayed to inform the operator that the SA
data is only transmitted over VULOS and SATCOM frequencies (30 to
511.9950 MHz).
e. Set SA RECEIVE to ON or OFF. If set ON continue with SA receive
configuration. From OFF, return to the SA CONFIG menu.
f. Set SA PACKET TYPE to HARRIS or CURSOR ON TARGET (CoT).
Also set the COT EXPIRATION in minutes if COT is used.
g. Set SA DEST IP ADDRESS to PPP PEER or CUSTOM IP. Also set the
IP Address if CUSTOM IP is used.
h. Set SA PORT to a valid port number (00000 to 65535).
i. Set LOCAL SA PORT to ON or OFF.
4.4.1.2.11 VPOD Config
See Figure 4-14. This menu allows for configuration of Voice Priority Over Data
(VPOD).

8 VWX
PGM
RADIO CONFIG
GENERAL CONFIG

VPOD CONFIG
VPOD

VOICE PRIORITY, DISABLED,

MUTE DATA AUDIO

F-0319-4100-0085

Figure 4-14. VPOD CONFIG Menu Tree

4-21
4.4.1.3 System Clock
See Figure 4-15. System Clock programming sets the radio date and time. An
accurate net wide time is required for most radio functions such as SINCGARS and
HAVEQUICK.

NOTE
SINCGARS Global Time-Of-Day (GTOD) is configured
separately from the radio’s System Clock. Refer to
Paragraph B.1.3.1 for SINCGARS GTOD configuration.

NOTE
ANW2 Time-of-Day (TOD) is configured under the
ANW2 TOD menu. Refer to Paragraph E.6.1.

8 VWX
PGM

RADIO CONFIG

SYSTEM CLOCK

CURRENT TIME

CURRENT DATE

UTC OFFSET

SYSTEM CLOCK CONFIG

DATE FORMAT

TIME FORMAT
LEAP SECONDS

F-0319-4100-0045B

Figure 4-15. System Clock Programming Menu Tree

4.4.1.3.1 Current Time

Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > SYSTEM CLOCK > CURRENT TIME. Perform
the following procedure to set the current time:

4-22
 a. If time is not GPS acquired, the user should set the System Clock
manually. The display and entry varies based on the time format
selected. Format can be 12 or 24 hour format. Not available in ZULU
format.
b. If time is GPS acquired, the display automatically shows the GPS time
and cannot be set.
c. Press [CLR] or [ENT] to return to the System Clock menu.
4.4.1.3.2 Current Date
Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > SYSTEM CLOCK > CURRENT DATE. Perform
the following procedure to set the current date:
a. If date is not GPS acquired, the user may set the date. The display and
entry varies based on the date format selected. It can be Year-Month-
Day (YY-MM-DD), ZULU, Month-Day-Year (MM-DD-YY), or Day-Month-
Year) DD-MM-YY.
b. If date is GPS acquired, the display automatically shows the GPS date
and cannot be set.
c. Press [CLR] or [ENT] to return to the System Clock menu.
4.4.1.3.3 UTC Offset
Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > SYSTEM CLOCK > Universal Time Coordinated
(UTC) OFFSET. Set the UTC Offset to correspond to the difference between local
time and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)/ZULU time. Changing this parameter
changes the time that is displayed, not the radio time. After this parameter is set,
the System Clock Current Time screen should be viewed to ensure the proper time
is set. Perform the following procedure to set the UTC Offset:
a. Press [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to change between a positive or
negative value.
b. Press [Left Arrow] or [Right Arrow] to switch between the sign field and
the value field and move between the digits in the value field. Valid
settings are from -23:59 to +23:59.
4.4.1.3.4 System Clock Config
Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > SYSTEM CLOCK > SYSTEM CLOCK CONFIG.
Perform the following procedure to set the system clock:
a. Set the preferred date format:
• MM-DD-YY (month-day-year)

4-23
 • DD-MM-YY (day-month-year)
• ZULU (UTC time format)
• YY-MM-DD (year-month-day)
b. Configure the format that the radio uses to display system time. This
choice is not available if ZULU was selected previously.
• LOCAL 12-HOUR
• LOCAL 24-HOUR
c. Set the GPS Leap Seconds to the difference between real time and GPS
satellite time, as determined by the GPS consortium. The user must
enter a value in the range of 0 to 99 seconds. The setting for the year
2009 is 14 (this value does NOT change every year).
d. Press [CLR] or [ENT] to return to the System Clock menu.
4.4.1.4 Maintenance Configuration
Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > MAINTENANCE to obtain the maintenance
menus. The Maintenance screens provide operations that may need to be
performed as routine maintenance. An Administrator Password is needed to
perform any Maintenance function.

NOTE
Any options contained in this menu should only be
executed by a trained maintenance person that is
qualified to perform these operations.
4.4.1.4.1 Reset HUB Capacity
The HUB is responsible for maintaining radio time and Communications Security
(COMSEC) Fill information while the radio is disconnected from its main power
source. A fresh HUB will minimally last one year from the date it was installed in the
radio. When the HUB Replaced date is set, the radio will keep track of the time that
has elapsed since that date. The radio will display a warning when the HUB
capacity is near expiration or has expired. The life of the HUB can be increased by
keeping a charged main battery connected since the HUB is only utilized when a
main battery is not present. The radio can track how long a charged main battery
has been connected and will extend the HUB capacity by that amount of time. Any
changes to the radio’s system clock will update the HUB Replaced date so the
remaining HUB capacity is not affected by system clock updates (manual or GPS).

4-24
Once the HUB capacity expires, the HUB may still have some charge left, but at
any time the radio may lose its programmed radio time and COMSEC Fill when the
main battery is disconnected (or runs out of charge). It is highly recommended to
replace the HUB at or near expiration to prevent any unexpected data loss. Once
the HUB has been replaced, the HUB Replaced date can be set using the RESET
HUB CAPACITY option. If this operation is performed at any time other than when
the HUB is replaced, the reported HUB capacity remaining will be invalid and it will
be difficult to determine when the HUB should be replaced.
Reset the HUB Capacity as follows:
a. Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > MAINTENANCE > RESET HUB
CAPACITY. Press [ENT] to continue.
b. Enter the Administrator password and press [ENT] to continue. The
screen warns the operator that the HUB CAPACITY WILL BE RESET.
Press [ENT] to continue.
c. At the RESET HUB CAPACITY screen, confirm that the HUB capacity
should be reset. Select YES to reset the HUB Capacity bar indicator that
is shown in the [OPT] > RADIO INFORMATION > BATTERY
INFORMATION > HUB CAPACITY menu. The indicator will be reset to
one year.
4.4.1.4.2 Reset Factory Defaults
This function resets the radio to factory default configurations and erases all
COMSEC keys, user configuration, and mission plans. This operation should only
be performed by an advanced user.
Reset the factory defaults as follows:
a. Press [PGM] > RADIO CONFIG > MAINTENANCE > RESET FACTORY
DEAULTS. Press [ENT] to continue.
b. Enter the Administrator password and press [ENT] to continue. The
screen warns the operator that the current operation will reset the radio
to factory default configurations and erase all COMSEC keys, user
configuration, and mission plans. Press [ENT] to continue.
c. At the RESTORE DEFAULTS screen, confirm that the factory defaults
should be reset. Select YES to reset the factory defaults. Status
messages will then appear indicating that the radio has been reset to
factory defaults.

4-25
4.4.1.4.3 Extending HUB Life
It is recommended to keep a fully charged battery on the radio during storage to
prevent unnecessary HUB usage. The life of the HUB will be increased by keeping
a fully charged main battery connected to the radio since the HUB is only utilized
when a main battery is not present. The radio can track how long a main battery
has been connected and will extend the HUB capacity by that amount of time.

4.4.2 System Preset Programming

See Figure 4-16. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESETS for the system presets menu.
A system preset is a way to map a waveform preset in order to activate its
associated configuration set. The system preset also includes a specific name and
description for helping the operator distinguish between the different system
presets in the radio.
The AN/PRC-117G supports up to 99 system presets. All system presets can be
accessed by using [PRE + / -]. A system preset number can also be quickly entered
on the main screen by highlighting the preset number and entering a number.
A single Scan system preset is also provided, which is accessed by
[MODE]>SCAN. When the Scan system preset is selected, the waveform will be
activated, and the radio will begin scanning if the waveform is configured properly.
Refer to Paragraph A.6.2.

8 VWX
PGM

SYSTEM PRESETS

SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG

SYSTEM PRESET NUMBER
PRESET DESCRIPTION

PRESET WAVEFORM
(REFER TO WAVEFORM APPENDIX)
RESET SYSTEM PRESET
SYSTEM SCAN CONFIG
(VULOS ONLY - REFER TO APPENDIX A)

F-0319-4100-0033B

Figure 4-16. System Preset Menu Tree

4-26
4.4.2.1 System Preset Menu
Perform the following procedure to assign system preset numbers to waveform
presets. A waveform preset includes configuration parameters associated with a
particular waveform (VULOS, SINCGARS, etc.), where a system preset includes
parameters related to net operation.
a. Press [PGM].
b. Select SYSTEM PRESETS.
c. Select SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG.
d. Use number keys to enter a System Preset Number (01 - 99), and press
[ENT].
e. Enter a text description or name for the system preset number. Any
alphanumeric entry may be added for description. Press [ENT] to
continue.
f. Choose the Preset Waveform type: VULOS, SINCGARS, HAVEQUICK,
HPW, or ANW2.
g. Refer to the appendices for specific waveform programming parameters:
1. VULOS - Appendix A
2. SINCGARS - Appendix B
3. HAVEQUICK - Appendix C
4. HPW - Appendix D
5. ANW2 - Appendix E
For other waveforms not listed, refer to the appropriate supplement.

4-27
 This page intentionally left blank.

4-28
 APPENDIX A

VULOS

A.1 VULOS FIXED FREQUENCY OPERATION

VHF/UHF Line-of-Sight (VULOS) operation provides fixed frequency Line Of Sight

(LOS) communications over the VHF and UHF frequency bands. VULOS is also
operable over dedicated UHF Satellite Communications (SATCOM) channels.
This appendix defines actions that are specific for operation and programming of
the AN/PRC-117G when using the VULOS waveform. Refer to Chapter 3 and
Chapter 4 for key loading, global radio operations, and global radio programming
before using this appendix. The RF-6650M Communications Planning Application
(CPA) contains sample plans with example nets for each of the waveforms in the
radio. Sample plans can be used as a starting point for programming a waveform
in the radio.

A.1.1 VULOS MAIN STATUS SCREENS

The Main VULOS Status Screens present the user with major parameters used for
receiving or transmitting voice and data. Paragraph A.1.2 shows the main screens
that are seen when a VULOS net is selected. Use the [Next] key to scroll through
the main screens. The function of each field is explained in the accompanying text.

A-1
A.1.2 VULOS Main Screens

VULOS Preset Main Screen This is the first screen shown when a VULOS net
is selected. The fields are described below.
System Preset Number - Identifies the number
used for the current system preset.
Preset Type - Indicates the type of waveform the
preset uses.
LOS - VHF/UHF Line of Sight specific preset
SATCOM - Dedicated Satellite Communications
preset
Traffic Type - Indicates the type of traffic used for
the current preset.
Voice (VOC)
Data (DAT)
Data/Voice (D/V)
System Preset Name - Identifies the name used
for the current preset.
Modulation Type - Specifies how the data is
modulated on the frequency over which it is
transmitted or received. This field is defined by
Option Code that is selectable depending on other
programmed parameters. The possible
modulation types are: Shaped Binary Phase Shift
Keying (SBPSK), Continuous Phase Modulation
(CPM), AM, FM.
Squelch Type - The selected squelch type is
displayed based on the programmed preset
setting. The possible values are:
“---“ - Squelch Disabled
OFF - Squelch is off
Noise (NOI) squelch
Tone (TON) squelch
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System
(CTCSS [TCS]) squelch
Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System
(CDCSS [DCS]) squelch
Busy (BSY) - is used if either CTCSS or CDCSS
has been selected. The modem will begin
monitoring the channel for other users and if
another user begins transmitting on the same
frequency, the TCS or DCS display will change to
BSY to indicate the channel is busy.

Channel Number - Used for SATCOM operation

only. Allows the Channel Number to be changed.
The valid values for this field are 001 to 249 and
999. To program a new channel, press [ENT].
Press [CLR] to cancel channel change. Refer to
Table G-6.

A-2
 Crypto Key Number - Displays the current crypto
key type and number that is being used by the
VULOS preset when the cipher mode switch is in
the [CT] position. This field will only scroll through
the list of installed keys that are valid for the
waveform. When the cipher switch is in the [PT]
position, then "---" is displayed and the field is not
selectable.

VULOS Channel Main Screen This is the second screen shown when a VULOS
(Press [Next] key to view) net is selected. The fields are described below.

RX Frequency - The RX Frequency is the

Receive Frequency. For SATCOM operation, this
field is only selectable when a Channel Number of
248, 249, or 999 is selected.

With the RX Frequency field highlighted, press

[ENT] to place this field in edit mode for
modification. Pressing [ENT] after editing this field
places the TX Frequency field into edit mode. If no

CHANNEL NUMBER
changes are made, the RX Frequency will be

RX FREQUENCY
TX FREQUENCY
used.

TX Frequency - The TX Frequency is the

Transmit Frequency. For SATCOM operation, this
field is only selectable when a Channel Number of
248, 249, or 999 is selected.

Channel Number - Used for SATCOM operation

only. Allows the Channel Number to be changed.
The valid values for this field are 001 to 249 and
999. If 248, 249, or 999 is entered for this field,
then the TX and RX Frequency fields become
selectable.

A-3
 VULOS Data Mode Main Screen This is the third screen shown when a VULOS net
(Press [Next] key to view) is selected. The fields are described below.

Option Code - This value determines the

predefined set of data parameters for transmitting
and receiving data by this preset. The parameters
that are defined by the Option Code are
Bandwidth, Modulation Mode, Bits Per Second
(BPS) Rate, Interleave Depth, and Forward Error
Correction. Refer to Table G-4 and Table G-5 for
Option Code listings.

Bandwidth - Varies dependent upon Option

Code. This can be either 5 kHz or 25 kHz channel
width.

Data Mode - Specifies the synchronization mode

that is used when transmitting and receiving Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) data.

BPS Rate: Specifies the bits per second rate that

is used for transmitting and receiving data
(including digital voice). This field is defined by
Option Code and not selectable. The value
displayed in this field is the numeric value that is
associated with the Option Code.

Voice Mode - Allows the Voice Mode to be

changed when the Traffic Mode is set to Voice
(VOC) or Data/Voice (D/V). When the Traffic Type
is set to DAT, then
"----" is displayed in this field. The available values
for this field are:
• CLEAR - Analog Voice (CLR)
• DV 2400 - Linear Predictive Coding (LPC)
Digital Voice at 2400 bps
(Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice
Terminal [ANDVT] VOICE AND DATA)
• MELP 2400 - Mixed-Excitation Linear
Predictive Vocoder (MELP) Digital Voice at
2400 bps (ANDVT VOICE AND DATA)
• CVSD - Continuously Variable Slope Delta
(CVSD) Digital Voice

A-4
 Interleave Depth - Specifies the interleave depth
if the option code supports interleave depth. This
field is not selectable. The valid values for this field
are: -- (none), 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32. If the selected
option code does not support interleave depth,
then “---" is displayed in this field.

Forward Error Correction - Specifies whether

Forward Error Correction is enabled. This field is
defined by Option Code and not selectable.

Large Font Screen The large font screen is the last main screen of
each waveform. Use [Next] to scroll through the
main screen set to the other main preset screens,
with the last being the large font screen. One more
press of [Next] will advance the user to the first
main top level screen. After a waveform switch,
the default screen is always the first top level
screen with one exception. If the user selects the
large font screen and then changes presets, the
new preset will display the large font screen as
well.
The top row of information (battery/external power
information, Plain Text (PT)/Load (LD)/Cipher
Text (CT) indicator, etc…) remains the same on
the large font screen as it does on the other main
screens. Additionally, all messages displayed on
the bottom row of the main screen (e.g., keying
messages) will also be displayed on the large font
screen.

A.2 VULOS OPERATION

This section provides information on VULOS operation.

A.2.1 Plain Text VULOS Operation

Perform the following procedure to operate the AN/PRC-117G in LOS fixed

frequency PT mode:
a. Ensure that the radio has been set up and ready to operate per the
AN/PRC-117G Multiband Manpack Radio Operation Manual.
b. Rotate cipher switch to [PT].
c. After the radio initializes, select desired VULOS fixed frequency system
preset by pressing [PRE +/-].
d. Adjust [VOL +/-] for adequate listening level.

A-5
 e. Perform the following procedure to begin radio operations:
• Press [Next] key to monitor status of the selected system
preset.
• Access menus under [OPT] key to make minor operation
changes.

A.2.2 Cipher Text VULOS Operation

Perform the following procedure to operate the AN/PRC-117G in VULOS fixed

frequency CT mode:
a. Ensure that the radio has been set up and ready to operate per the
AN/PRC-117G Multiband Manpack Radio Operation Manual.
Communications Security (COMSEC) keys must be loaded to continue.
b. Rotate cipher switch to [CT]. This enables the programmed COMSEC
mode and Traffic Encryption Key (TEK) (radio will display PRESET
CONFIG ERROR TEK NOT FOUND if not programmed).
c. After the radio initializes, select desired LOS fixed frequency system
preset by pressing [PRE +/-]. Check display for proper COMSEC mode
and TEK number. KEY -- indicates the system preset is programmed for
a TEK that has not been loaded.
d. Adjust [VOL +/-] buttons for adequate listening level.
e. Perform the following procedure to begin radio operations:
• A PT override warning tone is heard when receiving or
transmitting in [PT].
• Radio only allows CT transmission when there is a COMSEC
key programmed and loaded to the storage position.
• When KG-84 is the selected for the COMSEC mode, radio can
only be keyed by a properly interfaced DTE on either the
Audio/Fill (AF) or side 32-pin connector.

A.2.3 Operational Overrides - VULOS

With the main system preset screen displayed, press the right arrow key on the
front panel to find items that can be modified. Modifiable items will be indicated by
a dark background. Press [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to change the value of
non-numeric items or enter a number. The following fields will be selectable on this
screen:
• System Preset Number

A-6
 • Preset Type
• Traffic Type
• Modulation type
• Channel Number (SATCOM Only)
• Crypto Key (CT Only)
If a value of one of these fields is changed, the VULOS preset will be updated with
the new parameter. The following display characters indicate the status:
• Dash (-) indicates the system preset is unchanged.
• Asterisk (*) indicates the system preset is temporarily changed.
Most waveforms support runtime changes on their top level screen which
temporarily alters the current waveform preset configuration. These changes do not
alter the waveform preset in the database, and the changes will be lost upon
selecting another system preset or entering Program Mode unless the Preset
Autosave feature is enabled (refer to Paragraph 4.4.1.2.2). A preset that has been
changed or “dirtied” will be indicated by an asterisk (*) between the System Preset
Number and the Preset Name.
Other items can be overridden by accessing the [OPT] > VULOS CONFIG menu.
The option menus allow temporary changes to be made to the current net preset.
Items that can be changed include squelch and COMSEC parameters.

A.2.4 SATCOM Ping Tests (Call Menu)

Perform the following procedure to verify SATCOM signal strength:

a. From a SATCOM System Preset, press the [CALL] button. Select YES
at START PING TEST to start the test.
b. The Ping RX Strength indicates the measured strength of the signal
received from the satellite. The bar below the Ping RX Strength label
provides a graphical indication of the signal strength. Press [CLR] to exit
from the test menu.
Once the ping test has been run once, the label text is changed to RESTART PING
TEST. Select YES to restart the test.

PING TEST UNAVAILABLE is displayed when the preset type is not SATCOM. An
UNABLE TO PING screen is displayed after an unsuccessful ping operation. Press
[ENT] to continue.

A-7
A.3 SCAN MODE

The Scan Preset screens display radio status while the radio is scanning. Scanning
is activated by [MODE]>SCAN while in a VULOS system preset.
Scanning is configured by defining a Scan List. For information about enabling and
programming Scan Mode, refer to Paragraph A.6.2. While the radio is scanning, it
progresses through a Scan List and uses the parameters in each preset for
detecting an RF signal. Once a signal is detected, the radio stops on that preset.
The radio will resume scanning either after a specified amount of time or after a
timeout once the reception is complete. Until the radio resumes scanning, the
operator can transmit on that preset to respond to the reception. Scanning can be
manually stopped and resumed using the [CLR] button. To disable an active scan,
select [MODE]>SCAN to access the Scan screen. At the Scan screen, select
DISABLE and press [ENT] to change the scan preset to the current preset.

A.4 BEACON MODE

The Beacon main operational screen is displayed when the radio is set to Beacon
Mode while operating in CT or PT. While the radio is in Beacon Mode, the top level
operational screen will display BEACON on the top line of the screen. The screen
will also display relevant information including the beacon transmit frequency,
modulation type, radio status (transmitting beacon or idle), and the duration for
which the Beacon state will be maintained. Refer to Paragraph A.6.2.4 for Beacon
Mode programming
Use the following procedure to perform Beacon operations:
a. Turn on unit and rotate cipher switch to [CT] or [PT].
b. Press the [MODE] button. The radio cannot be actively transmitting.
c. Select BEACON and press [ENT].
d. Press [ENT] and Beacon mode will start.
e. To deactivate Beacon transmission, press [CLR].
f. At the TERMINATE BEACON? screen, select YES and press [ENT]. A
screen for EXITING BEACON MODE is displayed before returning to the
current preset.

A-8
A.5 VULOS OPTIONS

While in a VULOS system preset, press the [OPT] key and use [Up Arrow] or
[Down Arrow] to scroll to VULOS CONFIG to access specific VULOS Options.

Option Mode Menu Screen Select [OPT] > VULOS CONFIG to access this
menu. The VULOS Option screens allow the
operator to modify the COMSEC and Squelch
parameters, and view if VINSON Compatibility is
on or off for the currently selected VULOS preset.
The Squelch parameters can only be modified if
the current VULOS preset configuration supports
squelch. Otherwise, the operator is informed that
squelch is not supported by the current preset.

Use this screen to modify COMSEC and

SQUELCH parameters, which are required when
transmitting a data signal across a channel. Refer
to Paragraph A.6 for COMSEC and squelch
settings.

This menu will not contain any items while in

VULOS Scan Mode.

A.6 VULOS PROGRAMMING

The following diagram shows the menu tree for VULOS preset programming. Refer
to Chapter 4 for basic Platform programming features.

A-9
 8 VWX
PGM
SYSTEM PRESETS
SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG
SYSTEM PRESET NUMBER
PRESET DESCRIPTION
PRESET WAVEFORM
VULOS
GENERAL CONFIG

PRESET NAME
PRESET TYPE
LOS, SATCOM
FREQUENCY
RX FREQUENCY
RECEIVE ONLY
YES, NO
TX FREQUENCY
EDIT TX FEQUENCY
TX FREQUENCY
XXX.XXX MHZ
USE RX FREQUENCY
COMSEC
CRYPTO MODE
NONE, VINSON, AES, KG84,
FASCINATOR, ANDVT (SBPSK ONLY)
CRYPTO KEY
TEK01 - TEK25
KG-84 SYNC MODE (KG-84 ONLY)
REDUNDANT (MODE 1)
REDUNDANT* (MODE 2)
NON-REDUNDANT (MODE 3)
NON-REDUNDANT* (MODE 4)
FASCINATOR MODE (FASCINATOR ONLY)
STANDARD, ALTERNATE
AES MODE (AES ONLY)
CTR1 (MIN ERR PROP), CFB1 (RESYNC)
TRAINING FRAMES (ANDVT ONLY)
6, 9, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60
(A) (B (C)
F-0319-4100-0034B-1
Figure A-1. VULOS Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 4)

A-10
(A) (B) (C)
ANDVT RX PRIORITY (ANDVT ONLY)
ENABLE, DISABLE
VOICE AUTOSWITCH (ANDVT)
ENABLE, DISABLE

TRAFFIC
TRAFFIC MODE
VOICE(NOT PRESENT FOR KG-84, ANDVT)
VOICE MODE
CVSD,
CLEAR (NO ENCRYPTION ONLY)
OPTION CODE (FASCINATOR ONLY)

MODULATION TYPE
AM, FM
FM DEVIATION (FM ONLY)
6.5 KHZ, 5.0 KHZ, 8.0 KHZ
DATA
DATA MODE (NOT PRESENT FOR FASCINATOR)
SYNCHRONOUS, ASYNCHRONOUS

KEY SOURCE (ASYNCHRONOUS)

DATA, RTS
MODULATION TYPE
AM, FM, MS181
FM DEVIATION (FM ONLY)
6.5 KHZ, 5.0 KHZ, 8.0 KHZ
OPTION CODE (MS181 ONLY)
## (REFER TO TABLES)
INTERLEAVER
--, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
VOICE AND DATA (VINSON, ANDVT ONLY)

DATA MODE
SYNCHRONOUS, ASYNCHRONOUS
KEY SOURCE (ASYNCHRONOUS)
DATA, RTS
VOICE MODE
LPC 2400, MELP 2400 (ANDVT), CVSD (VINSON)
(D) (E) (F)
F-0319-4100-0034B-2
Figure A-1. VULOS Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 4)
A-11
 (D) (E) (F)

LPC CODE BOOK (ANDVT ONLY)

ENGLISH, ARABIC, DUTCH

MODULATION TYPE
AM, FM, MS181
FM DEVIATION (FM ONLY)
6.5 KHZ, 5.0 KHZ, 8.0 KHZ
OPTION CODE (MS181 ONLY)
## (REFER TO TABLES)
INTERLEAVER
--, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
TX POWER
HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW,
USER
00 DB DOWN, ... 10 DB DOWN

SQUELCH
SQUELCH TYPE
OFF

FM TRANSMIT TONE
ENABLED, DISABLED
ANALOG SQUELCH LEVEL (AM ONLY)

CTCSS (FM)
CTCSS TX TONE
## (REFER TO TABLES)
RX SQUELCH TYPE
OFF, NOISE, CTCSS

CTCSS RX TONE
## (REFER TO TABLES)
CHAN BUSY PRIORITY

TRANSMIT, RECEIVE

(G) (H) (I)

F-0319-4100-0034B-3
Figure A-1. VULOS Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 3 of 4)

A-12
 (G) (H) (I)
CDCSS (FM)
CDCSS TX CODE
## (REFER TO TABLES)
RX SQUELCH TYPE
OFF, NOISE, CDCSS
CDCSS RX CODE
## (REFER TO TABLES)
CHAN BUSY PRIORITY
TRANSMIT, RECEIVE
NOISE

FM TRANSMIT TONE
ENABLED, DISABLED
ANALOG SQUELCH LEVEL (AM ONLY)

TONE (FM)

EXIT

VULOS CONFIG
BEACON CONFIG
BEACON FREQUENCY
90 - 511.995
BEACON MODULATION
AM, FM
BEACON TX DURATION
01 TO 99 SECONDS
BEACON OFF DURATION
01 TO 99 (SECONDS) OR
00 FOR CONSTANT TX
BEACON TX POWER
LOW, MEDIUM HIGH

VINSON COMPATIBILITY
ON, OFF
F-0319-4100-0034B-4
Figure A-1. VULOS Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 4 of 4)

A-13
A.6.1 VULOS Waveform Preset Programming

VULOS-specific waveform presets contain radio parameters such as frequency,

squelch, and data rates that define how the radio will operate. Up to 99 VULOS
presets can be installed in the AN/PRC-117G. Use the following procedures to
program VULOS Waveform Presets.
a. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESETS to start:
• SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG - program a VULOS preset.
• RESET SYSTEM PRESET - Return preset to previous
programmed parameters.
• SYSTEM SCAN CONFIG - program Scan operation.
b. Select SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG and press [ENT].
c. Enter a VULOS preset number (01 - 99) for the preset to be configured.
Press [ENT] to continue.
d. Enter a PRESET DESCRIPTION or name for the system preset number.
Press [ENT] to continue.
e. Choose VULOS as the PRESET WAVEFORM type that will be
associated with the selected system preset. Press [ENT] to continue.
f. Select GENERAL CONFIG and press [ENT].
g. Enter a PRESET NAME for the VULOS preset being configured. The
Preset Name screen displays an 11 character alphanumeric field, where
both letters and numbers can be entered into the field to represent the
Preset Name. Use the keypad strokes and left/right arrows to enter the
new name, and then press [ENT].
h. Use the up/down arrow keys to select LOS or SATCOM. Press [ENT] to
continue.
i. At VULOS CONFIG, select FREQUENCY and press [ENT]:
• If LOS was selected, Programming screens will be displayed
to allow the user to manually enter RX/TX frequencies.
• If SATCOM was selected, the channel number provides a set
of pre-defined RX/TX frequencies. Enter a channel number
from 001-247, which corresponds to a set of pre-defined
RX/TX frequencies. If a channel number of 248, 249, or 999 is
entered, programming screens will be displayed to allow the
user to manually enter RX/TX frequencies.

A-14
j. Set the receive RX FREQUENCY in MHz. Enter a value from 030.0000
to 511.9950 and then press [ENT] to continue.
k. Select YES to make the channel RECEIVE ONLY. Select NO to keep the
channel TX and RX. Press [ENT] to continue.
l. Set the Transmit TX FREQUENCY in MHz. Select USE RX FREQ to
keep the same TX and RX frequency for the channel. If TX is different,
use the up/down keys to select EDIT TX FREQ. Press [ENT] to continue.
m. View or set (if Edit was selected) the transmit TX FREQUENCY in MHz.
Enter a value from 030.0000 to 511.9950. Press [ENT] to continue.
n. At VULOS CONFIG, select COMSEC. Press [ENT].
o. Select CRYPTO MODE to be used: NONE, VINSON, ANDVT (SBPSK),
KG84, FASCINATOR, or AES. Press [ENT].
p. Select the encryption CRYPTO KEY to be used for transmitting
encrypted data. Supported key values are TEK01 - TEK25.
q. If KG-84 was selected, set transmission synchronization mode:
• REDUNDANT (MODE 1)
• REDUNDANT (MODE 2)
• NON-REDUND (MODE 3)
• NON-REDUND (MODE 4)
r. If ANDVT was selected:
1. Set the ANDVT Training Frames. TRAINING FRAMES represents
the number of Redundant data transmissions the radio needs to
transmit before re-establishing the handshake. Valid Settings: 6, 9,
12, 15, 20, 30, 60.
2. Set the ANDVT RX Fade Priority. Enabling ANDVT RX FADE PRI
will allow the radio to monitor the receive signal and hold a
four-second key inhibit in the absence of the End Of Message flag.
3. Set the ANDVT Voice Autoswitch. Enabling ANDVT VOICE
AUTOSWITCH will allow the radio to update the voice setting of the
currently active configuration when a MELP or LPC receive signal
is detected in ANDVT mode. Subsequent transmissions will use the
updated vocoder configuration.
s. If FASCINATOR was selected, choose between STANDARD or
ALTERNATE for FASCINATOR MODE.

A-15
 t. If Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) was selected, choose between
CTR1 (MIN ERR PROP) or CFB01 (RESYNC) for AES MODE. CTR1 is
used for minimum error propagation [no error extension, no late net
entry], CFB1 is used for resync/late net entry [error extension].
u. At VULOS CONFIG, select TRAFFIC and press [ENT]. TRAFFIC MODE
tells the radio what type of information to receive or reject. For
DATA/VOICE, the radio will accept a data stream and a voice stream.
Valid Settings: VOICE, DATA, DATA/VOICE.
• With DATA selected, set Data Inversion options to properly
handle data communications interoperability with radios other
than the Falcon III. Valid DATA MODE settings:
SYNCHRONOUS, ASYNCHRONOUS. When
ASYNCHRONOUS is used, A KEY SOURCE can be defined
as DATA or RTS (a Request To Send [RTS] key).
• If VOICE was selected, configure the audio algorithm used for
VOICE traffic on the current preset. Valid VOICE MODE
settings: CVSD, CLEAR, ANALOG, LPC2400, and
MELP2400.
v. Configure the LPC CODEBOOK for LPC traffic on the current preset.
This screen is displayed when ANDVT is configured (voice mode is
LPC2400, or MELP2400). Valid settings: ENGLISH, DUTCH, ARABIC.
w. Set the MODULATION TYPE when there is more then one choice (when
LOS is used). Otherwise, the modulation type is skipped. Valid Settings
are AM, FM, or MS181.
x. Set FM DEVATION when the modulation is configured for FM. Valid
Settings are 5.0, 6.5, 8.0 kHz.
y. Set an OPTION CODE when the modulation is configured for MS181.
This code defines a set of parameters that includes channel Bandwidth,
Modulation Type, Interleaving, BPS Rate, and Forward Error Correction.
Refer to Table G-6 for Option Code listings.
z. Set the INTERLEAVER Depth when modulation is CPM, and Forward
Error Correction is ON. Increasing the Interleaver Depth will improve the
channel decoder’s capability for correcting errors from slow fading
signals. However, increasing the Interleaver Depth also increases the
delay until audio can be heard (after re-synchronization). Valid settings:
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or -- (None).
aa. At VULOS CONFIG, select TX POWER and press [ENT]. Set the TX
POWER LEVEL at HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW, or USER. If USER is
selected, set the USER TX POWER LEVEL with range values of 0 - 10

A-16
 dB down from full power. Power levels will be different if used in a
Vehicular Amplifier Adapter (VAA).
ab. At VULOS CONFIG, select SQUELCH and press [ENT].
Set SQUELCH TYPE when the Preset Type is set to LOS. Valid settings:
TONE, NOISE, CTCSS, CDCSS, OFF.
ac. Set the ANALOG SQUELCH LEVEL when the Analog Squelch Type is
set to OFF or NOISE, and the Modulation is set to AM. Set the Squelch
Level to one of 20 increments using the bar scale.
ad. Perform the following procedure for CTCSS:
1. Use the up/down arrow keys to select a transmit tone and press
[ENT]. If a user-selectable tone is desired, scroll down the list and
select USER and proceed to the next screen to enter a tone
between 67.0 to 254.1 Hz.
2. Choose receive squelch type: OFF, CTCSS, or NOISE.
3. Note the CHAN BUSY PRIORITY of TRANSMIT is displayed. The
user will always be able to key the radio, regardless of whether
another user is transmitting on the channel.
ae. Perform the following procedure for CDCSS:
1. Use the up/down arrow keys to select a transmit code and press
[ENT].
2. Choose receive squelch type: OFF, CDCSS, or NOISE.
3. Note the CHAN BUSY PRIORITY of TRANSMIT is displayed. The
user will always be able to key the radio, regardless of whether
another user is transmitting on the channel.
af. Set the FM TRANSMIT TONE when the modulation is configured for FM.
This controls transmission of the 150 Hz squelch setting independent of
the receive setting. Valid settings: ENABLED, DISABLED.

A-17
A.6.2 Scan Mode Programming

The VULOS waveform must be installed before Scan Mode can be programmed.
Scan Mode screens display automatic scan mode scanning, manual scan mode
preset configuration, Scan Mode with VAA operation, and Scan Mode
programming.
A.6.2.1 Automatic Scan Mode Scanning
The automatic Scan Mode SCANNING screen is displayed by using
[MODE]>SCAN. Upon entering scan mode, automatic scan will start, and this
screen will be displayed if there are presets in the scan list. The text SCAN will be
displayed flashing on the top line of the screen to indicate that the radio is in
automatic scan mode. If there are no presets in the scan list when the radio enters
scan mode or if none of the presets in the scan list are scannable, the SCAN
PRESET ERROR screen will display the message DISABLED.

a. The automatic Scan Mode preset screen displays the configuration of a

preset when the radio has found an Rx signal during automatic scanning
or when the radio is transmitting. Press the [Next] button to navigate to
the channel screen. If the radio is transmitting, releasing the PTT key will
navigate to the scanning screen.
b. The automatic Scan Mode large font screen displays the VULOS preset
name in large font when the radio has found an Rx signal on that preset
during automatic scanning or when the radio is transmitting.
A.6.2.2 Manual Scan Mode Preset Configuration
The manual Scan Mode preset screen displays the configuration of each preset as
the scan list is scrolled through during manual scanning. Only the scannable
presets in the scan list are available for selection using the [PRE +/-] button. The
text will be displayed steadily on the top line of the screen to indicate that the radio
is in manual scan mode. Press [Next] to navigate to the manual Scan Mode
channel screen. The manual Scan Mode large font screen displays the VULOS
preset name in large font when the radio has found a Rx signal on that preset during
manual scanning or when the radio is transmitting.
A.6.2.3 Scan Mode Programming
See Figure A-2 for the Scan Mode programming menu.

A-18
8 VWX
PGM

SYSTEM PRESETS
SYSTEM SCAN CONFIG
ENABLE SCAN
NO
YES
SCAN WAVEFORM
VULOS
SCAN LIST
ADD

SCAN PRESET TO ADD

VIEW

REMOVE

PRIORITY
PRIORITY TX PRESET

RX PRIORITY SCANNING

DISABLE
ENABLE

PRIORITY RX PRESET

HANG/HOLD TIME
HANG TIME DURATION (SECONDS)

HOLD TIME

DISABLE
ENABLE

HOLD TIME DURATION (SECONDS)

F-0319-4100-0035B

Figure A-2. Scan Mode Programming Menu Tree

A-19
Perform the following procedure to program a Scan List:
a. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESETS > SYSTEM SCAN CONFIG to start.
b. To enable scan, select YES at ENABLE SCAN.
c. At the SCAN WAVEFORM screen, press [ENT] to continue.
d. The SCAN CONFIG screen has the following options:
• SCAN LIST
• PRIORITY
• HANG/HOLD TIME
• EXIT
Select the SCAN LIST option and press [ENT] to display the scan list
menu which provides for configuration of the scan list. View selections:
ADD, VIEW, REMOVE.

e. Select ADD.
f. Enter a VULOS preset number (01 - 99) for the preset to be added. Press
[ENT] to continue. The menu will prompt to add another preset. Continue
to add presets (up to 10) that will be scanned in the scan list. You can
view or remove any added preset. When complete, press [ENT] to return
to the main scan menu.
g. To set a Scan preset as Priority, select the [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESET
> SYSTEM SCAN CONFIG > PRIORITY menu.
h. In the PRIORITY TX PRESET screen, scroll through the available scan
presets, highlight the choice for priority scanning, and press [ENT].
i. If Receive Priority is desired, select ENABLE at the RX PRIORITY
SCANNING screen.
j. In the PRIORITY RX PRESET screen, scroll through the available scan
presets, highlight the choice for priority scanning, and press [ENT].
k. To set the Hang Time and Hold Time for the scan list, select the [PGM]
> SYSTEM PRESET > SYSTEM SCAN CONFIG > HANG/HOLD TIME
menu.
l. At the HANG TIME DURATION screen, select the number of seconds
that the radio will listen to the channel after the signal ends before
returning to scanning. Press [ENT] to continue.
m. If the Hold Time feature is desired, select ENABLE at the HOLD TIME
screen. Hold Time is the length of time the radio listens to a signal before
returning to scanning.

A-20
 n. At the HOLD TIME DURATION screen, select the number of seconds
that the radio will listen to the signal before returning to scanning. Press
[ENT] to finish.

A.6.2.4 Beacon Mode Programming

See Figure A-3. Press [PGM] > VULOS CONFIG > BEACON CONFIG to start.

8 VWX
PGM

VULOS CONFIG

BEACON CONFIG

BEACON FREQUENCY

90.0000 TO 511.9999 MHZ

BEACON MODULATION

AM, FM

BEACON TX DURATION

01 TO 99 (SECONDS)

BEACON OFF DURATION

01 TO 99 (SECONDS) OR 00 FOR
CONSTANT TX

BEACON TX POWER

HIGH
MED
LOW

F-0319-4100-0036A

Figure A-3. Beacon Mode Programming Menu

A-21
 Beacon Frequency This screen allows the operator to enter a Beacon
TX Frequency that will be transmitted when
Beacon mode is activated. Enter a frequency from
90.0000 to 511.9999 MHz. The default beacon
frequency is 90.0000 MHz.
Press [ENT] to continue.

Beacon Modulation The Beacon Mode Modulation Screen will display

the modulation selected by the user. Select either
AM or FM modulation. The default beacon
modulation is AM.
The selection of AM corresponds to option code
200. The selection of FM corresponds to option
code 201.
Press [ENT] to continue.

Beacon TX Duration This screen displays the number of seconds

selected by the user for the Beacon TX Duration,
which is the length of time that the beacon signal
will transmit during the periodic cycle when
Beacon mode is activated. Select a transmit
period from 01 to 99 seconds. The default Beacon
TX Duration is 1 second.
If a value of 00 is entered, a message will be
displayed on the bottom line of the screen stating
that the beacon TX duration entered is invalid.
Press [ENT] to continue.

Beacon Off Duration This screen allows the operator to enter the
number of seconds for the Beacon Off Duration,
which is the length of time that the beacon is idle
during the periodic cycle while beacon mode is
activated.
Enter the Beacon Off Duration from 01 to 99
seconds to allow the radio to cycle the beacon on
and off (highly recommended). Specifying 00
seconds for the off duration will cause the beacon
signal to be constantly transmitted when beacon
mode is activated.
The default Beacon Off Duration is 00 seconds.
Press [ENT] to complete the configuration.

Beacon TX Power This screen allows the operator to set the Beacon
transmit power. Choices are HIGH, MED, LOW.
Power levels will be different if used in a VAA.
Press [ENT] to complete the configuration.

A-22
 APPENDIX B

SINCGARS

B.1 SINCGARS OPERATION

Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) voice and data
communications operates in the VHF-Low frequency range (30.000 MHz to 87.975
MHz) and consists of two operating modes:
• Frequency Hopping (FH)
• Single Channel (SC)
A SINCGARS FH net typically uses a Master SINCGARS radio as the Net Control
Station (NCS) to maintain Time-of-Day (TOD) synchronization and control
SINCGARS net operational procedures. All other radios in the net are normally
Member stations, although a SINCGARS net may also be configured to include
multiple or no Master stations. All AN/PRC-117G radios in a SINCGARS FH net
must have the same VINSON Traffic Encryption Key (TEK) and SINCGARS Hopset
programmed to the system preset.
A SINCGARS SC net operates on a single fixed frequency in the VHF-LOW
frequency range (30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz). This net can be used for Analog FM
voice operations in Plain Text (PT), and Continuously Variable Slope Delta (CVSD)
voice operations in Cipher Text (CT). A SC net can also be used for performing data
operations.
Each AN/PRC-117G must be designated as a Master or Member radio. There
should be only one Master radio controlling a net. However, any AN/PRC-117G
originally configured as a Member can be reconfigured as a Master radio. A Master
radio can be reconfigured to be a Member radio. An AN/PRC-117G designated as
Master is responsible for maintaining accurate SINCGARS Global Time-Of-Day
(GTOD) and operational control of the FH net.
The RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA) contains sample
plans with example nets for each of the waveforms in the radio. Sample plans can
be used as a starting point for programming a waveform in the radio.
Refer to Paragraph B.3 for SINCGARS programming.

B-1
B.1.1 SINCGARS Main Screens

The SINCGARS main screens support Frequency Hopping mode, Single Channel
mode, and Retransmission.
B.1.1.1 SINCGARS Frequency Hopping Main Screens

Frequency Hopping Preset View This is the first top-level screen shown when the
radio is in SINCGARS FH mode. 01-SNGRS01
represents the system preset index and
SINCGARS preset name. The traffic TRF field
indicates whether Voice (VOC), Data (DAT), or
Data/Voice (D/V) communications are in use. The
DATA field indicates the data mode when data
traffic is selected. The Net Identification (NET ID)
is shown if a hopset is selected for the net.
Frequency Hopping (FH) operating mode is
shown near the circular arrow symbol.
Press the [Next] key to continue.

Frequency Hopping Hopset View This is the second top-level screen when
SINCGARS is in FH mode. The current net time of
day is displayed as well as the selected Net ID
(Hopset ID) and its compartment. If no Hopsets
are loaded, the entries will be blank. The baud
RATE is displayed the traffic mode is DAT or D/V,
and the status of Late Net Entry (LNE) is also
shown.
Press the [Next] key to continue.

Frequency Hopping Global View This is the third top-level screen when SINCGARS
is in FH mode. The current net time of day is still
displayed as well as the configured (or default)
CUE frequency, the radio role
(MASTER/MEMBER), as well as the status of Cue
NOTIFY.
Press the [Next] key to continue.

Large Font Screen The large font screen is the last main screen to be
displayed. Use [Next] to scroll through the main
screen set to the other main preset screens, with
the last being the large font screen. One more
press of [Next] will advance the user to the main
top level screen. After a waveform switch, the
default screen is always the first top level screen,
with one exception. If the user selects the large
font screen and then changes presets, the new
preset will display the large font screen as well.

Press the [Next] key to scroll back to the first

screen.

B-2
B.1.1.2 SINCGARS Single Channel Main Screens

Single Channel Preset View This is the first top-level screen shown when the
radio is in SINCGARS SC mode. The
02-SNGRS02 represents the system preset index
and SINCGARS preset name. The SC field
indicates that the radio is in Single Channel mode.

Press the [Next] key to continue.

Single Channel TX/RX View This is the second top-level screen when
SINCGARS is in SC mode. The receive and
transmit frequencies are displayed as well as the
data baud rate.

Press the [Next] key to continue.

B.1.1.3 SINCGARS Retransmit Main Screens

Retransmission Preset View This is the first top-level screen shown when the
radio is in SINCGARS with the Retransmit Station
option enabled. The preset name changes to
RXMT plus the Net ID (RETRANSMIT STATION
F1/F2), or TX (SAME NET TX-ONLY F1/F1), or
RX (SAME NET RX-ONLY F1/F1) in FH mode, or
for SC mode (F1/F2 only), the TX/RX frequency.

Press the [Next] key to continue.

B.1.2 SINCGARS Startup Net Configuration

A SINCGARS net can be started using a Hot Start procedure (Paragraph B.1.2.1),
Cold Start ERF (Paragraph B.1.2.2), or Late Net Entry (Paragraph B.1.3.2). A
SINCGARS net can also be updated with new data during normal frequency
hopping operation. Refer to Paragraph B.1.3.2 for Normal Electronic Remote Fill
(ERF) procedures.
B.1.2.1 Hot Start Net Opening
A Hot Start requires setting the time of net opening and ensuring that all net
members receive the loadset to be used and correct the sync time. The operators
participating in a Hot Start net opening set radio time manually from the [OPT]
menu to within ± four seconds of each other. At the prescribed time for net opening,
each net operator enters the secure FH net. The Hot Start net opening procedure
is completed once all Members have entered the net.
B-3
If all stations have Transmission Security (TRANSEC) fill devices (either MX-18290
or AN/CYZ-10) and ZULU Global Positioning System (GPS) time, Hot Start
procedures can be used to establish SINCGARS FH nets and enter them without
assistance from the Master station.
Perform the following procedure to Hot Start a SINCGARS net:
a. Load complete SINCGARS FH data and Communications Security
(COMSEC) TEK fill to all net radios. Refer to Paragraph 3.4.
b. Press [OPT] > SINCGARS OPTIONS > SINCGARS GTOD, and press
[ENT].
c. Choose between User Entry and GPS Synchronization.
d. If User Entry, press [ENT] and enter the GTOD in Julian days, ZULU
hours, minutes and seconds format. Use [Left Arrow] or [Right Arrow]
to move between the time units. All net radios must be within ± four
seconds of each other. Refer to Table G-2 and Table G-3 to determine
Julian date calendar.
e. Attempt communications using SINCGARS FH net preset to Master
station or Member stations.
f. If no communications are heard or established, use passive LNE function
to gain network time of day synchronization with the net. Refer to
Paragraph B.1.2.3.
g. If Hotstart and LNE procedures fail, conduct Cue procedures (refer to
Paragraph B.1.3) to contact the Master station.
B.1.2.2 Cold Start ERF
Cold Start ERF Net Opening is a method used by the Master AN/PRC-117G to open
a net of Member radios initially by transmitting Over The Air Hopset / Lockout and
Time Of Day data. Typically a Master radio transmits a loadset’s lockouts first and
then each hopset. Member radios are prompted to store the received hopset /
lockouts that are error free. User input is required to know in which compartment a
hopset should be stored. Subsequent ERF traffic is ignored until user action is
taken. Voice communications are always available while in Cold Start ERF to
ensure a coordinated transfer of hopsets / lockouts occurs. This action is performed
on a specified frequency when entering Cold Start ERF.
All Member stations need to set basic ZULU Julian initialization of their GTOD prior
to receiving a cold start from the net Master by setting their clocks.

B-4
B.1.2.2.1 Master Station Cold Start Operation
A cold start net opening is best performed with all net AN/PRC-117Gs gathered
together in a local area. If this cannot be accomplished, procedures for coordinating
actions in Cold Start ERF should be developed to permit smooth operation under
direction of the NCS. Perform the following procedure at the Master radio:
a. Set the SINCGARS GTOD in the Master radio to ZULU time from an
accurate time source such as a GPS that is currently locked in to the
GPS satellite system.
b. The Master station operator must coordinate with all Member radios the
time and place to be in Cold Start ERF and the frequency to be used. The
Cue channel may be used for this coordination. This step is not
necessary if all net radios are gathered to a confined local area with all
stations within conversation range.
c. At the appropriate time, all radios should prepare for a Cold Start Net
Opening by going into Cold Start ERF and waiting for the Master radio’s
instruction and ERF transmission. Ensure net members know the
frequency for the Cold Start ERF and do not transmit again until the
Master NCS contacts them for a communications check.
d. With the radio on a SINCGARS Frequency Hopping preset, press
[CALL], select COLD START ERF, and press [ENT].
e. Enter the frequency given to the net Member radios on which the Cold
Start ERF is transmitted. The Master and the Member radios must all be
tuned to the same frequency. Press [ENT] to set the ERF frequency. Two
way voice communication is possible using PT or CT.
f. At the COLD START ERF prompt, select TRANSMIT and press [ENT].
g. At the SELECT SET prompt, select the desired HOPSET or LOCKOUT.
Only the loaded hopsets or lockouts are scrollable using [Up Arrow] or
[Down Arrow]. When selection has been made, press [ENT].
h. The prompt TRANSMITTING is displayed, indicating the FH data is
being transmitted to the net members. When the transmission is finished,
TRANSMIT COMPLETE is displayed. Press [ENT] to return to the
SELECT SET prompt. If another set of data is to be transmitted, repeat
the above procedure.
i. When all required FH data has been sent, press [CLR] on the SELECT
SET prompt to exit Cold Start ERF and return to the [CALL] menu.

B-5
B.1.2.2.2 Member Station Cold Start Operation
Perform the following procedure to enter Cold Start ERF as a Member radio:
a. With the radio on a SINCGARS Frequency Hopping Preset, press
[CALL], select COLD START ERF, and then press [ENT].
b. At the ENTER FREQUENCY prompt, enter the predetermined frequency
given by Master radio. Member radios must be tuned to the appropriate
frequency on which the Master transmits the Cold Start ERF. Press
[ENT] to accept the frequency entry.
c. The prompt AWAITING RECEPTION is displayed. At this point wait and
observe the radio display for reception of the Cold Start ERF. Two-way
voice communications over this frequency is possible. Monitor the audio
in case the Cold Start ERF is not received. Do not transmit unless
contacted by the Master radio.
d. If a Hopset is received, HOPSET RX OK: ####, STORE IN: ## is
displayed. By default, an empty compartment is chosen. Select the
desired compartment number of 01 - 25. When the compartment
selection is made, the current content in the compartment is shown.
Press [ENT] to store the Hopset or [CLR] to discard.
e. At the prompt ASSIGN TO PRESET, select YES to assign the received
hopset to a SINCGARS preset. Select NO if not assigning the Hopset at
this time. Press [ENT] to continue.
f. If YES was previously selected, then select the desired SINCGARS
preset. All presently programmed SINCGARS presets are selectable
here by using the up/down arrows. Press [ENT] after selecting the proper
SINCGARS preset. If it is not desired at this point to assign the Hopset
to a SINCGARS preset, press [CLR].
g. If a Lockout is received, LOCKOUT RX OK, ENT TO SAVE - CLR TO
EXIT is displayed. Press [ENT] to store the Lockout or [CLR] to discard.
h. The prompt WAITING FOR RECEPTION displays again. If another
Hopset or Lockout is sent by the Master station, repeat the above
procedure.
i. When all required FH data has been received, press [CLR] on the
WAITING FOR RECEPTION prompt to exit Cold Start ERF and return to
the [CALL] menu.
B.1.2.2.3 Updating Time Errors
If a Master station started a net by using a Cold Start with significant time error, the
net can still be contacted by non-net Member stations through Cueing. Refer to
B-6
Paragraph B.1.3. To correct the time error, the Master station must have everyone
in the net prepare a new Cold Start by reinitializing their time manually and then
perform a Cold Start ERF. This type of situation can be avoided by using Hot Starts
when possible and GPS accurate Zulu Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) time.
B.1.2.3 Passive LNE
If no communications on the SINCGARS FH net have been heard, it is possible that
the network time of day in the AN/PRC-117G is not within the ± four seconds
needed to remain in sync with the net. If it still is within ± one minute, the passive
LNE function can resync the Member station network time of day back with the
Master station and/or net. This can also be used in conjunction with Hot Start
procedures if an accurate time setting within ± four seconds cannot be obtained. If
the radio is set as Master, the LNE function is not selectable.
Generally the network time of day is the same as the GTOD. However, during an
LNE, the network time of day is different than the GTOD. The network time of day
is the time stored for a particular net so a LNE for one preset will not affect a
different preset (if the operator were to switch nets).
Perform the following procedure for passive LNE:
a. From the SINCGARS net preset operational display, press the [Next]
button to view the status of the LNE function. It is normally OFF. Use the
left/right arrows to select the LNE field. Press the up/down arrows to
select ON and press [ENT].
b. Do not attempt to transmit. Wait for the reception of communications from
any station on the SINCGARS FH net. When the radio reestablishes time
with the net, the LNE display indicator automatically switches to OFF
when network time of day synchronizes with the net.
c. Attempt a communications check with any station in the net. If no
communication is possible, conduct CUE operations to contact the
Master station. Refer to Paragraph B.1.3.1.

B.1.3 Cue Channel Setup

The Cue channel is a fixed frequency assignment in the 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz
frequency range that allows an AN/PRC-117G to contact a SINCGARS Master
station to become a SINCGARS FH net Member. Access to CUE channel is
through the [CALL] button. AN/PRC-117Gs must have the same CUE frequency
entered to use CUE. The stations can only detect incoming CUE calls if CUE Notify
is ENABLED in [PGM]. Cue Notify can also be enabled/disabled as a

B-7
MASTER/MEMBER station via the SINCGARS net preset operational screen.
Refer to Paragraph B.3.4 to enable Cue Notification.
B.1.3.1 Non-Net Member Station Operation for Cueing a SINCGARS FH
Net
Perform the following procedure to join a net:
a. At the non-net Member station, press [CALL], select CUE, and press
[ENT]. The radio enters channel for CUE operations.
b. Rotate the Cipher Switch to [PT] and key the radio for four to five
seconds. Do this every 15 seconds until NCS responds. Return to [CT]
after each attempt as the NCS will respond in cipher text on the CUE
channel.
c. Wait for instructions from the Master station.
d. When the Master station indicates to do so, enter Cold Start ERF mode
(refer to Paragraph B.1.2.2.2).
B.1.3.1.1 Master Station Operation to Respond to a Cueing Station
Perform the following procedure to add a Member station to an existing SINCGARS
net:
a. In SINCGARS FH mode, a CUE INCOMING prompt flashes four times
on the bottom line of the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), and an audio tone
is heard. This indicates a transmission has been made on the CUE
channel.
b. Inform the existing net Members that you are departing the net. Rotate
the Cipher Switch to [CT].
c. Press [CALL], select CUE, and press [ENT]. The radio enters the CUE
channel.
d. Direct the requesting operator to get ready for Cold Start ERF, then press
[CLR] to leave the CUE channel.
e. Initiate a Cold Start ERF procedure. Refer to Paragraph B.1.2.2.1.
B.1.3.2 NORMAL ERF SINCGARS FH Update
The FH data may be updated during normal operation. This procedure requires the
Master radio to load the new FH fill data, inform the Member radios of an ERF
update over the SINCGARS FH preset, and then transmit the fill data to Member
radios. It should be determined beforehand when the update is to become effective
to allow operators to reprogram radios with the updated FH data. If the update is to

B-8
become effective immediately, the Net Master will need to program a second
SINCGARS preset that is using the new FH fill data for communication checks after
the ERF update. The Member radios have the option to assign the received
updated FH data immediately to the preset they are presently using or to another
programmed SINCGARS FH net.
B.1.3.2.1 MASTER Radio Operation for NORMAL ERF
From the Master perform the following procedure to update SINCGARS FH fill data:
a. Contact the net MEMBER radios over the presently used SINCGARS FH
preset. Instruct members to standby for FH Fill data update. Tell them
where to store the update data and when to use it.
b. Press [CALL], select NORMAL ERF, and press [ENT].
c. At the NORMAL ERF prompt, select TRANSMIT, and press [ENT].
d. At the SELECT SET prompt, select the new Normal ERF Hopset or
Lockout, and press [ENT]. While the data is being transmitted, the
TRANSMITTING prompt is displayed.
e. When the transmission is complete, TRANSMIT COMPLETE is
displayed. Press [CLR] or [ENT] to continue to the SELECT SET
prompt. If another set of data is to be transmitted, repeat the above
procedure.
f. When all required FH data has been sent, press [CLR] on the SELECT
SET prompt to exit NORMAL ERF and return to the [CALL] menu.
If the update is effective immediately, switch the radio to SINCGARS FH preset
using the new SINCGARS FH data and conduct communications checks with net
members. Return to the old SINCGARS FH net preset for any stations that do not
respond. Resend the update ERF to any stations still needing the update.
B.1.3.2.2 Member Radio Operation for NORMAL ERF
From the Member station, perform the following procedure to update SINCGARS
FH data:
a. Upon instructions from the Master station to get ready to receive the
update ERF, press [CALL], select NORMAL ERF, and press [ENT]. The
prompt AWAITING RECEPTION is displayed.
b. If a Hopset is received, HOPSET RX OK, STORE IN: ## is displayed. By
default, an empty compartment is chosen. Select the desired
compartment number of 01 - 25. When the compartment selection is

B-9
 made, the current content in the compartment is shown. Press [ENT] to
store the hopset or [CLR] to discard.
c. At the prompt ASSIGN TO PRESET, select YES to assign the received
hopset to a SINCGARS preset. Select NO if not assigning the Hopset at
this time. Press [ENT] to continue.
d. If YES was previously selected, then select the desired SINCGARS
preset. All presently programmed SINCGARS presets are selectable
here by using the up/down arrows. Press [ENT] after selecting the proper
SINCGARS preset. If it is not desired at this point to assign the Hopset
to a SINCGARS preset, press [CLR].
e. If a Lockout is received, LOCKOUT RX OK, ENT TO SAVE - CLR TO
EXIT is displayed. Press [ENT] to store the Lockout or [CLR] to discard.
f. The prompt AWAITING RECEPTION displays again. If another Hopset
or Lockout is sent by the Master station, repeat the above procedures.
g. When all required FH data has been received, press [CLR] on the
AWAITING RECEPTION prompt to exit NORMAL ERF and return to the
[CALL] menu.

B.1.4 Sending Data Via RS-232

SINCGARS data can be sent using the radio’s RS-232 interface to a Personal
Computer (PC). Perform the following procedure to establish the PC to radio
connection:
a. From the second top-level screen of the SINCGARS preset, use [Right
Arrow] to scroll to the RATE field, then use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow]
to select RS232. The preset needs to be configured for data or
data/voice.
b. Connect the data cable, part number (12043-7150), between the PC's
serial Communications (COM) port and the red data port on the radio.
c. At the PC, open up terminal program (such as Hyper Terminal or
Procomm) and select the appropriate baud rate (1200, 2400, 4800,
9600). Use eight data bits, one stop bit, no parity, and hardware flow
control.
d. Press the Enter key on the PC once within the terminal window. The
radio sets its over-the-air baud rate to the same rate as the serial port.
The front panel of the radio will also display the baud rate as 1200R,
2400R, 4800R, or 9600R.
e. Send data using appropriate protocol (such as XMODEM).

B-10
B.1.5 Operational Overrides - SINCGARS

Most changes can be made while operating in SINCGARS FH mode without

reprogramming the AN/PRC-117G, including power level, COMSEC setup, data
rate, Cue frequency, Cue Notify, Master/Member assignment, LNE function, Hopset
compartment, Net ID, and traffic type. Press the right arrow key on the keypad
(while on a current operating net preset display) to find items that can be modified.
Modifiable items have a black background. Press [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to
change value of the selected item. Press [ENT] to set selection. Other items can
be overridden by pressing the [OPT] key to access the options menu items. Using
display overrides and the options menu allows continued operation on the presently
selected net preset. During ongoing communications, entering back into
programming mode takes the AN/PRC-117G offline. No communications are
possible until the AN/PRC-117G is returned to normal operation and important
communications could be missed.

B.1.6 Squelch (SC Only)

In SC, pressing [SQL] toggles the squelch between the programmed squelch type
for the current preset. The squelch type will be either noise or tone. The squelch
state (OFF, Noise [NOI], or Tone [TON]) is displayed in the top part of the display.
In CT, the squelch type defaults to DIGITAL and cannot be reconfigured.

B.2 MAIN SINCGARS OPTIONS SCREEN

The SINCGARS OPTIONS screen is reached by pressing the [OPT] button while
in a SINCGARS system preset.

B.2.1 Global Time of Day (FH ONLY)

Press [OPT] > SINCGARS OPTIONS > SINCGARS GTOD to access the
SINCGARS GTOD options screen:
a. Select USER ENTRY to entry the time manually in the format
DD:HH:MM:SS. Press the [ENT] key.
b. Select GPS SYNCHRONIZATION to read the satellite time
automatically.

B.2.2 Late Net Entry (FH ONLY)

If no communications on the SINCGARS FH net have been heard, it is possible that

the network time of day in the AN/PRC-117G is not within ± four seconds needed

B-11
to remain in sync with the net. If it still is within ± one minute, the passive LNE
function can resync the Member station network time of day back with the Master
station and/or net. This can also be used in conjunction with Hot Start procedures
if an accurate time setting within ± four seconds cannot be obtained.
Press [OPT] > SINCGARS OPTIONS > LATE NET ENTRY to access the
SINCGARS LNE options screen. If the radio is set as Master, the LNE function is
not selectable:
a. Press [Next] to view the status of the LNE function. The default setting
is OFF.
b. Use [Left Arrow] or [Right Arrow] to select the LNE field. Press [Up
Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to select ON and press [ENT].
Do not attempt to transmit. Wait for the reception of communications from any
station on the SINCGARS FH net. When the radio re-establishes time with the net,
the LNE display indicator automatically switches to OFF when network time of day
synchronizes with the net. Attempt a communications check with any station in the
net. If no communication is possible, conduct CUE operations to contact the Master
station.

B.2.3 SINCGARS Retransmit Role

Refer to Paragraph B.3.7 for setting up the retransmit feature and configuring
Retransmit Role screens.

B.2.4 Squelch (SC ONLY)

Press [OPT] > SINCGARS OPTIONS > SQUELCH to access the squelch options
screen. The settings are TONE, NOISE, and NONE.

B.2.5 SINCGARS Call Functions

The [CALL] button may be used to access the CUE Call, Normal ERF, and Cold
Start ERF operations in SINCGARS FH Mode.
B.2.5.1 CUE Call Operation
Select CUE and press [ENT] to start the Cue call.
B.2.5.2 Normal ERF Transmit
To configure a Master station for transmission, press the [CALL] > NORMAL ERF
>TRANSMIT menu and press [ENT].

B-12
B.2.5.3 Normal ERF Receive
To configure a Master station for reception, press the [CALL] > NORMAL ERF >
RECEIVE menu and press [ENT]:
a. Enter a hopset compartment for storage of the new hopset. Choose a
compartment from 01 - 25, and press [ENT] to continue.
b. The ASSIGN TO PRESET screen displays. Select YES to make the
hopset active and assign the new hopset to a SINCGARS preset.
B.2.5.4 Cold Start ERF Transmit
To configure a Master station for transmission, press the [CALL] > COLD START
ERF >TRANSMIT menu and press [ENT]:

a. The ENTER FREQUENCY screen displays. Select the frequency to

transmit the ERF and press [ENT] to continue.
b. The SELECT SET screen displays. Select the hopset to be transmitted
and press [ENT] to continue.
B.2.5.5 Cold Start ERF Receive
To configure a Master station for reception, press the [CALL] > COLD START ERF
> RECEIVE menu and press [ENT]:
a. The ENTER FREQUENCY screen displays. Enter the Cold Start ERF
frequency. This must match the transmit ERF frequency.
b. The user is prompted to enter a hopset compartment for storage of the
new hopset. Choose a compartment from 01 - 25, and press [ENT] to
continue.
c. The ASSIGN TO PRESET screen displays. Select YES to make the
hopset active and assign the new hopset to a SINCGARS preset.
d. The ASSIGN HOPSET TO screen displays. Choose a SINCGARS
preset to associate with the new hopset, and press [ENT].

B.3 SINCGARS PROGRAMMING

Programming menus allow for configuration changes to be made on the radio.

When in Program mode, the radio is offline and cannot send or receive
communications. Note: All screens with only a single option will display PRESS
ENT TO CONTINUE at the bottom.

B-13
 NOTE
Harris RF-6650M Communications Planning Application
(CPA) includes sample files that can be used to
configure presets on the AN/PRC-117G. One file,
named ASIPINTEROP, can be installed and activated to
give a user six working SINCGARS presets that directly
interoperate with an Advanced SINCGARS
Improvement Program (ASIP) radio. The only other user
actions are to load a SINCGARS Loadset and set
GTOD.

B.3.1 SINCGARS Presets

The SINCGARS programming screens are reached from the [PGM] > SINCGARS
CONFIG menu. See Figure B-1 for the SINCGARS programming menu tree.

B-14
 8 VWX
PGM

SYSTEM PRESETS
SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG
SYSTEM PRESET NUMBER
PRESET DESCRIPTION
PRESET WAVEFORM
SINCGARS
OPMODE
FREQUENCY HOPPING
PRESET NAME
CRYPTO KEY
TEK XX
TX POWER LEVEL
LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH,
USER
00 DB DOWN, ... 10 DB DOWN

TRAFFIC MODE
VOICE, DATA, DATA/VOICE

BAUD RATE (DATA OR DATA/VOICE)

600, 1200, 1200N, 2400, 2400N, 4800,
4800N, 9600N, 16000, AND RS232
DTE DATA MODE*
SYNCHRONOUS
ASYNCHRONOUS (RS232 ONLY)

HOPSET COMPARTMENT
1-25

SC FREQUENCY
30.000 - 87.975 MHZ
SC SQUELCH TYPE
TONE, OFF, NOISE

SINGLE CHANNEL

(A) (SAME MENUS AS FOR FH)

F-0319-4100-0037B-1
Figure B-1. SINCGARS Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 2)

B-15
 (A)

SINCGARS CONFIG

MASTER/MEMBER
SINCGARS RADIO TYPE
MASTER, MEMBER
CUE CONFIGURATION

CUE FREQUENCY
30.000-87.975 MHZ
CUE SQUELCH TYPE
TONE, NOISE, NONE
ENABLE CUE NOTIFY
NO, YES

HOPSET/LOCKOUT

COPY HOPSET
COPY HOPSET FROM
## HOPSET
COPY HOPSETS TO
## [EMPTY]

NEW HOPSET ID
000 TO 999
VIEW HOPSETS

VIEW LOCKOUTS

FH VOICE PRIORITY

CHANNEL BUSY PRIORITY

RECEIVE, TRANSMIT
RETRANSMIT ROLE
NONE, RETRANSMIT STATION,
SAME NET ID RX-ONLY,
SAME NET ID TX-ONLY

F-0319-4100-0037B-2
Figure B-1. SINCGARS Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 2)

B-16
B.3.2 SINCGARS Preset Programming

Perform the following procedure to create a new SINCGARS preset or change an

existing SINCGARS preset:
a. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESENTS > SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG >
and press [ENT].
b. Enter a SINGARS preset number (01 - 99) to be configured. Press [ENT]
to continue.
c. Enter a text description or name for the system preset number. Press
[ENT] to continue.
d. Choose SINCGARS as the waveform type that will be associated with
the selected system preset.
e. Press [ENT] and the SINCGARS operation mode is displayed. Choose
FREQUENCY HOPPING or SINGLE CHANNEL.
f. Press [ENT] and enter/edit the name associated with the current
SINCGARS preset. Preset Name can be up to nine alphanumeric
characters.
g. Press [ENT] and select an available crypto key (TEK01 - TEK25).
h. Press [ENT] and select the power level for the preset. Choices are LOW
(1 watt), MED (4 watts), HIGH (10 watts), and USER (User-specified
level). USER will invoke a screen for the user to set the power level.
Power levels will be different if used in a Vehicular Amplifier Adapter
(VAA).
i. Press [ENT] and select the DATA, VOICE, or DATA/VOICE function on
the port.
j. Press [ENT] to select the
k. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) baud rate: 600, 1200, 1200N, 2400,
2400N, 4800, 4800N, 9600N, 16000, and RS232. Baud rates with the N
suffix are Enhanced Data Mode (EDM) rates; others are SINCGARS
Data Mode (SDM) rates. RS232 is used for Asynchronous data mode.
l. Press [ENT] and select the DTE data mode (if DATA or DATA/VOICE
was previously selected). ASYNCHRONOUS is displayed if RS232 was
selected for the baud rate in the previous screen.
m. Press [ENT] to select the HOPSET COMPARTMENT, which is
associated with the current frequency hopping preset. Compartment
numbers are 01 to 25.

B-17
 n. Press [ENT] to select the SC FREQUENCY. Select a frequency from
30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz.
o. Press [ENT] to select the SC SQUELCH TYPE. Choices for single
channel are TONE, NOISE, or OFF. The user is returned to the main
presets menu. If YES is selected, enter the number 01 - 99 of the system
preset.

B.3.3 Master/Member Configuration

Perform the following procedure to assign SINCGARS Master/Member stations:

a. Press [PGM] > SINCGARS CONFIG > MASTER / MEMBER, and press
[ENT].
b. Configure the SINCGARS application to one of the radio roles. Choose
MASTER or MEMBER station. Press [ENT] to continue.
c. Press [PGM] to exit program mode and return to the main screen.

B.3.4 Cue Configuration

Perform the following procedure to set the SINCGARS Cue channel frequency and
squelch:
a. Press [PGM] > SINCGARS CONFIG > CUE CONFIGURATION, and
press [ENT].
b. Use the arrow keys to specify the SINCGARS CUE FREQUENCY.
Range is 30.0000 to 87.9750 (MHz). Press [ENT] to continue.
c. Select the CUE SQUELCH TYPE. Valid selections are TONE, NOISE, or
NONE. Press [ENT] to continue.
d. Select YES or NO for the ENABLE CUE NOTIFY option. Press [ENT] to
complete.
e. Press [PGM] to exit program mode and go to the main screen.

B.3.5 Hopset/Lockout Configuration

Perform the following procedure to configure the Hopset/Lockouts for SINCGARS

nets:
a. Press [PGM] > SINCGARS CONFIG > HOPSET/LOCKOUT, and press
[ENT]. The primary hopset/lockout menu is displayed. The user can copy
or view items.

B-18
 b. Perform the following procedure to copy a Hopset:
• Select COPY HOPSET, which allows for the selection of one
of the hopsets for copy.
• Select from hopset compartments 01 - 25 for the copy from
and to locations.
• Change the NEW HOPSET ID for the copied Hopset. Valid
selections are 000 - 999.
c. Perform the following procedure to view a Hopset or Lockout:
• Press [PGM] > SINCGARS CONFIG > HOPSET/LOCKOUT,
and press [ENT].
• Select VIEW HOPSET or VIEW LOCKOUT.

B.3.6 Frequency Hopping Voice Priority

Perform the following procedure to configure the frequency hopping voice priority:
a. Press [PGM] > SINCGARS CONFIG > FH VOICE PRIORITY, and press
[ENT].
b. Assign either RECEIVE or TRANSMIT to have priority and press [ENT].
The radio’s default is RECEIVE. User override of this feature can be
performed by a quick double keying of the side Push-To-Talk (PTT) or
handset PTT.

B.3.7 Retransmit Role

Perform the following procedure to assign a radio for Retransmit functionality:

a. Press [PGM] > SINCGARS CONFIG > RETRANSMIT ROLE, and press
[ENT].
b. The radio default setting is NONE, which is used for all normal
communications.
If the radio will be used in the retransmit function (F1/F2), change this
setting to RETRANSMIT STATION.
Select SAME NET ID TX-ONLY or SAME NET ID RX-ONLY for range
extension retransmission operation where Radio A is PT RX only and
Radio B is PT TX only (F1/F1).
c. Press [ENT]. Refer to Paragraph 3.12 for setting up a Retransmit
scenario.

B-19
 This page intentionally left blank.

B-20
 APPENDIX C

HAVEQUICK

C.1 HAVEQUICK OPERATION

HAVEQUICK II operates in the 225.000 MHz - 399.975 MHz UHF frequency band
using Frequency Hopping (FH) for anti-jam capability. All HAVEQUICK (HQ)
operations require Time-of-Day (TOD) and Single Word of Day (SWOD)/Multiple
Word of Day (MWOD) configuration. HQ frequencies are automatically determined
from internal frequency tables indexed by a random generator. The HAVEQUICK
Net Number is used to determine which frequency table is indexed.
After HQ programming is complete, TOD and SWOD/MWOD information must be
programmed for all HQ operations. TOD can be updated by:
• Using the Call operation ([CALL]) to receive TOD sync from another
station over an Line-of-Sight (LOS) fixed frequency channel in the range
of 225 MHz to 399.975 MHz UHF-AM
• Manual entry
• Automatic Global Positioning System (GPS) sync
HAVEQUICK TOD synchronization can be sent or received from the HQ system
preset. The AN/PRC-117G can send or receive HAVEQUICK TOD while in Initial
(INIT) mode for any AM HQ frequency and also perform time synchronization in
Hopping (HOP) mode.
The RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA) contains sample
plans with example nets for each of the waveforms in the radio. Sample plans can
be used as a starting point for programming a waveform in the radio.

C-1
C.1.1 HAVEQUICK MAIN STATUS SCREENS

HAVEQUICK Screen The Main Status Screen presents the user with the
major parameters required in a HAVEQUICK
hopping preset. Press [Left Arrow] or [Right

BATTERY/VOL METER

SQUELCH SETTING
Arrow] to move to the following items (All other

* = DIRTY PRESET

WAVEFORM TYPE
RX/TX INDICATOR

CRYPTO TYPE

PLAIN TEXT OR
CIPHER TEXT
fields are NOT selectable):
• HQ Mode
• Traffic Mode
• Data Mode (Only for DATA traffic type)
• Crypto Key
HQ Mode - Indicates the type of HAVEQUICK
mode the radio is currently configured for:
• Initial (INI) - Initial Config mode allows the
user to synchronize TOD with other
HAVEQUICK users. In order to configure the
TOD, all radios must first be in Voice Mode,
and have the same Initial Frequency.
• HOP - Allows for active frequency hopping
using the HAVEQUICK hopping algorithm.
The TOD must be pre-configured for all

SIGNAL STRENGTH
PRESET NUMBER

radios when the user enters HOP mode in

TRAFFIC MODE

PRESET NAME

NEXT SCREEN

CRYPTO KEY
VOICE MODE
DATA MODE

the preset.
HQ MODE

System Preset Number - Identifies the number

used for the current system preset.

Traffic Mode - Indicates the type of traffic used for

the current preset. The valid settings for Traffic
Mode are:
• VOC
• DAT
System Preset Name - Displays the name of the
currently selected system preset.

Data Mode - Identifies the type of traffic mode

configured for the current preset. “---” is displayed
for Data if the traffic mode is configured for Voice.
The setting for Data Mode is Synchronous
(SYNC).

Voice Mode - Identifies the type of traffic mode

configured for the current preset. "---" is displayed
for Voice if the traffic mode is configured for Data.
The Voice Mode field will be set to Analog (ANLG)
in Plain Text (PT), and Continuously Variable
Slope Delta (CVSD) in Cipher Text (CT) using
VINSON when the Traffic mode is configured for
Voice.

C-2
 Crypto Key - Identifies the key number used for
the current preset. Pressing the [ENT] key will set
the currently displayed value as the crypto key.

[Next] Indicator - Shows that the user can switch

between multiple Main Status Screens.

Signal Strength Indicator - Shows the RX or TX

signal strength.

Main Status Screen #2 Press the [Next] key to view the second top-level
screen. The purpose of the Main Status Screen #2
is to view and allow configuration of major
parameters used in a HAVEQUICK hopping
preset. Press [Left Arrow] or [Right Arrow] to
move to the following items (all other fields are not
selectable):
• HQ NET Number (NUM)
• SWOD/MWOD
HQ NET Indicator

WOD Indicator
HAVEQUICK Net Number (HQ NET NUM):

HQ Mode
HQ DOM
HQ TOD

Indicates the five digit code that programs the

entry point in the frequency table for the current
configuration. Pressing any numeric key while the
HQ NET NUM is selected will initiate editing of the
value. The valid settings for the HQ NET NUM are:
Use Format Range Specifications

General Net AXX.XYY X=0–9 Y = 00, 25, 50, 75

HaveQuick I T-Nets
T-Nets A00.X00 X=0–4
HaveQuick II Nets
FMA Nets AXX.XYY X = 000 – 999 Y = 00 = Basic
HQ NET
FMA Nets AXX.XYY X = 000 – 999 Y = 25 = NATO
NET
FMA Nets AXX.XYY X = 000 – 999 Y = 50 = non-
NATO NET
FMT Nets A0X.X25 X = 0.0 – 1.5

Day Of Month (DOM) - The DOM indicator is

read-only. For MWOD fills, the date is encoded in
the data to link it to the actual day of the month.

SWOD/MWOD - Select and scroll to choose the

current Word Of Day. The valid settings are:
• SWOD - Single Word Of Day.
• MWOD - Multiple Word Of Day.
HQ MODE - The Havequick Mode indicator
displays the HQ mode selected for the current
preset: INI or HOP.

C-3
 HQ Initial View This screen allows configuration for major
parameters used for a Havequick Initial preset.

HQ FMT Training View In HAVEQUICK Frequency Management Training

(FMT) Mode, the Main Status Screen #2 is
displayed as shown. A valid Net Number,
SWOD/MWOD, and Time Of Day must be
configured for entering Training Mode.

Training Mode requires configuration of 16 FMT

frequencies, which must be in the operational
range of 225.000 MHz to 399.975 MHz. Selected
frequencies must be exact 25 kHz channel
assignments.

FMT Frequencies should be entered in the same

order in every FMT HAVEQUICK radio. It is
recommended that the FMT frequencies be
reloaded if unsure of a previous load. Only a full
communications check with another FMT mode
radio can confirm if programming is valid.

Large Font Screen The large font screen is the last main screen of
each waveform. Use the [Next] key to scroll
through the main screen set to the other main
preset screens, with the last being the large font
screen. One more press of the [Next] key will
advance the user to the main top level screen.
After a waveform switch, the default screen is
always the first top level screen, with one
exception: if the user selects the large font screen
and then changes presets, the new preset will
display the large font screen as well.
The top row of information (battery/external power
information, PT/LD/CT indicator, etc.) remains the
same on the large font screen as it does on the
other main screens. Additionally, all messages
displayed on the bottom row of the main screen
(e.g., keying messages) will also be displayed on
the large font screen.

Press the [Next] key to scroll back to the first

screen.

C-4
C.1.2 HQ Operational Procedures

Operation on a HQ net requires a SWOD/MWOD and a TOD. A UHF-AM LOS fixed

frequency net preset should be programmed for this purpose. A GPS interface to
the AN/PRC-117G can also be used to provide accurate TOD.

NOTE
The radio will check for an MWOD for the current day of
month. If an error indicates WOD NOT FOUND (Word of
Day [WOD]), verify that the day of month matches the
compartment in which MWOD data has been loaded.
Perform the following procedure to operate in HQ mode:
a. Rotate the cipher switch to the [PT] or [CT] position.
b. After radio initializing, press [PRE +/-] to scroll to the desired HQ net
preset.
c. Begin HQ operation:
- TOD should be re-established to get back into the HQ net. Refer
to Paragraph C.1.2.1.
- When all stations use GPS TOD sync, good communications are
ensured. Without continual sync updates, the radio needs to
reacquire TOD about every four hours, or sooner if
communications become degraded.
- Troubleshoot problems by checking for common Traffic
Encryption Key (TEK) if in CT mode, TOD synchronization, and
same HQ net preset parameters and for SWOD/MWOD loading
errors.

NOTE
Degradation of channel quality is an indication to resync
TOD. TOD syncs can be sent and received over the HQ
net using [CALL] as described in Paragraph C.1.3.
C.1.2.1 HQ FH TOD Programming Procedures
A station that has obtained HAVEQUICK TOD from an accurate source, such as a
GPS, Time Signal Station (TSS), or another station, can transmit its TOD on to
another station that needs the time.

C-5
Perform the procedure in Paragraph C.1.3.2 to send the TOD to another AN/PRC-
117G.
Perform the procedure in Paragraph C.1.3.1 to receive a TOD from another
AN/PRC-117G.

C.1.3 HQ Call Screen Configuration

Call screens are used to set the radio for manual HQ TOD synchronization. This
procedure is not required if the HQ net is using GPS-wide time synchronization, but
it can be used by stations that have lost GPS sync.
Manual time synchronization requires the radio to be in Initialization time frame
mode (versus the normal Hopping (HOP) operating mode). To change the current
HAVEQUICK system preset temporarily from HOP mode to Initialization, use [Left
Arrow] or [Right Arrow] to highlight the mode field on the front panel main screen
and change it to INI with [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow]. Then proceed with the Call
operation steps that follow. Once that is accomplished, change the mode to HOP
and continue operation.
Press [CALL] from the home screen to proceed. The HAVEQUICK TOD SYNC
screen appears. This screen allows synchronization of all HQ radios with the TOD.
A station that has lost HQ sync can request TOD to sync with other radios.
C.1.3.1 Request a TOD
Perform the following procedure to request a TOD:
a. In the HAVEQUICK TOD SYNC screen, select TOD RECEIVE and press
[ENT] to continue.
b. The TOD RECEIVE screen displays the status after attempting to receive
a TOD sync. The radio will display HQ time and date upon a successful
reception of a HQ TOD.
C.1.3.2 Send a TOD
Perform the following procedure to send a TOD:
a. In the HAVEQUICK TOD SYNC screen, select TOD TRANSMIT and
press [ENT] to continue.
b. The TOD TRANSMIT screen displays the status after attempting to
transmit the HQ TOD. The radio will transmit the HQ TOD.

C-6
C.2 HQ OPTION SCREENS

The HAVEQUICK option screens are used to view, select, and manually configure
TOD for the HQ net. Press the [OPT] key and scroll to HAVEQUICK OPTIONS.

C.2.1 Viewing HQ TOD

Select VIEW HQ TOD and press [ENT] to continue. This screen displays the
current HAVEQUICK time and date. Press [ENT] to return to the HAVEQUICK TOD
screen.

C.2.2 Select WOD Type

Choose SELECT WOD TYPE and press [ENT]. The WORD OF DAY TYPE screen
appears. Select either SWOD or MWOD. Press [ENT] to return to the HAVEQUICK
TOD screen.

C.2.3 Configure HQ TOD

Choose CONFIGURE HQ TOD and press [ENT]. The HQ TIME OF DAY screen
appears. If GPS is currently installed, the radio will allow for TOD configuration
either by GPS or manual user entry:
• ENTER TIME OF DAY - Use for manual TOD entry.
• USE GPS TIME - Use for internal GPS TOD sync.
Press [ENT] to continue.
a. If ENTER TIME OF DAY was selected:
1. Configure the HQ TOD DATE. If 00 is entered for either the month
or day, the screen will display SWOD; otherwise, it will display
MWOD. The valid settings are:
• MONTH: 0 - 12
• DAY: 0 - 31
• YEAR: 00 - 37, or 70-99
Press [ENT] to continue.
2. Configure the HQ TOD TIME. The valid settings are:
• Hours (HH): 0 - 23
• Minutes (MM): 0 - 59
• Seconds (SS): 0 - 59
C-7
 Press [ENT] to return to the HAVEQUICK TOD screen.
b. If USE GPS TIME was selected, the screen displays the result of
attempting to sync HQ TOD with GPS.
• The radio will display SUCCESSFUL if the result of syncing
the HQ TOD with GPS was successful.
• The radio will display GPS NOT TRACKING if the result of
syncing the HQ TOD with GPS was not successful.
GPS must be tracking with a good signal before selecting USE GPS
TIME; otherwise, the time may not match between radios.

C.3 HQ PROGRAMMING

See Figure C-1 which shows the menu tree of screens for the HQ waveform
programming menus. The top selection in each submenu is the default setting.

C.3.1 HAVEQUICK Programming Screens

Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG to access the HQ Program Main Menu
screen. This menu screen allows access to submenus for configuring the Single-
or Multiple-Word Of Day and FMT frequencies, which are necessary when
configuring a preset for HQ.

C.3.2 HQ Waveform Preset Programming

Perform the following procedure to select a HQ preset:

a. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESETS > SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG. This
menu allows a HQ preset to be modified.
b. Select a HAVEQUICK preset number in the range of 01 – 99. Press
[ENT] to continue.
c. Enter a text description or name for the system preset number. Press
[ENT] to continue.
d. Choose HAVEQUICK as the waveform type that will be associated with
the selected system preset.
e. Select GENERAL CONFIG and press [ENT].

C-8
8 VWX
PGM
SYSTEM PRESETS
SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG
SYSTEM PRESET NUMBER
PRESET DESCRIPTION
PRESET WAVEFORM
HAVEQUICK II
GENERAL CONFIG
PRESET NAME
HQ NET CONFIG
INITIAL FREQUENCY
225.0000 TO 399.9750
HOP MODE TYPE
INIT, HOPPING

HQ NET NUMBER
00.000 TO 99.950
RECEIVE ONLY
YES, NO

COMSEC
CRYPTO MODE
NONE
VINSON
CRYPTO KEY
TEK XX (10-25)
TRAFFIC
TRAFFIC MODE
VOICE, VOICE AND DATA,
DATA
DATA MODE
SYNCHRONOUS
ANALOG DATA

TX POWER ENABLED, DISABLED

LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH,
USER
00 DB DOWN, ... 10 DB DOWN
(A) (B)
F-0319-4100-0038B-1
Figure C-1. HAVEQUICK Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 3)
C-9
 (A) (B)

SQUELCH
NOISE, DISABLED
ANALOG SQUELCH LEVEL
EXIT

HAVEQUICKII CONFIG

CONFIGURE SWOD
DEFINE SWOD
SEGMENT 1 (20)
######
ERASE SWOD
YES, NO
SWOD STATUS
VALID, EMPTY

CONFIGURE MWOD

DEFINE MWOD

ENTER DOM (14)

01-31

SEGMENT 1(20)

ERASE MWOD

ENTER DOM (14)

01-31
ERASE MWOD (XX)?

YES, NO

MWOD STATUS

ENTER DOM (14)

01-31
MWOD XX STATUS

(C) F-0319-4100-0038B-2

Figure C-1. HAVEQUICK Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 3)

C-10
 (C)
FMT FREQUENCIES

DEFINE FMT FREQUENCIES

FREQUENCY 1(20), ...

225.0000 TO 399.975

USE DEFAULT FMT FREQS

RESET FMT FREQS

YES, NO

F-0319-4100-0038B-3

Figure C-1. HAVEQUICK Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 3 of 3)

f. Enter a PRESET NAME for the current preset. The PRESET NAME
screen contains an 11 character alphanumeric field, where both letters
and numbers can be entered to represent the name. Press the [ENT] key
to accept the name.
g. Select HQ NET CONFIG from the HAVEQUICK PRESETS menu. This
screen assigns an INITIAL FREQUENCY (AM), which may be used to
synchronize all AN/PRC-117G HQ radios with a common TOD. Refer to
Paragraph C.1.3 for Call menu operation. Enter a frequency from
225.000 MHz to 399.975 MHz (must be a multiple of 25 kHz), and press
[ENT] to continue.
h. The HOP MODE TYPE screen permits configuration of the Hop Mode
Type. Choose HOP and press [ENT] to continue.
i. The HQ NET NUMBER screen configures the HQ Net Number. The net
number is a five-digit code that represents the entry point in the
frequency hopping pattern, allowing for multiple radio preset operations
using a common WOD or TOD. Enter a valid HQ Net Number via numeric
text entry using the keypad. The HQ Net Number will display in the
following format: AXX.XYY, where X can be in the range 0 - 9. YY must
be chosen from the set (00, 25, or 50). Press [ENT] to continue.
j. The RECEIVE ONLY screen appears. Select YES to allow the radio to
sit idle and receive data, but not transmit data. Select NO (default) to
allow transmit functions. Press [ENT] to continue.
k. Select COMSEC from the HAVEQUICK PRESETS menu. This screen
sets the CRYPTO MODE for the HQ preset. Select NONE or VINSON for
all standard HQ operations. Press [ENT] to continue.

C-11
 l. The CRYPTO KEY screen appears. The encryption key is used to
encrypt the transmitted data with the selected crypto algorithm. Select
the proper TEK in the range of TEK01 - TEK25. Press [ENT] to continue.
m. Select TRAFFIC from the HAVEQUICK PRESETS menu. The Traffic
Mode tells the radio what type of information to receive. Valid settings for
the Traffic Mode are VOICE and DATA. Choose the Traffic Mode and
press [ENT] to continue.
n. If DATA MODE is used, SYNCHRONOUS data type will be shown. Press
[ENT] to continue.
o. If DATA was selected, the DATA INVERSION screen appears. This
option reverses bit polarity to allow for all possible conditions that can be
encountered in data communications interoperability with radios other
than the Falcon III. Selections are to invert TRANSMIT, RECEIVE,
BOTH, or NONE (no inversion). Normal default operation is NONE.
Choose the Inversion and press [ENT] to continue.
p. If DATA was selected, the ANALOG DATA screen appears. This option
should be set to ENABLED when using devices that contain their own
modem to transmit and receive data as an analog signal. For normal
voice, this option is set to DISABLED (default setting). Choose the
setting and press [ENT] to continue.
q. The TX POWER LEVEL screen appears. Valid settings are HIGH,
MEDIUM, LOW, and USER. If USER was selected previously, this
screen may be used to set the transmit power to a custom level in the
range of 0 to 10 dB down from full power. Power levels will be different if
used in a VAA. Choose the setting and press [ENT] to continue.
r. Set the ANALOG SQUELCH LEVEL if using Noise Squelch. This screen
will only be displayed when the Analog Squelch Type is set to NOISE and
the Modulation is set to AM. Use the left /right arrow keys to select any
of 20 levels shown on the bar indicator. Press [ENT] to continue.
s. To complete HQ preset programming, press [PGM] to exit from Program
mode.
C.3.2.1 HQ SWOD
The HQ SWOD can be configured, viewed, and erased.
C.3.2.1.1 Configure SWOD
Perform the following procedure to configure the SWOD:
a. Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG > CONFIGURE SWOD.

C-12
 b. Select DEFINE SWOD and press [ENT] to allow the definition of SWOD
frequencies. The screens allow configuration of the SWOD, which
contains six user configurable numeric segments. The first screen will
display a six-digit segment (SEGMENT 1 (20)). Enter numbers using the
keypad and press [ENT].
c. Proceed through all six segments (or as many as necessary) in the same
manner. The radio will display the SWOD Program Menu when valid
numbers have been entered for the valid segments.
C.3.2.1.2 View SWOD
Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG > CONFIGURE SWOD > SWOD
STATUS. The SWOD STATUS screen displays the current state of the configured
SWOD.
C.3.2.1.3 Erase SWOD
Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG > CONFIGURE SWOD > ERASE SW OD.
The ERASE SWOD screen confirms the deletion of the configured SWOD. Select
YES or NO.
C.3.2.2 HQ MWOD
The HQ MWOD can be configured, viewed, and erased.
C.3.2.2.1 Configure MWOD
Perform the following procedure to configure the MWOD:
a. Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG > CONFIGURE MWOD.
b. Select DEFINE MWOD to define MWOD frequencies. The ENTER DOM
(14) screen appears, allowing the DOM to be configured, which is linked
through the TOD entry to the actual day of the month. The number 14
indicates the segment position for the DOM.
c. The radio displays the first frequency segment screen upon pressing
[ENT] with a valid Day of Month. The valid settings for the MWOD Day
Of Month are 01 – 31.
d. The MWOD contains up to six user configurable numeric segments.
Enter a six-digit segment using the numbers on the keypad. The radio will
allow up to six segments for each MWOD, SEGMENT 1(20) through
SEGMENT 6 (15) to be configured. Press [ENT] after each segment to
move to the next segment automatically (if required).

C-13
 e. The results of configuring the MWOD will be displayed. Pressing [CLR]
or [ENT] will take the operator back to the MWOD menu screen.
C.3.2.2.2 View MWOD
Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG > CONFIGURE MWOD > MWOD
STATUS. The ENTER DOM (14) screen appears, expecting the user to enter the
day of the month from 01 - 31. Enter a number and press [ENT]. The MWOD 01
STATUS screen displays the current state of the configured MWOD. The number
01 represents the day of the month from the range 01 - 31.

C.3.2.2.3 Erase MWOD

Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG > CONFIGURE MWOD > ERASE MWOD.
The ENTER DOM (14) screen appears, expecting the user to enter the day of the
month from 01 - 31. Enter a number and press [ENT]. The ERASE MWOD screen
confirms the deletion of the configured SWOD. Select YES or NO.
C.3.2.3 HQ FMT
FMT frequencies are used to perform HAVEQUICK radio training using a set of 16
authorized training frequencies. Perform the following procedure to configure FMT:
a. Press [PGM] > HAVEQUICK II CONFIG > FMT FREQUENCIES.
b. Select DEFINE FMT FREQS to allow the definition of FMT Frequencies.
The screens will allow 16 FMT Frequencies to be configured. The first
FMT Frequency screen displays the current FMT frequency and allows
the user to enter a new FMT frequency. All 16 UHF/AM training
frequencies must be in the range 225.000 MHz to 399.975 MHz. FMT
frequencies selected must be multiples of 25 kHz. The radio displays the
next FMT Frequency screen when a valid frequency is entered.
c. Select USE DEFAULT FMT FREQS to allow the current FMT Frequency
configurations to be reset to default values. Select YES to reset the
values of every FMT frequency to the default values, which are standard
North American theater FMTs. Select NO to return to the FMT
FREQUENCIES program menu.

C-14
 APPENDIX D

HIGH PERFORMANCE WAVEFORM (HPW)

D.1 HPW DATA OPERATION

High Performance Waveform (HPW) for the AN/PRC-117G is designed to provide

fast, reliable messaging and file transfer capability between two or more computers
on a radio network. These messages are sent through a standard email client that
the user has configured to work with Harris Wireless Message Terminal (WMT)
software. Refer to Harris RF-6710W or RF-6760W User’s Manuals for configuration
of these software packages.
HPW uses KG-84C encryption in Redundant Mode 1 synchronization for increased
data rates over UHF satellite links. Refer to Table 1-2 for HPW data rates. A
separate Transmission Security Key (TSK) and Time-of-Day (TOD)
synchronization (±30 seconds) are also required when using HPW.
Satellite Ping testing for received signal strength is not performed in HPW mode.
Satellite Ping can be accessed by switching to the VHF/UHF Line-of-Sight
(VULOS) waveform and using a properly configured Satellite Communications
(SATCOM) preset. Refer to Paragraph A.2.4 for more information on Ping Tests.

D.1.1 HPW Quick Start Procedure

Perform the following procedure to configure the radio for HPW operation:
• Load Traffic Encryption Key (TEK)
• Load TSK
• Synchronize radio HPW TOD
• Set the radio’s data port to Point-To-Point Protocol (PPP). Use (12043-
0710-A006) cable.
• Select the HPW mode based on satellite type and communication
conditions.
• Configure the remainder of the HPW options, including the type of
messaging protocol (Automatic Repeat reQuest [ARQ] vs. Broadcast).
To load the TEK and the TSK, refer to Paragraph 3.4.4. Follow that procedure to
load those keys from the fill device, selecting the proper type of key. Refer to
Paragraph 3.10.10 to confirm that the keys have loaded properly.

D-1
Ensure that all radios in the net have HPW Time Of Day set to within ± 30 seconds
of each other. If using Global Positioning System (GPS), set the system time to use
GPS (refer to Paragraph ) and configure HPW to use the system clock (refer to
Paragraph D.3). If not using GPS, then all net users should synchronize HPW time
to be within ± 30 seconds of each other. Radios that have mismatched HPW TODs
will not be able to communicate. This situation will be manifested to the user as
message traffic on the HPW channel that is directed to random addresses does not
seem correct for the HPW net in use.
Ensure that the AN/PRC-117G top connector data port is configured for PPP
operation. Refer to Paragraph for viewing and changing the setting.
The last primary step required for HPW communications is to select the HPW rate.
There are three choices available: Narrowband (NB), Wideband (WB) and UHF
Follow On Satellite (UFO). To select the rate, the operator should take into account
the type of satellite and channel available as well as the signal conditions.
The HPW waveform operates over either the older Fleet Satellite Communications
(FLTSATCOM) or the newer UFO satellites. On either type of satellite, HPW can
make use of either a narrowband (5 kHz) or a wideband (25 kHz) channel. Use
Table D-1 to assist in selecting the HPW rate to maximize throughput. HPW has an
“auto-baud” capability built in that will attempt to send data as quickly as possible
within each of the three rates. These speed settings will be displayed as low,
medium, and high on the console.
Table D-1. HPW Channel Selection
Satellite Type / Narrow Band
Wide Band Channel
Channel Type Channel

FLTSAT Satellite HPW NB rate HPW WB rate to ensure compliance

with MIL-STD-181A.

UFO Satellite HPW NB rate HPW UFO rate if channel conditions

are fair to good.
HPW WB rate if channel conditions
are poor.

Finally, the operator should proceed through the following menus that configure
other HPW radio options as desired.

D-2
 NOTE
HPW transmissions have a built in acknowledgment
protocol ARQ which guarantees accurate message
reception. To ensure communications, this mode will
typically be selected through the WMT application. HPW
also supports broadcast messaging through the WMT,
which will transmit the message to all parties running
HPW on the frequency. While this type of
communication can be advantageous in sending the
same information to multiple clients simultaneously,
actual channel conditions may prevent any data from
reaching its destination.

NOTE
HPW data throughput rates are affected by the transmit
power level. To achieve maximum data rates, it is
recommended that the AN/PRC-117G be used with an
external power amplifier and a high gain antenna
system.

D-3
D.2 HPW MAIN STATUS SCREENS

Main Status Screen 1 Main Status Screen #1 shows the major

parameters used for receiving or transmitting data,
when using HPW with a WMT connected to the
radio.

The following items are displayed in this screen:

• T/R Transmit/Receive indicator
Encryption enabled.
• Battery (BAT) charge-level
• HPW waveform name tag
• PT/CT Plain Text / Cipher Text indicator
System Preset Number - The System Preset
Number indicator is scrollable via [PRE +/-] (only
Encryption disabled. when the function knob is in the F position).

System Preset Name - The Preset Name

indicator displays the name of the currently
selected preset.

Net Type - The Net Type indicator displays SAT,

indicating Satellite.

COMSEC Key - The Communications Security

(COMSEC) Key indicator is scrollable if it is the
currently selected item on the screen.

TRANSEC Key - The Transmission Security

(TRANSEC) Key indicator is scrollable if it is the
currently selected item on the screen.

D-4
Main Status Screen 2 Main Status Screen #2 shows the major
parameters used for receiving or transmitting data,
when using HPW with a WMT connected to the
radio.

RX Frequency - Displays the Receive Frequency

of the currently selected preset. The RX
Two-way communication Frequency is selectable when the CHANnel is set
to 248, 249 or 999. Pressing any numeric key
while the RX Frequency is currently selected on
the screen will initiate editing of the value.

TX Frequency - Displays the Transmit Frequency

of the currently select preset. If the current preset
Receive-only communication is receive-only, then the T: line displays “T: RX
ONLY”. The TX Frequency is selectable when the
CHANnel is 248, 249 or 999.

Press any numeric key while the TX Frequency is

currently selected to edit the value.
Press [ENT] while the TX frequency is 000.00000
to set the preset to be RX-only.

Net Type - Displays “SAT”, indicating Satellite

(SAT).

Rate Indicator - The valid settings for Rate are:

• UFO – 25 kHz channel on UFO type
satellite.
• WB – 25 kHz channel on FLTSATCOM.
• NB – 5 kHz channel on either type of
satellite, UFO or FLTSATCOM.
Channel Number: Displays the channel number
of the currently selected preset. Pressing any
numeric key while Channel Number is currently
selected will initiate editing of the value. The field
only accepts values in the range 1-249, or 999.

Press the [ENT] key to save the currently

displayed value in the current preset. If the
Channel Number entered is in the range 1-247,
then the transmit and receive frequencies are
updated. If the Channel Number is 248, 249 or
999, then the transmit and receive frequencies are
user-selectable.

D-5
 Main Status Screen 3 Main Status Screen #3 shows real-time status
information related to receiving or transmitting
data using HPW with a WMT connected to the
radio.
There are no selectable items on this screen.

One of the following Status Messages will be

displayed:
IDLE - No active message, channel is free.
BUSY - Channels is being used by another set of
radios.
SENDING - Radio is actively transmitting a
message.
RECEIVING - Radio is actively receiving a
message.
CALLING - Radio is attempting to gain control of
the channel.
TOKEN - Radio is passing a token.

The throughput indicator in the lower-left corner of

the screen will display LOW, MED, or HIGH based
upon the current transmit or receive rate. The
actual throughput rate is dependent upon the
channel type:
LOW:
4.2 kbps (NB)
21 kbps (WB)
18 kbps (UFO)
MED:
8.5 kbps (NB)
42 kbps (WB)
37 kbps (UFO)
HIGH:
Not applicable (NB)
Not applicable (WB)
56 kbps (UFO)

The T indicator displays the number of kilobytes of

message data that have been successfully
transmitted over the air.

The R indicator displays the number of kilobytes of

message data that have been successfully
received over the air.

The ORIG indicator shows the Origin HPW

address of the most recent data packet received or
transmitted by the radio.

The DEST indicator shows the Destination HPW

address of the most recent data packet received or
transmitted by the radio.

D-6
 Main Status Screen 4 The large font screen is the last main screen. Use
the [Next] key to scroll through the main screen
set to the other main preset screens, with the last
being the large font screen. One more press of the
NEXT key will advance the user to the main top
level screen. After a waveform switch, the default
screen is always the first top level screen, with one
exception. If the user selects the large font screen
and then changes presets, the new preset will
display the large font screen as well.
Press the [Next] key to scroll back to the first
screen.

D.3 HPW OPTIONS MENU

Press [OPT] > HPW TOD > CONFIGURE HPW TOD> [ENT] to access the HPW
TOD menu.
a. The USE SYSTEM CLOCK? screen appears. Select YES and press
[ENT]. The following screens are changeable if NO is selected.
b. The CURRENT HPW DATE screen appears. This screen displays the
current HPW date in the format currently configured for System Date;
ZULU format may be displayed. Modify the HPW date as necessary, and
press [ENT] to continue.
c. The CURRENT HPW TIME screen appears. This screen displays the
current HPW time in the format currently configured for System Time;
ZULU format may be displayed. Modify the HPW time as necessary, and
press [ENT] to continue.

D.3.1 Run TRANSEC Validation Test

Press [OPT]>TRANSEC VALIDATION>[ENT] to access the HPW TRANSEC Test

menu. This test will verify that HPW can properly operate with the TRANSEC
portion of the crypto. Select YES and press [ENT] to run the test. The test either
finishes successfully or times out with a failure message.

D-7
D.4 HPW PROGRAMMING

See Figure D-1, which shows the menu tree of screens for the HPW programming
menus. The top selection in each submenu is the default setting.
.

8 VWX
PGM

SYSTEM PRESETS

SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG

SYSTEM PRESET NUMBER
PRESET DESCRIPTION
PRESET WAVEFORM
HPW

PRESET NAME
USE CUSTOM FREQUENCY

NO

CHANNEL NUMBER

1 - 249, 999

YES

TX FREQ (291 - 318.3)

RX FREQ (243 - 270)

CRYPTO KEY
NONE, TEK01, ... TEK25

TRANSEC KEY
TSK01, ... TSK25

NETWORK TYPE
LOS, SAT

HPW BAUD RATE

NB, WB, UFO

TX POWER
LOW, MED, HIGH,
USER
00 DB DOWN, ... 10 DB DOWN
F-0319-4100-0039D-1
Figure D-1. HPW Programming Menu Tree

D-8
D.4.1 HPW Preset Configuration

Perform the following procedure to create HPW presets:

a. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESETS > SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG and
press [ENT].
b. Select a waveform preset (01 to 99) to configure HPW, and press [ENT]
to continue.
c. Enter a text description or name for the system preset number. Press
[ENT] to continue.
d. Choose HPW as the waveform type that will be associated with the
selected system preset. Press [ENT] to continue.
e. Set the PRESET NAME. The name length must be 11 characters or less
with no spaces. Press [ENT] to continue.
f. The USE CUSTOM FREQS screen appears. Standard frequency codes
may be used, or user-selectable frequencies may be defined for the
preset. Select YES to make the channel code 999 (for user-selectable
frequencies). Select NO to use a standard frequency code. Press [ENT]
to continue.
g. The CHANNEL NUMBER screen appears:
• For standard frequency codes, press any numeric key to
initiate editing of the value. The field will accept values in the
range 1-249. Press [ENT] to continue.
• For user-selectable frequencies 248, 249 and 999, enter the
correct Transmit and Receive frequencies. Press [ENT] to
continue.
h. The CRYPTO KEY screen appears. Use the up/down arrows to select
the proper TEK for the HPW preset. Valid entries are TEK01 through
TEK25 inclusive. The default setting is TEK01. Press [ENT] to continue.
i. The TRANSEC KEY screen appears. Use the up/down arrows to select
the proper TSK for the HPW preset. Valid entries are TSK01 through
TSK25 inclusive. The default setting is TSK01. Press [ENT] to continue.
j. The NETWORK TYPE screen appears. Use the up/down arrows to
select the proper network type for the HPW preset. Valid entries are LOS
and SAT. Press [ENT] to continue.
k. The HPW BAUD RATE screen appears. Depending on the CHANNEL
NUMBER selection, there may be various baud rate choices available.
Valid Settings are:
D-9
 • NB: Narrowband
• WB: Wideband
• UFO: UHF Follow-on Satellite
For channel numbers 129 - 191 and 194 - 239, NB is the only valid
choice, so this screen will not be displayed.
For channel numbers 009 - 128, 192 - 193, and 240 - 249, WB is the
default, and UFO can be selected.
For channel numbers 001 - 008 and 999, all three Baud Rate choices are
available. WB is the default.
Press [ENT] to continue.
l. Select the TX POWER LEVEL: LOW, MED, HIGH, or USER. Press
[ENT] to continue.

D-10
 APPENDIX E

ADAPTIVE NETWORKING WIDEBAND WAVEFORM

E.1 ANW2 GENERAL THEORY

Adaptive Networking Wideband Waveform (ANW2) is a wideband high-bandwidth

waveform in the 225 to 1999.9750 MHz UHF band that allows simultaneous voice
and high-speed data capabilities. ANW2 supports:
• Ad-Hoc Networking
• Simultaneous Voice and Data
• Conventional Half-Duplex Voice
• Multiple Data Transmissions
• Adaptive Waveform
• Transport of Standard Internet Protocol (IP) Packets
• Type-1 Encryption
• Situational Awareness (SA)
ANW2 can be configured for use for the following three general types of networks:
• ANW2 - Secure IP packets are sent or received via highband portion of
radio
• Broadband Global Area Network (BGAN) - Secure IP packets are sent or
received via BGAN International Marine Satellite (INMARSAT) terminals.
• Inline Network Encryptor (INE) - Secure IP packets are sent or received
via Ethernet.
ANW2 is constructed in several layers consistent with the Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) model. Encryption is provided using Type 1 IP security,
MEDLEY Traffic Encryption Keys (TEKs), BATON TEKs, and Transmission
Security (TRANSEC) Transmission Security Keys (TSKs). These details and
ANW2 deployment are described in the AN/PRC-117G Multiband Manpack Radio
Operation Manual, (10515-0319-4200).

E-1
E.2 ANW2 MISSION PLANNING FOR DEPLOYMENT

The following items must be loaded and configured in order to prepare the radio for
ANW2 deployment:
• Communications Planning Application (CPA) Mission Fill:
• INE configuration can only be completed using the CPA. The
INE parameters are written into a mission plan file and verified
by the CPA, and then the mission plan file is loaded into the
AN/PRC-117G. Refer to the ANW2 appendix in the AN/PRC-
117G Multiband Manpack Radio Operation Manual.
• TRANSEC keys are loaded by the CPA.
• Keys:
• Voice Keys
• Pre-Placed Keys
• Vectors for use with Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
• TRANSEC keys (loaded by the CPA)
During a point-to-point connection, the vectors are used to generate a
key based on the BATON/MEDLEY algorithm. A multipoint connection
using IP multicast (traffic sent to many stations requiring specific
addresses) requires a pre-placed BATON/MEDLEY key.
• Configuration of ANW2 date/time:
• IP security date/time
• TRANSEC date/time
All keys are loaded via a Type 1 fill device with the exception of
TRANSEC keys, which are loaded by the CPA.
• Other major parameters:
• Frequency
• Bandwidth
• Maximum number of nodes (radios)
These parameters can be set from the radio front panel or CPA.

E-2
E.3 ANW2 OPERATION

An ANW2 net allows users to receive and transmit voice and/or data using fixed
receive and transmit frequencies. Antenna type, antenna height, output power,
terrain, and obstructions between AN/PRC-117G radios are all factors in the range
of communications.
Operationally, there are some characteristics of ANW2 of which you should be
aware. The radio transmits in millisecond-length bursts for beacon, voice, and data
frame information. The transmit indicator (T) only appears when the key line is
activated for voice communications, not for data or beacon frame.

E.3.1 ANW2 Voice Operation

Voice operations over ANW2 will behave similarly to half-duplex digital voice over
VULOS, except data operations can be simultaneously occurring. Voice is Mixed-
Excitation Linear Predictive Vocoder (MELP) 2400 digital voice using MEDLEY
encryption and is transmitted over a wireless network.

NOTE
It is assumed that the AN/PRC-117G is already
programmed for the ANW2 operation, Communications
Security (COMSEC) keys have been loaded, and an
antenna has been installed. Voice communications can
occur over ANW2 wideband, not BGAN or black Local
Area Network (LAN).
Perform the following procedure to operate the AN/PRC-117G in ANW2:
a. Ensure that the radio has been set up and is ready to operate. Refer to
Chapter 2.
b. Rotate the cipher switch to [CT]. This enables the programmed
COMSEC mode and TEK. The radio will display INVALID CRYPTO
MODE if not programmed.
c. After the radio initializes, select a desired ANW2 system preset by
pressing [PRE +/-]. Check display for proper COMSEC TEK number.
KEY -- indicates the system preset is programmed for a TEK that has not
been loaded.
d. Adjust [VOL +/-] for adequate listening level.
e. Begin radio operations.

E-3
E.3.2 ANW2 Data Operation

Data operations over ANW2 will occur just like any other ad hoc IP network. The
data application will send the data to the destination, and the routing will be
determined by the ANW2 network. IP data is transmitted in the data frames.

NOTE
It is assumed that the AN/PRC-117G is already
programmed for the ANW2 operation, COMSEC keys
have been loaded, and an antenna has been installed. If
there are no data TEKs or vectors loaded for ANW2,
voice operation is still possible utilizing the instructions
called out in Paragraph E.3.1.
Perform the following procedure to operate the AN/PRC-117G in ANW2:
a. Ensure that the radio has been set up and ready to operate. Refer to
Chapter 2. Use the correct cabling for the data application; refer to the
application’s documentation if necessary.
b. Rotate the cipher switch to [CT]. The radio will display INVALID
CRYPTO MODE if no keys are loaded.
c. After the radio initializes, select a desired ANW2 system preset by
pressing [PRE +/-]. Check the display for a proper COMSEC TEK
number. KEY -- indicates that the system preset is programmed for a
TEK that has not been loaded.
The TEK number on the main screen refers to the voice TEK. For data
operation, there can be multiple TEKs.
d. Begin radio operations.

E.4 ANW2 STATUS SCREENS

The ANW2 main status screens provide the user with major parameters used for
receiving or transmitting voice and data. Use the [Next] key to scroll through the
screens.

E-4
E.4.1 ANW2 Main Screens

ANW2 Preset Main Screen The first screen displays information about the
ANW2 preset that is currently selected. The
information displayed on this screen is considered
to be the main configuration parameters for the
ANW2 preset.

System Preset Number - Identifies the number

used for the current system preset.

Voice Key Indicator - Indicates key used for voice

communications.

System Preset Name - Identifies the name used

for the current preset.

Hop Neighbor Information - Displays the number

of known radios that are currently in the network
and only 1 hop away. When operating as a
GUEST node, the V KEY and 1-HOP are replaced
with GUEST.

Radios in Network Information - Displays the

number of known radios that are currently in the
network.

Ethernet/USB Connectivity- Displays the

physical network connectivity into the network.

Transmit Power Level- Displays the transmit

power level in the form of an indicator. A full solid
bar indicates high power, half a bar indicates
(GUEST Mode Shown) medium power, and a small bar indicates low
power.

Relay Indicators- Indicate that the radio is being

used for relaying purposes.
• D - Indicates that the radio is being used as a
data (D) relay.
• V - Indicates that the radio is being used as a
voice (V) relay.
Transmit/Receive Indicators- Indicate that the
radio is either actively transmitting or receiving
ANW2 network traffic:
• [Up Arrow] - Indicates that the radio is
transmitting non-net maintenance traffic.
• [Down Arrow] - Indicates that the radio is
receiving non-net maintenance traffic.

E-5
 ANW2 Frequency Screen The second screen displays the frequency and
(Press [Next] to view.) bandwidth in MHz of the ANW2 preset that is
currently selected.

Frequency - Displays the frequency that the

preset is on. Valid range is 225.0000 MHz -
1999.9950 MHz.

Max Bandwidth - Shows the bandwidth at which

the waveform is currently operating at.

Ethernet/USB Connectivity - Displays the

physical network connectivity into the network.

Transmit Power Level - Displays the transmit

power level in the form of an indicator. A full solid
bar indicates high power, half a bar indicates
medium power, and a small bar indicates low
power.

Relay Indicators - Indicate that the radio is being

used for relaying purposes:
• D - Indicates that the radio is being used as a
data relay.
• V - Indicates that the radio is being used as a
voice relay.
Transmit / Receive Indicators - Indicates that the
radio is either actively transmitting or receiving
ANW2 network traffic.
• [Up Arrow] - Indicates that the radio is
transmitting non-net maintenance traffic.
• [Down Arrow] - Indicates that the radio is
receiving non-net maintenance traffic.

E-6
Large Font Screen The large font screen is the last main screen of
each waveform. Use [Next] to scroll through the
main screen set to the last screen being the large
font screen. One more press of [Next] will
advance the user to the first main top level screen.
After a waveform switch, the default screen is
always the first top level screen with one
exception. If the user selects the large font screen
and then changes presets, the new preset will
display the large font screen as well.
The top row of information (battery/external power
information, Plain Text (PT)/Load (LD)/Cipher
Text (CT) indicator, etc.) remains the same on the
large font screen as it does on the other main
screens. Additionally, all messages displayed on
the bottom row of the main screen (e.g., keying
messages) will also be displayed on the large font
screen.

E-7
E.4.2 BGAN Screens

BGAN-only ANW2-BGAN Screen This screen displays information about the

selected BGAN enabled preset, preset
configuration, network status, and information
regarding the preset name, signal strength, online
status and desired connection data rate.

NOTE: For any BGAN operation or options

screens, the AN/PRC-117G must be connected to
a BGAN terminal.

Reconnection Attempt Number - During

connection and reconnection attempts, this
number is displayed to indicate the currently active
attempt number.

BGAN Status - Displays the current status of the

BGAN terminal. Possible statuses include:
• CONFIGURING
• POINTING
• REGISTERING
• REGISTERED
• ACTIVATING
• ONLINE
• SEARCHING
• IDENTIFYING
• PENDING-32K, PENDING-64K, PENDING-
128K, or PENDING-256K
• DEACTIVATING
• RESETTING
User Action - Informs the user of possible actions
that can be taken, or must be taken, to move
forward. Possible actions include:
• USER ACTION
• PLEASE WAIT
• POINT ANTENNA
• ENT TO CONNECT
• ENT-CONN/CLR-POINT
• CLR TO CANCEL
• CLR TO DISCONNECT
• ENT TO REINITIALIZE
• USER ACTION N/A

E-8
PLEASE WAIT is displayed when the AN/PRC-
117G is currently processing a request. This can
be displayed during preset startup, connection, or
disconnection.

POINT ANTENNA is displayed when the attached

antenna is land portable and insufficient signal
strength is currently present. The operator must
point the antenna to achieve sufficient signal
strength prior to connecting, or to reconnect.

ENT TO CONNECT indicates that the AN/PRC-

117G is ready to be placed online. Performing this
action results in the connection process
beginning.

ENT-CONN/CLR-POINT indicates that the

terminal is REGISTERED already and can be
taken back to POINTING or attempt to CONNECT.

CLR TO CANCEL indicates that the AN/PRC-

117G is currently processing an action and is
allowing the user to cancel the request.

CLR TO DISCONNECT indicates how to

disconnect from the network.

ENT TO REINITIALIZE indicates that the

AN/PRC-117G is in a fault state. Performing this
action will put the AN/PRC-117G through the
initialization sequence again in an attempt to
restore normal operation.

USER ACTION N/A indicates that the AN/PRC-

117G is in radio silence mode and the terminal is
currently suppressing all transmission. The
terminal will not be allowed to transmit and the
user is disallowed from performing actions.

E-9
 BGAN RSSI Value - The actual Received Signal
Strength Indication (RSSI) measurement of the
BGAN antenna in dBs.

Red Ethernet Connection - This field is used to

indicate the presence of Link Status for the Red
Ethernet.

Black Ethernet Connection - This field is used to

indicate the presence of Link Status for the Black
Ethernet.

Active BGAN Data Rate - This is the data rate of

the BGAN network connection. Possible BGAN
data rates include:

• BKG
• 32K
• 64K
• 128K
• 256K
• ****
While the AN/PRC-117G is offline, the value
specified for BGAN data rate is the rate that will be
used when connecting to the network. Once the
rate is selected, the AN/PRC-117G will attempt to
connect to BGAN using the selected rate.

While the AN/PRC-117G is online, the value

indicated for BGAN data rate is the actual data
rate.

The data rate is editable, except during

renegotiation. If data rate is edited while online, a
context renegotiation is forced to attempt to
achieve the newly specified data rate.

"****" is not a selectable data rate. It is displayed to

indicate a context renegotiation is in progress.

E-10
E.4.3 INE Top Level Screens

INE Screen This screen displays information about the

selected preset, with respect to the INE. The
screen shows IP Address configurations as well as
network status.

PT IP Address - This is used to indicate the PT IP

Address.

CT IP Address - This is used to indicate the CT IP

Address.

RED Ethernet Connection - This icon indicates the

presence of Link Status for the Red Ethernet.

Black (BLK) Ethernet Connection - This icon

indicates the presence of link status for the black
ethernet.

VPN Indicator - This icon indicates the presence of

any Virtual Private Network (VPN) tunnels and
displays the number of Black IPSec VPN currently
active.

VPN Tunnel Failure Screen This screen displays notification of a VPN

negotiation failure. This status will only be
displayed when active on the INE Top Level
screen.

E.5 ANW2 OPTIONS

Press [OPT] > ANW2 CONFIG to access the ANW2 option menus. The option
screens allow the operator to modify ANW2 wideband and BGAN parameters.

E.5.1 ANW2 Wideband (WB) Options

Perform the following procedure to set ANW2 options:

a. From the ANW2 CONFIG screen, select ANW2 WIRELESS. The WB
configurations menu appears. This screen allows the user to change the
SA mode used to trigger transmissions.

E-11
 b. Select SA CONFIG. The SA TRANSMIT MODE screen appears. This
screen allows the user to change the SA mode used to trigger
transmissions:
1. At the SA TRANSMIT MODE screen select PERIODIC. The
PERIODIC (MINUTES) screen appears. This screen allows the
user to configure the elapsed time required for an SA report. Valid
settings are 1 - 1440 minutes. Enter the desired choice and press
[ENT] to continue.
2. At the SA TRANSMIT MODE screen select MOVEMENT. The
MOVEMENT (METERS) screen appears. This screen allows the
user to configure the distance traveled in meters (15 to 1000)
required for an SA report. Enter the desired choice and press [ENT]
to continue.
3. A screen appears displaying the destination IP address, the
destination port number, the protocol being used, and the combat
Identification (ID) used during SA operation. Press [ENT] to
continue.
c. At the ANW2 CONFIG screen select TX POSITION ON PTT:
1. Select ENABLE or DISABLE.
d. At the ANW2 CONFIG screen select ANW2 TIME OF DAY:
1. The CURRENT ANW2 DATE screen appears. This screen allows
the user to view the ANW2 date in ZULU format if ZULU format is
configured for System Time. Press [ENT] to continue.
2. The CURRENT ANW2 TIME screen appears. This screen allows
the user to view the ANW2 time of day. Press [ENT] to continue.
e. At the ANW2 CONFIG screen select NETWORK STATISTICS:
1. Scroll to select INE CT. This field indicates the preset's High
Assurance Internet Protocol Encryptor (HAIPE) CT IP address.
Press [ENT] to continue.
2. Scroll to select INE PT. This field indicates the preset's HAIPE PT
IP address. Press [ENT] to continue.
3. Scroll to select ANW2. This field indicates the preset's IP address
assigned to the ANW2 RF Interface. Not displayed if the Preset
Mode disables the ANW2 RF Interface. Press [ENT] to continue.

E-12
 4. Scroll to select BLK ETH. This field indicates the preset's IP
address assigned to the Black Ethernet Interface for
communications other than BGAN. The field is not displayed if the
Preset Mode disables the LAN INE functionality. Press [ENT] to
continue.

E.5.2 BGAN Options

Perform the following procedure to set BGAN options:

NOTE
BGAN must be enabled on the preset that is active.
There also needs to be an active network connection to
the BGAN terminal to view the individual BGAN options
screens.
a. From the ANW2 CONFIG screen, select BGAN SATELLITE. The BGAN
SATELLITE menu appears.
b. Select BGAN SATCOM INFO. Select BGAN SATCOM INFO. The
Satcom IP Status Screen appears. This screen allows the user to view
the expected satellite IP address once connected, as well as the actual
one obtained:
1. Use [Next] to scroll through the APN Configuration, APN, APN User
Name, and APN Password screens.
c. At the BGAN SATELLITE screen select BGAN TERMINAL BATTERY:
1. View BGAN terminal battery status.
d. At the BGAN SATELLITE screen select BGAN TERMINAL VERSION:
1. Use [Next] to scroll through the different serial identifications, part
number, and other screens.
e. At the BGAN SATELLITE screen select BGAN TERMINAL SELF TEST:
1. Perform self test on BGAN terminal and view results.
f. At the BGAN SATELLITE screen select BGAN USAGE STATISTICS:
1. View and reset usage statistics.
g. At the BGAN SATELLITE screen select BGAN POINTING TONES:
1. Enable or disable pointing tones.

E-13
E.6 ANW2 PROGRAMMING

See Figure E-1 for the menu tree for ANW2 preset programming. Refer to
Chapter 4 for basic platform programming features.

8 VWX
PGM

SYSTEM PRESETS
SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG
SYSTEM PRESET NUMBER
PRESET DESCRIPTION
PRESET WAVEFORM
ANW2

GENERAL CONFIG
PRESET NAME
ENTER ALPHANUMERIC
PRESET NAME
BLACK SIDE INTERFACES
ANW2 WIDEBAND
DISABLED, ENABLED
BGAN
ENABLED, DISABLED
BGAN TRAFFIC CLASS
BACKGROUND
STREAMING
REQUESTED BW
32K, 64K, 128K, 256K
BROADCAST BGAN GW
DISABLED, ENABLED
BLACK LAN
ENABLED, DISABLED
BROADCAST BGAN GW
ENABLED, DISABLED

VOICE CONFIG
VOICE CRYPTO KEY
TEK01 - TEK25

(A) (B) F-0319-4100-0041C-1

Figure E-1. ANW2 Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 3)

E-14
 (A) (B)
FREQ CONFIG
MAX BANDWIDTH
5.0 MHZ, 1.2 MHZ
FREQUENCY (MHZ)
225.600 TO 1999.400 (1.2 MHZ)
227.500 TO 1997.500 (5.0 MHZ)
POWER
HIGH (5.0 WATTS),
MED (2.0 WATTS),
LOW (0.5 WATTS)

TRANSEC
TRANSEC KEY
TSK01 - TSK25
TRANSEC OFFSET
0 - 9999
SA CONFIG

SA TRANSMIT MODE
PERIODIC
INTERVAL (MINUTES)
1 - 1440
MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT (METERS)
15 - 1000
TX POSITION ON PTT
ENABLED, DISABLED
SA PROTOCOL
HARRIS OR CURSOR ON TARGET
(READ ONLY)
SA STALE TIME
1-10080
NETWORK CONFIG
MAX RADIOS
01 TO 10
WAVEFORMS (MAX = 01)
EXIT WF1 TO WF7
(A)

F-0319-4100-0014C-2
Figure E-1. ANW2 Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 3)
E-15
 (A)
ANW2 CONFIG
ANW2 TIME OF DAY
CURRENT ANW2 DATE
CURRENT ANW2 TIME
BGAN CONFIG
USIM PIN
ENTER ALPHANUMERIC PIN
LP AUTO CONNECT
ENABLED, DISABLED
IDLE STREAM TIMEOUT
ENABLED, DISABLED
ENTER 001 - 999
BGAN POINTING TONES
ENABLED, DISABLED

BLACK IPV4 CONFIG

BLACK ICMP CONFIG

MESSAGE PROCESSING
ENABLED, DISABLED
BLACK PING REPLY
ENABLED, DISABLED

BLACK ETHERNET CONFIG

MAC ADDRESS CONFIG

MAC ADDRESS
FACTORY ASSIGNED,
USER ASSIGNED
MAC ADDRESS

00:00:00:00:00:01

BLACK VPN CONFIG

IPSEC PROCESSING
NORMAL,
CONVERT TO NON-IPSEC
F-0319-4100-0014C-3
Figure E-1. ANW2 Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 3 of 3)

E-16
E.6.1 ANW2 Preset Programming

ANW2 specific waveform presets contain radio network parameters that define how
the radio will operate. Up to 99 presets can be programmed in the AN/PRC-117G.
The majority of the programming must be done using the CPA. At the front panel,
parameters such as bandwidth, center frequency, IP encryption preset, TRANSEC
key, TEK, and SA can be programmed.
Perform the following procedure to program ANW2 waveform presets:
a. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESETS > SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG and
press [ENT].
b. Select a waveform preset (01 to 99) to configure ANW2, and press [ENT]
to continue.
c. Enter a text description or name for the system preset number. Press
[ENT] to continue.
d. Choose ANW2 as the waveform type that will be associated with the
selected system preset.
e. Select GENERAL CONFIG and press [ENT].
f. Set the PRESET NAME. The name length must be 11 characters or less
with no spaces. Press [ENT] to continue.
g. Select BLACK SIDE INTERFACES and press [ENT]. The ANW2
WIDEBAND screen appears.
h. At the ANW2 WIDEBAND screen, ENABLE or DISABLE ANW2
wideband. This allows ANW2 over the high-band portion of the radio.
i. At the BGAN screen, ENABLE or DISABLE BGAN. When enabled, the
ANW2 security is used with a BGAN INMARSAT terminal.
j. If BGAN is enabled, select BACKGROUND or STREAMING for BGAN
TRAFFIC CLASS. Background is charged by the amount of data,
measured in bytes. Streaming is charged by amount of time spent online.
k. If BGAN is enabled with STREAMING, select the REQUESTED
BANDWIDTH. Values range from 32 K to 256 K (Kilo bits per seconds
[kbps]).
l. If BGAN and WIDEBAND are enabled, ENABLE or DISABLE
BROADCAST BGAN GW. When enabled, the BGAN online status is
broadcasted over ANW2 wideband.
m. At the BLACK LAN screen, ENABLE or DISABLE black LAN.

E-17
 n. If black LAN and WIDEBAND are enabled, ENABLE or DISABLE
BROADCAST BLK LAN Gateway (GW). When enabled, the black LAN
connection status is broadcasted over ANW2 wideband.
o. Select VOICE CONFIG. The VOICE CRYPTO KEY screen appears.
Select the desired crypto key for the ANW2 preset being programmed.
Valid settings are TEK01 - TEK25; the default setting is TEK01. Press
[ENT] to continue.
p. Select FREQ CONFIG. The MAX BANDWIDTH screen appears. This
screen is used to select the bandwidth for the ANW2 preset. Valid
settings are 5.0 MHz or 1.2 MHz. Select the desired choice and press
[ENT] to continue.
q. The FREQUENCY (MHz) screen appears. Select a frequency (225.625
- 1997.375 MHz 1.2 MHz bandwidth, 227.500 - 1997.500 MHz 5.0 MHz
bandwidth). Press [ENT].
r. Select POWER. The TX POWER screen appears. This screen is used to
set the TX power level. Valid settings are HIGH (5.0 W), MEDIUM (2.0
W), and LOW (0.5 W). Power levels will be different if used in a Vehicular
Amplifier Adapter (VAA). Select the desired choice and press [ENT] to
continue.
s. Select TRANSEC. The TRANSEC KEY screen appears. Use [Up
Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to select the proper TSK. This key is
programmed into the mission plan using the CPA and is not loaded from
a fill device. Valid entries are TSK01 - TSK25. The default setting is
TSK01. Select the desired choice and press [ENT] to continue.
t. The TRANSEC OFFSET screen appears. Valid settings are
0000 - 9999. This value will be used as a TRANSEC seed; all radios in a
net must have the same offset value. Enter the desired choice and press
[ENT] to continue.
u. Select SA CONFIG. The SA TRANSMIT MODE screen appears. This
screen allows the user to set SA transmit mode. Valid settings are:
PERIODIC, MOVEMENT, TX POSITION ON PTT, SA PROTOCOL, and
SA STALE TIME. Select the desired choice and press [ENT] to continue.
1. PERIODIC is selected: Position is reported after a programmed
time interval has occurred. The PERIODIC (MINUTES) screen
appears. Enter a value between 1 - 1440 minutes. Press [ENT] to
continue.
2. MOVEMENT is selected: Position is reported after a movement
distance has occurred. The MOVEMENT (METERS) screen

E-18
 appears. Enter a value between 15 - 1000 meters. Press [ENT] to
continue.
3. TX POSITION ON PTT is selected: SA reports are sent on voice
transmissions. ENABLE or DISABLE. Press [ENT] to continue.
4. Select SA PROTOCOL. The SA PROTOCOL screen appears.
Valid settings are HARRIS and CURSOR ON TARGET. Select the
desired choice and press [ENT] to continue.
5. Select SA STALE TIME if using cursor on target. Time is between
1 - 10080 minutes. Enter the desired choice and press [ENT] to
continue. SA Stale Time Screen sets the elapsed time in minutes
until the last SA report received is considered stale.
v. Select NETWORK CONFIG. The MAX RADIOS screen appears. This
screen allows the user to set the maximum radios in the ANW2 net. Valid
settings are 1, to 10. A higher value means a smaller data frame and less
throughput. A lower value means a larger data frame and more
throughput. Enter the desired choice and press [ENT] to continue.
w. With MAX RADIOS set to 01, use this WAVEFORMS screen to set
multicast waveforms to WF1 to WF5 (for 1.2 MHz bandwidth) or to WF1
to WF7 (for 5.0 MHz bandwidth). The valid entries for this screen are:
Waveform BW (Hz) Modulation

WF1 1.2 MHz GMSK Orth l=32, k=3

WF2 1.2 MHz GMSK Orth l=16, k=3
WF3 1.2 MHz GMSK Orth l=8, k=3
WF4 1.2 MHz Sq Nyquist PSK, k=1
WF5 1.2 MHz Sq Nyquist PSK, k=2
WF6 2.5 MHz Sq Nyquist PSK, k=2
WF7 5.0 MHz Sq Nyquist PSK, k=2
Where k indicates the number of bits per symbol for the indicated
modulations: square root Nyquist filter for Phase Shift Keying (PSK) or
Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) Orthogonal (Orth) modulation.

E-19
E.7 ANW2 CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING

Perform the following procedure to perform ANW2 configuration programming:

a. Press [PGM] > ANW2 CONFIG to start ANW2 configuration
programming.
b. Select ANW2 TIME OF DAY and press [ENT]:
1. The CURRENT ANW2 DATE screen appears. Use this screen to
enter the current ANW2 date. Enter the Month-Day-Year (MM-DD-
YY) and press [ENT] to continue.
2. The CURRENT ANW2 TIME screen appears. Press [ENT] to enter
the Hours-Minutes-Seconds (HH-MM-SS) and press [ENT] to
continue.
c. Select BGAN CONFIG. Press [ENT] to continue.
1. The USIM PIN screen appears. Enter an alphanumeric Personal
Identification Number (PIN) for the Universal Subscriber Identity
Module (USIM) module on the BGAN terminal.
2. The LP AUTO CONNECT screen appears. ENABLE or DISABLE
automatic connection attempts upon entry of a BGAN enabled
preset connected to a Land Portable (LP) antenna.
3. The IDLE STREAM TIMEOUT screen appears. ENABLE or
DISABLE the automatic switching from a streaming rate to a
background connection once a configured period of inactivity
expires. When enabled, enter the timeout as 001 to 999 minutes.
4. The BGAN POINTING TONES screen appears. ENABLE or
DISABLE the if pointing tones are hear on the BGAN terminal.
d. Select BLACK IPV4 CONFIG. Press [ENT] to continue.
1. Press [ENT] at the BLACK ICMP CONFIG screen to set the
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
2. The MESSAGE PROCESSING screen appears. ENABLE or
DISABLE message processing. Press [ENT] to continue.
3. If message processing is enabled, The BLACK PING REPLY
screen appears. ENABLE or DISABLE the black ping reply.
ENABLED causes BLACK ICMP Echo (PING) Response message
to be generated automatically in response to any ICMP Echo
E-20
 Request message received. Press [ENT] to return to the BLACK
ICMP CONFIG screen. Press [CLR] to return to the ANW2
CONFIG menu.
e. Select BLACK ETHERNET CONFIG. Press [ENT] to continue.
1. Press [ENT] at the MAC ADDRESS CONFIG screen to set the
Machine Address Code (MAC).
2. The MAC ADDRESS screen appears. Set the MAC address as
FACTORY ASSIGNED or USER ASSIGNED. Press [ENT] to
continue.
3. If the MAC address is User Assigned, enter a static MAC address
using the format: 00:00:00:00:00:01. Press [ENT] to return to the
MAC ADDRESS CONFIG screen. Press [CLR] to return to the
ANW2 CONFIG menu.
f. Select BLACK VPN CONFIG. Press [ENT] to continue.
1. The IPSEC PROCESSING screen appears. Select NORMAL or
CONVERT TO NON-IPSEC. NORMAL loads all configured VPN
tunnels. CONVERT TO NON-IPSEC converts all VPN tunnels into
IPIP tunnels. Press [ENT] to continue.
g. To exit, press [CLR].

E-21
 This page intentionally left blank.

E-22
 APPENDIX F

ROVER (OPTION)

F.1 ROVER FIXED FREQUENCY OPERATION

Remotely Operated Video Enhanced Receiver (ROVER) is an option that operates

from the AN/PRC-117G as the reception of ROVER video feeds over the high-band
portion (225.00 MHz to 2000.00 MHz) of the radio in Plain Text (PT) only.
This appendix defines actions that are specific for operation and programming of
the AN/PRC-117G when using the ROVER waveform. Refer to Chapter 3 and
Chapter 4 for global radio operations, and global radio programming before using
this appendix. The RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA)
contains sample plans with example nets for each of the waveforms in the radio.
Sample plans can be used as a starting point for programming a waveform in the
radio.

F.1.1 ROVER MAIN STATUS SCREENS

The Main ROVER Status Screens present the user with major parameters used for
receiving or transmitting voice and data. Paragraph F.1.2 shows the main screens
that are seen when a ROVER net is selected. Use the [Next] key to scroll through
the main screens. The function of each field is explained in the accompanying text.

F-1
F.1.2 ROVER Main Screens

ROVER Preset Main Screen The Preset Top Level Screen displays information
about the ROVER preset that is currently selected.
The information displayed on this screen is
considered to be the main configuration
parameters for the ROVER preset.

System Preset Number - The number of the

currently selected system preset.

System Preset Name - The name of the currently

selected system preset.

RX Frequency - The Receive (RX) Frequency is

the Receive Frequency configured for the current
preset. When RX Frequency is highlighted,
pressing [ENT] or a numeric key places this field
in edit mode for modification. Pressing [ENT]
again sets the modified frequency, provided that it
is a valid frequency value. Pressing [CLR] cancels
the edit. Range is 1 GHz to 2 GHz, 0.5 MHz steps.

Video Quality - The video quality setting is the

ROVER video configuration setting.

Ethernet Connectivity - This field displays when

the radio is physically connected to the network.

ROVER Preset Main Screen) The Network Top Level Screen displays
information about the ROVER network
configuration.

Destination IP Address - The destination IP

address is the address configured for the current
preset that the video stream will be sent to.

Destination Port Number - The destination port

number is the port configured for the ROVER
waveform that the video stream is sent to.

Ethernet Connectivity - This field displays when

the radio is physically connected to the network.

F-2
 ROVER Large Format Screen This screen displays the current system preset
(Press [Next] to view) number and name in a larger font.

F.2 ROVER OPERATION

ROVER can only be operated in Plain Text.

WARNING

To prevent electrical shock and RF burns, avoid making RF

power output connections or touching antenna while in
transmit mode.
Perform the following procedure to operate the AN/PRC-117G in ROVER.

NOTE
It is assumed that the AN/PRC-117G is already
programmed for the ROVER operation and an antenna
has been installed. Refer to Chapter 4 for AN/PRC-
117G programming.

NOTE
Because ROVER RF signals use very wide bandwidth,
it is possible to receive when slightly off frequency.
Manually entered frequencies should match the
expected transmitter frequency for best video quality.
F-3
 NOTE
The RF-3165-AT122 and (12006-5500-01) antennas
are recommended. The RF-3164 will not work above
450 MHz which is below the frequency range of ROVER
in the AN/PRC-117G.
a. Make sure that the radio has been set up and ready to operate per
Chapter 2. Radio needs to have an antenna designed for ROVER
operation.
b. On Personal Computer, install VLC Media Player version 0.9.9
(http://www.videolan.org/) and Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1.
c. Copy the Harris Rover VLC Launcher from the Compact Disk (CD) or
Harris Premier web site (https://premier.harris.com/) to the local hard
drive.
d. Cable radio to computer using red ethernet cable (12043-2760-AXXX).
e. Rotate cipher switch to [PT].
f. After the radio initializes, select desired ROVER preset by pressing [PRE
+/-].
g. Use [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] to start seek which will go through the
seek list and select a frequency if not already correct on the selected
preset. The seek list is listed in order from lowest to highest frequency.
h. Launch the Harris Rover VLC Launcher. The screen shown in Figure F-1
appears.

F-4
 Figure F-1. ROVER VLC Launcher Screen

i. If desired, check Record Video Stream and select location to save

ROVER video feed as mpeg4 file.
j. For Connection Settings, check:
1. (Recommended) Auto video stream detection - In the radio,
Service Announcement Protocol (SAP) announcements are
enabled and the automatic (auto) video stream detection is used in
the VLC Launcher.
2. Manually specify stream settings - In the radio, SAP
announcements are disabled. The VLC Launcher is configured for
the destination IP address and port.
k. If needed, use the Advanced tab to configure the VLC path if an older
version of VLC is to be retained. Additional VLC command line
arguments can be sent using the Additional VLC Parameters.
l. Click on Launch VLC. VLC launches as shown in Figure F-2. VLC
Launcher uses the primary network interface when multiple network
interfaces exist.

F-5
 Figure F-2. VLC Playlist Screen

m. Click on SAP in the left pane.

n. Expand HARRIS Falcon III Rover folder.
o. Double-click on radio in folder to view video stream. Radio serial number
appears and several radios could appear if using automatic video stream
detection.
F.3 ROVER OPTIONS
There is no options menu for this waveform.

F.4 ROVER PROGRAMMING

Figure F-3 shows the menu tree for ROVER preset programming. Refer to
Chapter 4 for basic Platform programming features.

F-6
8 VWX
PGM
SYSTEM PRESETS
SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG
SYSTEM PRESET NUMBER
PRESET DESCRIPTION
PRESET WAVEFORM
ROVER
GENERAL CONFIG
PRESET NAME
FREQUENCY
RX FREQUENCY
ENTER 1000.00 TO 2000.00
EXIT
ROVER CONFIG
NETWORK CONFIG
DEST IP ADDRESS
ENTER IP ADDRESS
DEST UDP PORT
ENTER 1 TO 65535
DEST SAP IP ADDRESS
ENTER IP ADDRESS
SAP ANNOUNCEMENTS
ENABLED, DISABLED

VIDEO CONFIG
QUALITY
HIGH, MED, LOW
COLOR
ENABLED, DISABLED
SEEK CONFIG
ADD
RX FREQUENCY
ENTER 1000 TO 2000
VIEW
REMOVE
F-0319-4100-0053-1
Figure F-3. ROVER Programming Menu Tree

F-7
F.4.1 ROVER Preset Programming

ROVER presets contain parameters such as frequencies and preset names. Use
the following procedures to program ROVER presets.
a. Press [PGM] > SYSTEM PRESETS to start:
• SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG - program a ROVER preset.
• RESET SYSTEM PRESET - return preset to previous
programmed parameters.
• SYSTEM SCAN CONFIG - program scan operation.
b. Select SYSTEM PRESET CONFIG and press [ENT].
c. Enter a preset number (01 - 99) for the preset to be configured. Press
[ENT] to continue.
d. Enter a text description or name for the system preset number. Press
[ENT] to continue.
e. Choose ROVER as the waveform type that will be associated with the
selected system preset.
f. Select GENERAL CONFIG and press [ENT].
g. Enter a PRESET NAME for the ROVER preset being configured. The
Preset Name Screen will display an 11 character alphanumeric field,
where both letters and numbers can be entered into the field to represent
the Preset Name. Use the keypad strokes and left/right arrows to enter
the new name, and then press the [ENT] key to update the current Preset
Name with the new entry.
h. Select FREQUENCY and press [ENT].
i. Enter a value from 1000.00 to 2000.00 and then press [ENT] to continue.
j. To exit, select EXIT and press [ENT].

F-8
F.4.2 ROVER Configuration Programming

ROVER configuration (config) contains parameters such as Internet Protocol (IP)

addresses and ports. Use the following procedures to program ROVER
configuration.
a. Press [PGM] > ROVER CONFIG and press [ENT].
b. Select NETWORK CONFIG and press [ENT].
c. Enter the destination IP address. Press [ENT] to continue.
d. Enter the destination User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port (1 - 65535).
Press [ENT] to continue.
e. Enter the destination SAP IP Address. Press [ENT] to continue.
f. ENABLE or DISABLE SAP announcements. Press [ENT] to continue.
g. Select VIDEO CONFIG and press [ENT].
h. Select HIGH, MED, or LOW video QUALITY and press [ENT].
i. ENABLE or DISABLE video COLOR and press [ENT].
j. Select SEEK CONFIG and press [ENT].
k. Select ADD and press [ENT].
l. Enter frequency to add to seek list and press [ENT].
m. Enter additional frequencies, if needed.
n. Select VIEW and press [ENT].
o. Scroll through frequency list. When done, press [ENT].
To remove seek list frequency:
p. Select REMOVE and press [ENT].
q. Select frequency to remove and press [ENT].
r. Select YES to confirm removal or NO to abort. Press [ENT].
s. Repeat for additional frequencies to delete.
t. Press [PGM] or repeatedly press [CLR] to exit.

F-9
 This page intentionally left blank.

F-10
 APPENDIX G

REFERENCES

G.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Table G-1 lists the specifications for the AN/PRC-117G radio set.

Table G-1. AN/PRC-117G Specifications

Function Specification

GENERAL
Frequency Range VHF-Lo: 30.0000 MHz - 89.9999 MHz
VHF-Hi: 90.0000 - 224.9999 MHz
UHF: 225.0000 MHz - 511.9950 MHz
UHF Satellite Communications (SATCOM): 243.0000 MHz -
270.0000 MHz and 291.0000 MHz - 318.3000 MHz
High-Band (ANW2): 225.0000 MHz - 1999.9950 MHz
High-Band (Remotely Operated Video Enhanced Receiver
[ROVER]): 1000.0000 MHz - 1999.9950 MHz
Frequency Front Panel: 100 Hz
Resolution American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
Remote: 1 Hz
Adaptive Networking Wideband Waveform (ANW2): 5 kHz
Channel Spacing Nominal: 5 kHz
VHF-Lo: 25 kHz
VHF-Hi / UHF:12.5, or 25 kHz -FM,
8.33 kHz, 12.5 kHz, or 25 kHz - AM
High-Band: 1.2 MHz or 5 MHz
System Presets 99 fully programmable system presets.
Modulation VHF-Lo: FM (5kHz, 6.5 kHz, or 8 kHz), Frequency Shift Keying
(FSK)
VHF-Hi: FM (5 kHz, 6.5 kHz, or 8 kHz); AM (90%), FSK, Amplitude
Shift Keying (ASK)
UHF: FM (5 kHz, 6.5 kHz, or 8 kHz); AM (90%), FSK, ASK
UHF SATCOM: FSK, Shaped Binary Phase Shift Keying (SBPSK),
Continuous Phase Modulation (CPM), High-Band Phase Shift
Keying (PSK), Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK)
Power Input 21 VDC - 34.4 VDC Nominal, Shutdown >34.8 VDC ±0.5 VDC, and
<17.5 VDC ±0.5 VDC. Maximum power is approximately 65 watts.

G-1
 Table G-1. AN/PRC-117G Specifications (Continued)

Function Specification

Voice Modes Simplex or Half-Duplex

(VHF-Lo - UHF) Plain Text Analog Voice
SINCGARS FH Electronic Counter-Counter Measures (ECCM)
(VHF-Lo band only, 30.0 - 87.975 MHz)
HAVEQUICK FH ECCM (UHF band, 225.0 - 399.975 MHz)
Wideband Cipher Text Digital Voice (16 kbps; Continuously Variable
Slope Delta [CVSD]; KY-57)
Narrowband Cipher Text Digital Voice (2.4 kbps; LPC-10 (Linear
Predictive Coding [LPC]), Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice
Terminal [ANDVT])
Voice Modes Simplex
(High-Band) ANW2 Digital Voice Over using MEDLEY Encryption
Data Modes Simplex or Half-Duplex
(VHF-Lo - UHF) Synchronous bps: 50, 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
12 k, 16 k, 19.2 k, 38.4 k, 48 k, 56 k
SINCGARS FH ECCM (VHF-Lo band/16 kbps only)
Wideband Cipher Text Digital Data (16 kbps; KY-57)
Narrowband Cipher Text Digital Data (2.4 kbps; ANDVT/KYV-5;
KG-84C)
Data Modes Simplex
(High-Band) ANW2 Digital Data using BATON or MEDLEY Encryption (32 kbps
to 10 Mbps)
SATCOM MIL-STD-188-181B - Dedicated Channels
Compatibility
COMSEC KY-57 VINSON, ANDVT (Mode 3), KG-84C, Fascinator, Advanced
Interoperability Encryption Standard (AES), BATON, MEDLEY
COMSEC Features One Red Key Encryption Key (KEK), Vector, IKE, up to 250 black
keys of any combination of TEK, KEK, or TSK
COMSEC Fill Device MX-18290
Compatibility AN/CYZ-10 DTD (supports DS-101 and DS-102 fill formats)
AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader (SKL)
KIK-20
KOI-18
KYX-15
KYK-13
TRANSEC SINCGARS FH (per JTCCCA 9001C). Fill using RF-6650M
Interoperability Communications Programming Application (CPA).
TRANSEC Fill MX-18290/VRC; AN/CYZ-10 DTD using FH Fill Mode 1, 2, or 3
Devices
GPS Capability Internal Ground-Based GPS Receiver Application Module Selective
Availability Anti-Spoofing Module (GB GRAM SAASM)

G-2
 Table G-1. AN/PRC-117G Specifications (Continued)

Function Specification

External Data Asynchronous/Synchronous RS-232E, MIL-STD-188-114A

Interfaces compatible
Remote Control RS-232E compatible
Capability
USB Port Internal red USB 2.0 compatible port

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS

Output Power: 1, 4, 10 watts (40 dBm +2/-0 dBm) (Low/Med/High settings).

VULOS Vehicular Amplifier Adapter (VAA) power levels are different.
30 MHz - 511.9950
MHz
Output Power 2, 8, 20 watts (43 dBm +2/-0 dBm) (Low/Med/High settings)
SATCOM
Output Power: 0.5, 2, 5 watts (37 dBm +2/-0 dBm) (Low/Med/High settings)
ANW2
225.0000 MHz -
1999.9950 MHz
Output Power: Refer to Paragraph 3.10.11.
USER Settings
Output Control Automatic reduction in power level for low voltage or high
temperature conditions and bad Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR).
Harmonic -50 dB or less for 37 dBm output power, -53 dB or less for 40 dBm
Suppression output power, -56 dB or less for 43 dBm output power.
Frequency Stability 1 x 10-6over operating temperature range during period of not less
than 30 days.

RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS

Sensitivity: VHF-Lo FM: -118 dBm for 10 dB (Signal + Noise +Distortion)/(Noise

+Distortion) (SINAD), 8 kHz Deviation
Sensitivity: VHF-Hi FM: -118 dBm for 10 dB SINAD, 8 kHz Deviation
AM: -110 dBm for 10 dB SINAD, 70% Modulation
Sensitivity: UHF FM: -118 dBm for 10 dB SINAD, 8 kHz Deviation
(225 - 450 MHz) AM: -110 dBm for 10 dB SINAD, 70% Modulation
Sensitivity: UHF FM: -118 dBm for 10 dB SINAD, 8 kHz Deviation
(450 - 512 MHz) AM: -110 dBm for 10 dB SINAD, 70% Modulation
Sensitivity: FM: -120 dBm for 10 dB SINAD
UHF TACSAT -112.5 dBm for 1 x 105 Bit Error Rate (BER)

G-3
 Table G-1. AN/PRC-117G Specifications (Continued)

Function Specification

Sensitivity: 1.2 MHz GMSK, -107 dBm for 90% packet success
High-Band 1.2 MHz PSK, -95 dBm for 90% packet success
5 MHz PSK, -89 dBm for 90% packet success
Adjacent Channel VHF-Low, VHF-High, 60 dB referenced to 50 kHz channel
Rejection UHF, 50 dB referenced to 50 kHz channel
High-Band 1.2 MHz, 40 dB referenced to 2.4 MHz channel
High-Band 5 MHz, 60 dB referenced to 10 MHz channel
ENVIRONMENTAL
Shock/Vibration Ground mobile environment, tactical (MIL-STD-810)
Temperature Operating: -40 C (-40 F) to +70 C (158 F) with no degradation in
performance when tested In Accordance With (IAW) MIL-STD-810F,
Method 501.4, Procedure II for High Temperature and IAW MIL-
STD-810F, Method 502.4, Procedure II for Low Temperature.
Storage: -40 C (-40 F) to +85 C (185 F) with no degradation in
performance when tested IAW MIL-STD-810F, Method 501.4,
Procedure I for High Temperature and IAW MIL-STD-810F, Method
502.4, Procedure I for Low Temperature.
Immersion 3.3 ft (1.0 m) of water per MIL-STD-810
Sand/Dust No damage from exposure to fine dust particles in wind speeds of
1,750 feet per minute and sand particles, wind speeds of 5,700 feet
per minute per MIL-STD-810F, Method 510.4, Procedure I and II.
Humidity Relative humidity from 5% to 95% non-condensing per MIL-STD-
810F, Method 507.4.
Rain 1.8 inches of rain per hour and 40 mph (64 km/h) wind for 40 minutes
per MIL-STD-810F, Method 506.4, Procedure I and III.
Freezing/Icing Per MIL-STD-810F, Method 521.2.
Altitude Non-operating) air transportation at altitudes up to 40,000 ft (12912
m) above sea level when tested per MIL-STD 810F, Method 500.4,
Procedure I
Operable at an unpressurized altitude of 30,000 ft (9144 m) when
tested per MIL-STD 810F, Method 500.4, Procedure II.
Withstand intentional aircraft decompression equivalent to an
altitude of 30,000 ft (9144 m) when tested per MIL-STD 810F,
Method 500.4, Procedure III.
MECHANICAL
Displacement 150 in3 (2458 cm3) (w/o GPS, battery, or antenna)
Volume
Size excluding 3.65 H x 7.37 W x 8.77 D in. (9.3 H x 18.7 W x 22.3 D cm.)
battery

G-4
 Table G-1. AN/PRC-117G Specifications (Continued)

Function Specification

Weight 7.3 lbs. maximum (3.3 kg) - excluding battery, antenna, and internal
GPS
Color 34094 (Green) per FED-STD-595B

G.2 REFERENCE TABLES AND FIGURES

This paragraph consists of reference tables and figures of information that may be
useful for programming and operating the AN/PRC-117G. All frequencies shown
are in MHz unless noted.
• SINCGARS Julian Date Calendars for non-leap years - Table G-2
• SINCGARS Julian Date Calendars for leap years - Table G-3
• SATCOM Option Codes for 5 kHz Channels - Table G-4
• SATCOM Option Codes for 25 kHz Channels - Table G-5
• SATCOM Channel Frequency Code List - Table G-6
• Maritime Mobile Service Frequencies and Channels - Table G-7
• National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) Weather
Radio Channels - Table G-8
• CTCSS Frequencies and Designator Codes - Table G-9
• CDCSS Codes - Table G-10
• Continental United States (CONUS) SATCOM Footprint - Figure G-1
• Atlantic SATCOM Footprint - Figure G-2
• Indian Ocean SATCOM Footprint - Figure G-3
• Pacific SATCOM Footprint - Figure G-4

G-5
 Table G-2. SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Non-Leap Year

MON
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
DAY

1 01 32 60 91 21 52 82 13 44 74 05 35
2 02 33 61 92 22 53 83 14 45 75 06 36
3 03 34 62 93 23 54 84 15 46 76 07 37
4 04 35 63 94 24 55 85 16 47 77 08 38
5 05 36 64 95 25 56 86 17 48 78 09 39
6 06 37 65 96 26 57 87 18 49 79 10 40
7 07 38 66 97 27 58 88 19 50 80 11 41
8 08 39 67 98 28 59 89 20 51 81 12 42
9 09 40 68 99 29 60 90 21 52 82 13 43
10 10 41 69 00 30 61 91 22 53 83 14 44
11 11 42 70 01 31 62 92 23 54 84 15 45
12 12 43 71 02 32 63 93 24 55 85 16 46
13 13 44 72 03 33 64 94 25 56 86 17 47
14 14 45 73 04 34 65 95 26 57 87 18 48
15 15 46 74 05 35 66 96 27 58 88 19 49
16 16 47 75 06 36 67 97 28 59 89 20 50
17 17 48 76 07 37 68 98 29 60 90 21 51
18 18 49 77 08 38 69 99 30 61 91 22 52
19 19 50 78 09 39 70 00 31 62 92 23 53
20 20 51 79 10 40 71 01 32 63 93 24 54
21 21 52 80 11 41 72 02 33 64 94 25 55
22 22 53 81 12 42 73 03 34 65 95 26 56
23 23 54 82 13 43 74 04 35 66 96 27 57
24 24 55 83 14 44 75 05 36 67 97 28 58
25 25 56 84 15 45 76 06 37 68 98 29 59
26 26 57 85 16 46 77 07 38 69 99 30 60
27 27 58 86 17 47 78 08 39 70 00 31 61
28 28 59 87 18 48 79 09 40 71 01 32 62
29 29 88 19 49 80 10 41 72 02 33 63
30 30 89 20 50 81 11 42 73 03 34 64
31 31 90 51 12 43 04 65

G-6
Table G-3. SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Leap Years: 2008, 2012, 2016

MON
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
DAY

1 01 32 61 92 22 53 83 14 45 75 06 36
2 02 33 62 93 23 54 84 15 46 76 07 37
3 03 34 63 94 24 55 85 16 47 77 08 38
4 04 35 64 95 25 56 86 17 48 78 09 39
5 05 36 65 96 26 57 87 18 49 79 10 40
6 06 37 66 97 27 58 88 19 50 80 11 41
7 07 38 67 98 28 59 89 20 51 81 12 42
8 08 39 68 99 29 60 90 21 52 82 13 43
9 09 40 69 00 30 61 91 22 53 83 14 44
10 10 41 70 01 31 62 92 23 54 84 15 45
11 11 42 71 02 32 63 93 24 55 85 16 46
12 12 43 72 03 33 64 94 25 56 86 17 47
13 13 44 73 04 34 65 95 26 57 87 18 48
14 14 45 74 05 35 66 96 27 58 88 19 49
15 15 46 75 06 36 67 97 28 59 89 20 50
16 16 47 76 07 37 68 98 29 60 90 21 51
17 17 48 77 08 38 69 99 30 61 91 22 52
18 18 49 78 09 39 70 00 31 62 92 23 53
19 19 50 79 10 40 71 01 32 63 93 24 54
20 20 51 80 11 41 72 02 33 64 94 25 55
21 21 52 81 12 42 73 03 34 65 95 26 56
22 22 53 82 13 43 74 04 35 66 96 27 57
23 23 54 83 14 44 75 05 36 67 97 28 58
24 24 55 84 15 45 76 06 37 68 98 29 59
25 25 56 85 16 46 77 07 38 69 99 30 60
26 26 57 86 17 47 78 08 39 70 00 31 61
27 27 58 87 18 48 79 09 40 71 01 32 62
28 28 59 88 19 49 80 10 41 72 02 33 63
29 29 60 89 20 50 81 11 42 73 03 34 64
30 30 90 21 51 82 12 43 74 04 35 65
31 31 91 52 13 44 05 66

Table G-4. 5 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options

Option I/O Data Modulation Applicable Forward Error

Code Rate Type COMSEC Correction

008 1200 SBPSK KG-84 OFF

010 2400 SBPSK KG-84 OFF
013 4800 CPM KG-84 OFF
014 4800 CPM KG-84 ON
015 6000 CPM KG-84 ON

G-7
 Table G-4. 5 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options (Continued)

Option I/O Data Modulation Applicable Forward Error

Code Rate Type COMSEC Correction

016 6000 CPM KG-84 OFF

017 7200 CPM KG-84 ON
018 7200 CPM KG-84 OFF
019 8000 CPM KG-84 ON
020 8000 CPM KG-84 OFF
021 9600 CPM KG-84 OFF

Table G-5. 25 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options

Option I/O Data Modulation Applicable Forward Error

Code Rate Type COMSEC Correction

131 9600 CPM KG-84 OFF

132 16 k FSK VINSON OFF
137 19.2 k CPM KG-84 OFF
138 28.8 K CPM KG-84 ON
139 28.8 k CPM KG-84 OFF
140 32 k CPM KG-84 ON
141 32 k CPM KG-84 OFF
142 38.4 k CPM KG-84 ON
143 38.4 k CPM KG-84 OFF
144 48 k CPM KG-84 OFF
145 56 k CPM KG-84 OFF
200 128 k AM KG-84 OFF
201 128 k FM KG-84 OFF
202 16 k ASK KG-84 OFF
F12 12 k FSK FASCINATOR OFF

G-8
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

1 SHF 250.350 W1 N1 N/A

2 SHF 250.400 N'1 N/A
3 SHF 250.450 A1 O1 N/A
4 SHF 250.500 O'1 N/A
5 SHF 250.550 B1 P1 N/A
6 SHF 250.600 P'1 N/A
7 SHF 250.650 C1 Q1 N/A
8 SHF 250.700 Q'1 N/A
9 292.850 251.850 W3 N2 25 kHz
10 292.950 251.950 A2 O2 25 kHz
11 293.050 252.050 B2 P2 25 kHz
12 293.150 252.150 C2 Q2 25 kHz
13 294.550 253.550 W4 N3 25 kHz
14 294.650 253.650 A3 O3 25 kHz
15 294.750 253.750 B3 P3 25 kHz
16 294.850 253.850 C3 Q3 25 kHz
17 296.250 255.250 W5 N4 25 kHz
18 296.350 255.350 A4 O4 25 kHz
19 296.450 255.450 B4 P4 25 kHz
20 296.550 255.550 C4 Q4 25 kHz
21 297.850 256.850 W6 N5 25 kHz
22 297.950 256.950 A5 O5 25 kHz
23 298.050 257.050 B5 P5 25 kHz
24 298.150 257.150 C5 Q5 25 kHz
25 299.350 258.350 W7 N6 25 kHz
26 299.450 258.450 A6 O6 25 kHz
27 299.550 258.550 B6 P6 25 kHz

G-9
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

28 299.650 258.650 C6 Q6 25 kHz

29 306.250 265.250 W8 N7 25 kHz
30 306.350 265.350 A7 O7 25 kHz
31 306.450 265.450 B7 P7 25 kHz
32 306.550 265.550 C7 Q7 25 kHz
33 307.750 266.750 N8 25 kHz
34 307.850 266.850 A8 O8 25 kHz
35 307.950 266.950 B8 P8 25 kHz
36 308.050 267.050 C8 Q8 25 kHz
37 309.150 268.150 N9 25 kHz
38 309.250 268.250 A9 O9 25 kHz
39 309.350 268.350 B9 P9 25 kHz
40 309.450 268.450 C9 Q9 25 kHz
41 310.650 269.650 N10 25 kHz
42 310.750 269.750 A10 O10 25 kHz
43 310.850 269.850 B10 P10 25 kHz
44 310.950 269.950 C10 Q10 25 kHz
45 293.950 260.350 A23-1 25 kHz
46 293.975 260.375 A23-2 N11 25 kHz
47 294.000 260.400 A23-3 25 kHz
48 294.025 260.425 A23-4 P11 25 kHz
49 294.050 260.450 A23-5 25 kHz
50 294.075 260.475 A23-6 N12 25 kHz
51 294.100 260.500 A23-7 25 kHz
52 294.125 260.525 A23-8 P12 25 kHz
53 294.150 260.550 A23-9 25 kHz
54 294.175 260.575 A23-10 O11 25 kHz

G-10
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

55 294.200 260.600 A23-11 25 kHz

56 294.225 260.625 A23-12 Q11 25 kHz
57 294.250 260.650 A23-13 25 kHz
58 294.275 260.675 A23-14 O12 25 kHz
59 294.300 260.700 A23-15 25 kHz
60 294.325 260.725 A23-16 Q12 25 kHz
61 294.350 260.750 A23-17 25 kHz
62 294.375 260.775 A23-18 25 kHz
63 294.400 260.800 A23-19 25 kHz
64 294.425 260.825 A23-20 25 kHz
65 294.450 260.850 A23-21 25 kHz
66 295.050 261.450 B23-1 25 kHz
67 295.075 261.475 B23-2 25 kHz
68 295.100 261.500 B23-3 25 kHz
69 295.125 261.525 B23-4 25 kHz
70 295.150 261.550 B23-5 25 kHz
71 295.175 261.575 B23-6 N13 25 kHz
72 295.200 261.600 B23-7 25 kHz
73 295.225 261.625 B23-8 P13 25 kHz
74 295.250 261.650 B23-9 25 kHz
75 295.275 261.675 B23-10 N14 25 kHz
76 295.300 261.700 B23-11 25 kHz
77 295.325 261.725 B23-12 P14 25 kHz
78 295.350 261.750 B23-13 25 kHz
79 295.375 261.775 B23-14 N15 25 kHz
80 295.400 261.800 B23-15 25 kHz
81 295.425 261.825 B23-16 P15 25 kHz

G-11
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

82 295.450 261.850 B23-17 25 kHz

83 295.475 261.875 B23-18 N16 25 kHz
84 295.500 261.900 B23-19 25 kHz
85 295.525 261.925 B23-20 P16 25 kHz
86 295.550 261.950 B23-21 25 kHz
87 295.650 262.050 C23-1 25 kHz
88 295.675 262.075 C23-2 O13 25 kHz
89 295.700 262.100 C23-3 25 kHz
90 295.725 262.125 C23-4 Q13 25 kHz
91 295.750 262.150 C23-5 25 kHz
92 295.775 262.175 C23-6 O14 25 kHz
93 295.800 262.200 C23-7 25 kHz
94 295.825 262.225 C23-8 Q14 25 kHz
95 295.850 262.250 C23-9 25 kHz
96 295.875 262.275 C23-10 O15 25 kHz
97 295.900 262.300 C23-11 25 kHz
98 295.925 262.325 C23-12 Q15 25 kHz
99 295.950 262.350 C23-13 25 kHz
100 295.975 262.375 C23-14 O16 25 kHz
101 296.000 262.400 C23-15 25 kHz
102 296.025 262.425 C23-16 Q16 25 kHz
103 296.050 262.450 C23-17 25 kHz
104 296.075 262.475 C23-18 25 kHz
105 296.100 262.500 C23-19 25 kHz
106 296.125 262.525 C23-20 25 kHz
107 296.150 262.550 C23-21 25 kHz
108 297.150 263.550 W2-1 25 kHz

G-12
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

109 297.175 263.575 W2-2 N17 25 kHz

110 297.200 263.600 W2-3 25 kHz
111 297.225 263.625 W2-4 P17 25 kHz
112 297.250 263.650 W2-5 25 kHz
113 297.275 263.675 W2-6 N18 25 kHz
114 297.300 263.700 W2-7 25 kHz
115 297.325 263.725 W2-8 P18 25 kHz
116 297.350 263.750 W2-9 25 kHz
117 297.375 263.775 W2-10 O17 25 kHz
118 297.400 263.800 W2-11 25 kHz
119 297.425 263.825 W2-12 Q17 25 kHz
120 297.450 263.850 W2-13 25 kHz
121 297.475 263.875 W2-14 O18 25 kHz
122 297.500 263.900 W2-15 25 kHz
123 297.525 263.925 W2-16 Q18 25 kHz
124 297.550 263.950 W2-17 25 kHz
125 297.575 263.975 W2-18 25 kHz
126 297.600 264.000 W2-19 25 kHz
127 297.625 264.025 W2-20 25 kHz
128 297.650 264.050 W2-21 25 kHz
129 302.445 248.845 N27 5 kHz
130 302.450 248.850 G1 5 kHz
131 302.455 248.855 N28 5 kHz
132 302.465 248.865 N29 5 kHz
133 302.475 248.875 G2 N30 5 kHz
134 302.485 248.885 N31 5 kHz
135 302.495 248.895 N32 5 kHz

G-13
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

136 302.500 248.900 G3 5 kHz

137 302.505 248.905 N33 5 kHz
138 302.515 248.915 N34 5 kHz
139 302.525 248.925 G4 N35 5 kHz
140 302.535 248.935 N36 5 kHz
141 302.545 248.945 N37 5 kHz
142 302.550 248.950 G5 5 kHz
143 302.555 248.955 N38 5 kHz
144 302.565 248.965 N39 5 kHz
145 302.575 248.975 G6 O27 5 kHz
146 302.585 248.985 O28 5 kHz
147 302.595 248.995 O29 5 kHz
148 302.600 249.000 G7 5 kHz
149 302.605 249.005 O30 5 kHz
150 302.615 249.015 O31 5 kHz
151 302.625 249.025 G8 O32 5 kHz
152 302.635 249.035 O33 5 kHz
153 302.645 249.045 O34 5 kHz
154 302.650 249.050 G9 5 kHz
155 302.655 249.055 O35 5 kHz
156 302.665 249.065 O36 5 kHz
157 302.675 249.075 G10 O37 5 kHz
158 302.685 249.085 O38 5 kHz
159 302.695 249.095 O39 5 kHz
160 302.700 249.100 G11 5 kHz
161 302.705 249.105 P27 5 kHz
162 302.715 249.115 P28 5 kHz

G-14
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

163 302.725 249.125 G12 P29 5 kHz

164 302.735 249.135 P30 5 kHz
165 302.745 249.145 P31 5 kHz
166 302.750 249.150 G13 5 kHz
167 302.755 249.155 P32 5 kHz
168 302.765 249.165 P33 5 kHz
169 302.775 249.175 G14 P34 5 kHz
170 302.785 249.185 P35 5 kHz
171 302.795 249.195 P36 5 kHz
172 302.800 249.200 G15 5 5 kHz
173 302.805 249.205 P37 5 kHz
174 302.815 249.215 P38 5 kHz
175 302.825 249.225 G16 P39 5 kHz
176 302.835 249.235 Q27 5 kHz
177 302.845 249.245 Q28 5 kHz
178 302.850 249.250 G17 5 5 kHz
179 302.855 249.255 Q29 5 kHz
180 302.865 249.265 Q30 5 kHz
181 302.875 249.275 G18 Q31 5 kHz
182 302.885 249.285 Q32 5 kHz
183 302.895 249.295 Q33 5 kHz
184 302.900 249.300 G19 5 5 kHz
185 302.905 249.305 Q34 5 kHz
186 302.915 249.315 Q35 5 kHz
187 302.925 249.325 G20 Q36 5 kHz
188 302.935 249.335 Q37 5 kHz
189 302.945 249.345 Q38 5 kHz

G-15
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

190 302.950 249.350 5 kHz

191 302.955 249.355 Q39 5 kHz
192 307.750 254.150 GA 25 kHz
193 311.150 257.550 GB 25 kHz
194 316.955 243.855 W9 5 kHz
195 316.960 243.860 W10 5 kHz
196 316.975 243.875 W11 5 kHz
197 317.000 243.900 W12 5 kHz
198 317.010 243.910 W13 5 kHz
199 317.015 243.915 N19 5 kHz
200 317.025 243.925 N20 5 kHz
201 317.035 243.935 N21 5 kHz
202 317.045 243.945 A11 N22 5 kHz
203 317.055 243.955 A12 N23 5 kHz
204 317.065 243.965 A14 N24 5 kHz
205 317.075 243.975 A16 N25 5 kHz
206 317.085 243.985 A18 N26 5 kHz
207 317.090 243.990 A19 5 kHz
208 317.095 243.995 A20 O19 5 kHz
209 317.100 244.000 A21 5 kHz
210 317.105 244.005 O20 5 kHz
211 317.110 244.010 A22 5 kHz
212 317.115 244.015 O21 5 kHz
213 317.125 244.025 O22 5 kHz
214 317.135 244.035 O23 5 kHz
215 317.145 244.045 B11 O24 5 kHz
216 317.155 244.055 B12 O25 5 kHz

G-16
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

217 317.165 244.065 B14 O26 5 kHz

218 317.175 244.075 B16 P19 5 kHz
219 317.185 244.085 B18 P20 5 kHz
220 317.190 244.090 B19 5 kHz
221 317.195 244.095 B20 P21 5 kHz
222 317.200 244.100 B21 5 kHz
223 317.205 244.105 P22 5 kHz
224 317.210 244.110 B22 5 kHz
225 317.215 244.115 P23 5 kHz
226 317.225 244.125 P24 5 kHz
227 317.235 244.135 P25 5 kHz
228 317.245 244.145 C11 P26 5 kHz
229 317.255 244.155 C12 Q19 5 kHz
230 317.265 244.165 C14 Q20 5 kHz
231 317.275 244.175 C16 Q21 5 kHz
232 317.285 244.185 C18 Q22 5 kHz
233 317.290 244.190 C19 5 kHz
234 317.295 244.195 C20 Q23 5 kHz
235 317.300 244.200 C21 5 kHz
236 317.305 244.205 Q24 5 kHz
237 317.310 244.210 C22 5 kHz
238 317.315 244.215 Q25 5 kHz
239 317.325 244.225 Q26 5 kHz
240 307.550 253.950 North 25 kHz / 25
Atlantic kHz (United
Treaty Kingdom
Organization [UK])
(NATO) IVB /
SKYNET 4A
241 307.700 254.100 NATO IVA 25 kHz
G-17
 Table G-6. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present UFO Channel

Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Channel Bandwidth

242 311.050 257.450 NATO IVB / 25 kHz / 25

SKYNET 4A kHz (UK)
243 311.200 257.600 NATO IVA 25 kHz
244 307.750 254.150 SKYNET 4B 25 kHz (UK)
245 311.250 257.650 SKYNET 4B 25 kHz (UK)
246 307.650 254.050 SKYNET 4C 25 kHz (UK)
247 311.150 257.550 SKYNET 4C 25 kHz (UK)
248 294.800 253.650 SKYNET 4D 25 kHz (UK)
to to
314.800 254.350
249 298.300 257.150 SKYNET 4D 25 kHz (UK)
to to
313.300 257.850
999 User Input User Input 5 / 25 kHz
225.000 225.000
to to
511.9950 511.9950

This radio can be used on Maritime channels if a VULOS PT preset is programmed

using applicable frequencies from Table G-7. This information is derived from the
following sources.
• United States (US), per Navigation Center (NAVCEN), August 2009
• International (Intl), per Navigation Center (NAVCEN), August 2009
• Canada (CA), per Department of Fisheries & Oceans (DFO), August
2009

G-18
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

1 1 T: 156.05 T: 160.65 International: Public

R: 160.65 R: 156.05 Correspondence, Port Operations
1a T/R: 156.05 T/R: 156.05 US: Port Operations and
Commercial, Vessel Traffic Service
(VTS). New Orleans/Lower
Mississippi area.
2 2 T: 156.10 T: 160.70 International: Public
R: 160.70 R: 156.10 Correspondence, Port Operations
3 3 T: 156.15 T: 160.75 International: Public
R: 160.75 R: 156.15 Correspondence, Port Operations
4 T: 156.20 T: 160.80 International: Public
R: 160.80 R: 156.20 Correspondence, Port Operations
4a T/R: 156.20 T/R: 156.20 Canada: Department Fisheries
Ocean (DFO)/Canadian Coast Guard
only in British Columbia coast area.
Commercial fishing in east coast area
5 T: 156.25 T: 160.85 International: Public
R: 160.85 R: 156.25 Correspondence, Port Operations
5a 5a T/R: 156.25 T/R: 156.25 US: Port Operations or VTS in
Houston, New Orleans and Seattle
areas.
6 6 6 T/R: 156.30 T/R: 156.30 US: Intership Safety
International: Intership
Canada: May be used for search and
rescue communications between
ships and aircraft.
7 T: 156.35 T: 160.95 International: Public
R: 160.95 R: 156.35 Correspondence, Port Operations
7a 7a T/R: 156.35 T/R: 156.35 US: Commercial
8 8 8 T/R: 156.40 T/R: 156.40 US: Commercial (Intership only)
International: Intership
Canada: Also assigned for intership
in the Lake Winnipeg area.

G-19
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

9 9 9 T/R: 156.45 T/R: 156.45 US: Boater Calling. Commercial and

Non-Commercial.
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: Commercial - British
Columbia coast area.
May be used to communicate with
aircraft and helicopters in
predominantly maritime support
operations.
10 10 10 T/R: 156.50 T/R: 156.50 US: Commercial
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: Commercial - British
Columbia coast area.
May also be used for
communications with aircraft
engaged in coordinated search and
rescue and antipollution operations.
11 11 11 T/R: 156.55 T/R: 156.55 US: Commercial. VTS in selected
areas.
International: Port Operations
Canada: VTS - British Columbia
coast area.
Also used for pilotage purposes.
12 12 12 T/R: 156.60 T/R: 156.60 US: Port Operations. VTS in selected
areas.
International: Port Operations
Canada: VTS - British Columbia
coast area.
Also used for pilotage purposes.
13 13 13 T/R: 156.65 T/R: 156.65 US: Intership Navigation Safety
(Bridge-to-bridge). Ships >20m
length maintain a listening watch on
this channel in US waters.
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: VTS - British Columbia
coast area.
Also used for pilotage purposes.

G-20
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

14 14 14 T/R: 156.70 T/R: 156.70 US: Port Operations. VTS in selected

areas.
International: Port Operations
Canada: VTS - British Columbia
coast area.
Also used for pilotage purposes.
15 15 15 T/R: 156.75 T/R: 156.75 US: Environmental (Receive only).
Used by Class C Emergency
Position-Indicating Radio Beacons
(EPIRBs).
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: Port operations and Ship
Movement - British Columbia coast
area.
All operations limited to 1-watt
maximum power. May also be used
for on-board communications.
16 16 16 T/R: 156.80 T/R: 156.80 US: International Distress, Safety
and Calling. Ships required to carry
radio, US Coast Guard (USCG), and
most coast stations maintain a
listening watch on this channel.
International: International Distress,
Safety and Calling
Canada: International Distress,
Safety and Calling
17 17 17 T/R: 156.85 T/R: 156.85 US: State Control
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: Port operations and Ship
Movement - British Columbia coast
area.
All operations limited to 1 watt
maximum power. May also be used
for on-board communications.
18 T: 156.90 T: 161.50 International: Public
R: 161.50 R: 156.90 Correspondence, Port Operations
18a 18a T/R: 156.90 T/R: 156.90 US: Commercial
Canada: Towing - British Columbia
coast area.
19 T: 156.95 R: T: 161.55* R: International: Public
161.55* 156.95 Correspondence, Port Operations

G-21
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

19a 19a T/R: 156.95 T/R: 156.95 US: Commercial

Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast
Guard. Pacific Pilots - British
Columbia coast area.
20 20 20 T: 157.00 T: 161.60 US: Port Operations (Duplex)
R: 161.60 R: 157.00 International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations
Canada: Port operations only with
1 watt maximum power.
20a T/R: 157.00 T/R: 157.00 US: Port Operations
21 T: 157.05 R: T: 161.65* R: International: Public
161.65* 157.05 Correspondence, Port Operations
21a 21a T/R: 157.05 T/R: 157.05 US: US Coast Guard only
Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast
Guard only.
21b -- T/R: 161.65
22 T: 157.10 T: 161.70 International: Public
R: 161.70 R: 157.10 Correspondence, Port Operations
22a 22a T/R: 157.10 T/R: 157.10 US: Coast Guard Liaison and
Maritime Safety Information
Broadcasts. Broadcasts announced
on channel 16.
Canada: For communications
between Canadian Coast Guard and
non-Canadian Coast Guard stations
only.
23 23 T: 157.15 T: 161.75 International: Public
R: 161.75 R: 157.15 Correspondence, Port Operations
23a T/R: 157.15 T/R: 157.15 US: US Coast Guard only
23b -- T/R: 161.75 Canada: Continuous Marine
Broadcast (CMB) service.
24 24 24 T: 157.20 T: 161.80 US: Public Correspondence (Marine
R: 161.80 R: 157.20 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations

G-22
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

25 25 25 T: 157.25 T: 161.85 US: Public Correspondence (Marine

R: 161.85 R: 157.25 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations
Canada: Also assigned for
operations in the Lake Winnipeg
area.
25b T/R: 161.85
26 26 26 T: 157.30 T: 161.90 US: Public Correspondence (Marine
R: 161.90 R: 157.30 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations
27 27 27 T: 157.35 T: 161.95 US: Public Correspondence (Marine
R: 161.95 R: 157.35 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations
28 28 28 T: 157.40 T: 162.00 US: Public Correspondence (Marine
R: 162.00 R: 157.40 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations
28b -- T/R: 162.00 Canada: Continuous Marine
Broadcast (CMB) service.
60 60 T: 156.025 R: T: 160.625 R: International: Public
160.625 156.025 Correspondence, Port Operations
61 T: 156.075 R: T: 160.675 R: International: Public
160.675 156.075 Correspondence, Port Operations
61a 61a T/R: 156.075 T/R: 156.075 Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast
Guard only in British Columbia coast
area.
62 T: 156.125 R: T: 160.725 R: International: Public
160.725 156.125 Correspondence, Port Operations
62a T/R: 156.125 T/R: 156.125 Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast
Guard only in British Columbia coast
area.
63 T: 156.175 T: 160.775 International: Public
R: 160.775 R: 156.175 Correspondence, Port Operations

G-23
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

63a 63a T/R: 156.175 T/R: 156.175 US: Port Operations and
Commercial, VTS. New
Orleans/Lower Mississippi area.
Canada: Tow Boats - British
Columbia coast area.
64 64 T: 156.225 T: 160.825 International: Public
R: 160.825 R: 156.225 Correspondence, Port Operations
64a 64a T/R: 156.225 T/R: 156.225 Canada: Commercial fishing only.
65 T: 156.275 T: 160.875 International: Public
R: 160.875 R: 156.225 Correspondence, Port Operations
65a 65a T/R: 156.275 T/R: 156.275 US: Port Operations
Canada: Search and rescue and
antipollution operations on the Great
Lakes. Towing on the Pacific Coast.
Port operations only in the
St. Lawrence River areas with 1 watt
maximum power. Intership in inland
Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and
Alberta areas.
66 T: 156.325 T: 160.925 International: Public
R: 160.925 R: 156.325 Correspondence, Port Operations
66a 66a T/R: 156.325 T/R: 156.325 US: Port Operations
Canada: Port operations only in the
St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes
areas with 1 watt maximum power.
1 watt marina channel - British
Columbia coast area.
67 67 67 T/R: 156.375 T/R: 156.375 US: Commercial. Used for Bridge-to-
bridge communications in lower Miss.
River. Intership only.
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: May also be used for
communications with aircraft
engaged in coordinated search and
rescue and antipollution operations.
Commercial fishing only in east coast
and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan,
and Alberta areas. Pleasure craft -
British Columbia coast area.

G-24
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

68 68 68 T/R: 156.425 T/R: 156.425 US: Non-Commercial

International: Port Operations
Canada: For marinas, yacht clubs
and pleasure craft.
69 69 69 T/R: 156.475 T/R: 156.475 US: Non-Commercial
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: Commercial fishing only -
east coast area.
Pleasure craft - British Columbia
coast area.
70 70 70 T/R: 156.525 T/R: 156.525 US: Digital Selective Calling (voice
communications not allowed)
International: Digital selective calling
for distress, safety and calling
Canada: Digital selective calling for
distress, safety and calling
71 71 71 T/R: 156.575 T/R: 156.575 US: Non-Commercial
International: Port Operations
Canada: Ship Movement - British
Columbia coast area.Marinas and
yacht clubs - east coast and on Lake
Winnipeg.
72 72 72 T/R: 156.625 T/R: 156.625 US: Non-Commercial (Intership only)
International: Intership
Canada: May be used to
communicate with aircraft and
helicopters in predominantly maritime
support operations.
Pleasure craft - British Columbia
coast area
73 73 73 T/R: 156.675 T/R: 156.675 US: Port Operations
International: Intership, Port
Operations
Canada: May also be used for
communications with aircraft
engaged in coordinated search and
rescue and antipollution operations.
Commercial fishing only in east coast
and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan,
and Alberta areas.

G-25
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

74 74 74 T/R: 156.725 T/R: 156.725 US: Port Operations

International: Port Operations
Canada: VTS and Ship Movement
British Columbia coast area.
75 75 75 T/R: 156.775 T/R: 156.775 International: Port Operations
Canada: Simplex port operation, ship
movement and navigation related
communication only.
1 watt maximum.
76 76 76 T/R: 156.825 T/R: 156.825 International: Port Operations
Canada: Simplex port operation, ship
movement and navigation related
communication only.
1 watt maximum.
77 77 77 T/R: 156.875 T/R: 156.875 US: Port Operations (Intership only)
International: Intership
Canada: Pilotage - British Columbia
coast area; 25 watts. Port operations
only in the St. Lawrence River/Great
Lakes areas with 1 watt maximum
power.
78 T: 156.925 T: 161.525 International: Public
R: 161.525 R: 156.925 Correspondence, Port Operations
78a 78a T/R: 156.925 T/R: 156.925 US: Non-Commercial
Canada: Fishing Industry - British
Columbia coast area.
79 T: 156.975 T: 161.575 International: Public
R: 161.575 R: 156.975 Correspondence, Port Operations
79a 79a T/R: 156.975 T/R: 156.975 US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in
Great Lakes only
Canada: Fishing Industry - British
Columbia coast area.
80 T: 157.025 R: T: 161.625 R: International: Public
161.625 157.025 Correspondence, Port Operations
80a 80a T/R: 157.025 T/R: 157.025 US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in
Great Lakes only
Canada: Fishing Industry - British
Columbia coast area.
81 T: 157.075 T: 161.675 International: Public
R: 161.675 R: 157.075 Correspondence, Port Operations

G-26
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

81a 81a T/R: 157.075 T/R: 157.075 US: US Government only -

Environmental protection operations
Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast
Guard use only.
82 T: 157.125 T: 161.725 International: Public
R: 161.725 R: 157.125 Correspondence, Port Operations
82a 82a T/R: 157.125 T/R: 157.125 US: US. Government only
Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast
Guard use only.
83 T: 157.175 T: 161.775 International: Public
R: 161.775 R: 157.175 Correspondence, Port Operations
83a 83a T/R: 157.175 T/R: 157.175 US: US Coast Guard only
Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast
Guard and other Government
agencies.
83b -- T/R: 161.775
84 84 84 T: 157.225 T: 161.825 US: Public Correspondence (Marine
R: 161.825 R: 157.225 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations
85 85 85 T: 157.275 T: 161.875 US: Public Correspondence (Marine
R: 161.875 R: 157.275 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations

86 86 86 T: 157.325 T: 161.925 US: Public Correspondence (Marine

R: 161.925 R: 157.325 Operator)
International: Public
Correspondence, Port Operations

87 87 87 T: 157.375 T: 161.975 US: Automatic Identification System

R: 161.975 R: 157.375 duplex repeater
International: Port Operations
Canada: Port operation and ship
movement - east coast area.
Pleasure craft - British Columbia
coast area.

G-27
 Table G-7. Maritime Channels and Frequencies (Continued)

Channel Frequency
Channel Usage
US Intl CA Ship (MHz) Shore (MHz)

87a T/R: 157.375 T/R: 157.375 US: Public Correspondence (Marine

Operator)

87b T/R: 161.975 T/R: 161.975 Canada: Automatic Ship

Identification and Surveillance
System.

88 88 T: 157.425 T: 162.025 US: Commercial, Intership only.

R: 162.025 R: 157.425 International: Port Operations
Canada: Port operation and ship
movement - British Columbia coast
area.
88a T/R: 157.425 T/R: 157.425 US: Commercial, Intership only.
Canada: Automatic Ship
Identification and Surveillance
System.

88b T/R: 162.025 T/R: 162.025

Table G-8. NOAA Weather Radio Channels

Channel Frequency

US Intl CA Shore (MHz)

WX1 WX1 162.550

WX2 WX2 162.400

WX3 WX3 162.475

WX4 162.425

WX5 162.450

WX6 162.500

WX7 162.525

G-28
 Table G-9. CTCSS Frequencies and Designator Codes

Designator Designator
FREQ FREQ
(Hz) (Hz)
EIA Motorola HAM EIA Motorola HAM

67.0 L1 XZ 01 136.5 4Z 21
69.3 WZ N/A 141.3 4A 22
71.9 L2 XB 02 146.2 4B 23
74.4 WA 03 151.4 5Z 24
77.0 L3 XB 04 156.7 5A 25
79.7 SP 05 162.2 5B 26
82.5 L4 YZ 06 167.9 6Z 27
85.4 YA 07 173.8 6A 28
88.5 L4A YB 08 179.9 6B 29
91.5 ZZ 09 186.2 7Z 30
94.8 L5 ZA 10 192.8 7A 31
97.4 ZB 11 203.5 M1 32
100.0 1Z 12 206.5 8Z N/A
103.5 1A 13 210.7 M2 33
107.2 1B 14 218.1 M3 34
110.9 2Z 15 225.7 M4 35
114.8 2A 16 229.1 9Z N/A
118.8 2B 17 233.6 M5 36
123.0 3Z 18 241.8 M6 37
127.3 3A 19 250.3 M7 38
131.8 3B 20 254.1 OZ N/A

G-29
 Table G-10. CDCSS Codes

EIA Codes

023 025 026 031 032 043 047 051 054 065

071 072 073 074 114 115 116 125 131 132

134 143 152 155 156 162 165 172 174 205

223 226 243 244 245 251 261 263 265 271

306 311 315 331 343 346 351 364 365 371

411 412 413 423 431 432 445 464 465 466

503 506 516 532 546 565 606 612 624 627

631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732

734 743 754

G-30
G.2.1 CONUS SATCOM Footprint

Figure G-1. CONUS 100 deg W, 105 deg W

G-31
G.2.2 Atlantic SATCOM Footprint

Figure G-2. LANT 15 deg W, 23 deg W

G-32
G.2.3 Indian Ocean SATCOM Footprint

Figure G-3. IO 72 deg E, 72.5 deg W

G-33
G.2.4 Pacific SATCOM Footprint

Figure G-4. PAC 172 deg E, 177 deg E

G-34
 GLOSSARY

-A-

ADF Audio, Data, Fill

Ad-Hoc Networking Network that forms automatically without
preassigned infrastructure
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
AF (Port) Audio/Fill Connector
AK Automatic Key
ALT Alternate
AM Amplitude Modulation
ANCD Automated Net Control Device - ARMY common
name for the AN/CYZ-10 DTD
ANDVT Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal -
2400 bps maximum data rate. LPC-10 KY-
99/99A, KYV-5 compatible encryption
ANLG Analog
ANT Antenna
ANW2 Adaptive Networking Wideband Waveform
ARQ Automatic Repeat reQuest - A method of data
transfer where data information may be
repeatedly sent to guarantee error-free delivery
ASCII American Standard Code for Information
Interchange
ASIP Advanced SINCGARS Improvement Program
ASK Amplitude Shift Keying
Async Asynchronous
-B-

BAT Battery
BCVm Black Crypto Variable Monthly
BER Bit Error Rate
BERT Bit Error Rate Test
BGAN Broadband Global Area Network
BGUV Black Group Unique Variable
BIT Built-In Test
BKAUPD GPS Black Key Algorithm Update Parameter

1
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-B- - Continued

Black Data Non-COMSEC programmed parameters such as

the net presets and configuration settings.
BNC Bayonet Neill-Concelman, named after Paul Neill
of Bell Labs (inventor of the N connector) and
Amphenol Engineer Carl Concelman (inventor of
the C connector).
bps, BPS Bits per second
BSY Busy (Display)
BTN BATON Key
-C-

C Celsius
C2PC Command and Control Personal Computer
CA Canada
CD Compact Disc
CDCSS Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System
CEOI Communications-Electronics Operating
Instructions
CFB Cipher Feedback
CFD Common Fill Device, KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-18
and MX-18290 type fill devices. Use DS-102
protocol to transfer keys
cm, cm3 Centimeter or 1 x 10-2 meter, cubic centimeter
CMB Continuous Marine Broadcast
Cold Start SINCGARS start up method used by the Master
AN/PRC-117G to initially open a net of member
radios by transmitting OTA hopset and TOD data
over a Single Channel net
COM Communications port
COMSEC Communications Security
CONFIG Configuration - The process of setting parameter
values that define the current hardware setup
and/or operational modes. Also, a collection of all
such values
CONUS Continental United States
CoT Cursor on Target

2
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-C- - Continued

CPA Communications Planning Application

CPM Continuous Phase Modulation. A Modulation
mode added by MIL-STD 188-181B that permits
the receiving station to automatically match the
rate of the sender
CT Cipher Text, encrypted voice or data
CT3 Common Tier 3
CTCSS Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System
CTR Counter - mode of AES
CTS Clear-to-Send
CUE/Cue Channel A designated fixed frequency net that enables a
radio not in a SINCGARS frequency hopping net
to contact the Net Control Station of the
SINCGARS net
CV Crypto Variable
CVM Crypto Variable Monthly
CVS Crypto Variable Status
CVSD Continuously Variable Slope Delta, 16 kbps in
VINSON encryption and 12 kbps in
FASCINATOR encryption.
-D-

D Data
DAGR Defense Advanced GPS Receiver
DAMA Demand Assigned Multiple Access
DAT Data
dB Decibel
dBm Decibel level referenced to 1 milliwatt (.001 watt)
power level
DC Direct Current
DCS CDCSS (Squelch Display)
DD Day (Two digit format)
DFO Department of Fisheries & Oceans
DM Date/Minutes
DMS Date/Minutes/Seconds
DOD Department of Defense
3
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-D- - Continued

DOM Day of Month. HAVEQUICK II mode of operation

use DOM from calendar date in TOD to determine
which loaded MWOD to utilize.
DS-101 Asynchronous COMSEC key transfer protocol
used by AN/CYZ-10 DTD FILL and CT3 user
application software.
DSS Digital Signature Standard
DTD Data Transfer Device, or AN/CYZ-10, also known
as the Automated Net Controllers Device (ANCD)
in SINCGARS operation.
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DV Digital Voice. Analog voice that has been
converted into a digital data stream.
D/V Data/Voice
-E-

ECCM Electronic Counter-Counter Measures, anti-jam

modes of either SINCGARS or HAVEQUICK
frequency hopping.
EDM Enhanced Data Mode
EIA Electronics Industries Alliance
EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. It includes
the actual transmitter power and the receiving
antenna gain. EIRP is measured in decibels
referenced to watts (dBW).
EPE Estimated Position Error
EPIRB Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacon
ERF Electronic Remote Fill - A procedure used to
initially start up (Cold Start ERF) or update
(Normal ERF) a SINCGARS net. Used to load
hopset and lockout information over the air.
ERR Error, HAVEQUICK display indication for
uninitialized TOD or missing MWOD.
ESET Electronic Set. Contains SINCGARS frequency
hopping data, transmission security key and Net
ID. See Loadset.

4
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-F-

F Farenheit
FED-STD Federal Standard
FH Frequency Hopping. an electronic counter-
counter measure providing an antijam capability.
FLTSATCOM, FLTSAT Fleet Satellite Communications - Older generation
of UHF communications satellite and being
replaced by UHF Follow On (UFO) constellation.
FM Frequency Modulation. Varying the frequency of
the RF carrier in proportion to the modulating
signal.
FMA Frequency Managed A-Net
FMT Frequency Management Training. HAVEQUICK
FH mode to allow training on a set of 16 selected
UHF-AM frequency assignments.
FMT_FREQS Frequency Management Training Frequencies
FOM Figure Of Merit, relating to GPS satellite
acquisition.
Frequency Hopping Sync TimeThe TOD is used by SINCGARS to synchronize
SINCGARS frequency hopping communications.
By standard this comes from GPS system and is
ZULU time. Also known as Universal Coordinated
Time (UTC).
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
ft Feet
-G-
GB GRAM SAASM Ground-Based GPS Receiver Application Module
Selective Availability Anti-Spoofing Module
GHz Gigahetrz
GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GPS Global Positioning System. A system using
satellites to provide position location, system
clock, and Time-of-Day used with SINCGARS,
HAVEQUICK, and HPW.

5
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-G- - Continued

GTOD Global Time-Of-Day. Also called Frequency

Hopping Sync Time.
GUV Group Unique Variable
GW Gateway
-H-

H Height
HAIPE High Assurance Internet Protocol Encryptor
Hang Time The length of time the radio dwells on a net after
a signal ends before returning to scan.
HAVEQUICK II ECCM Frequency Hopping method operating in
the UHF band.
HB High Band
HH Hours (Two digit)
HOP Hopping
Hold Time The length of time the radio dwells on a net before
returning to scan, even with a signal present.
Hopset The set of frequencies on which a SINCGARS
radio hops.
Hot Start Passive method of entering a SINCGARS FH net
by locally filling all necessary FH data and
obtaining accurate time from a GPS source.
Member stations can instantly communicate with
the master station if within ± four seconds of each
other.
host Computer at a specific location on a computer
network
HPW High Performance Waveform - A data-only
SATCOM mode for increased throughput.
HQ HAVEQUICK
HUB Hold-Up Battery. The radio's backup battery that
maintains programming and keys when main
battery power is not furnished.
HW Hardware
Hz Hertz

6
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-I-
IAW In Accordance With
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
ICOM Integrated COMSEC
ID Identification, drawing id number
IKE Internet Key Exchange
in, in3 Inches, cubic inches
INE Inline Network Encryptor
INFOSEC Information Security
INI Initial (HAVEQUICK)
INIT Initial (HAVEQUICK)
INMARSAT International Marine Satellite
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IP Multicast Traffic sent to multiple nodes (or addresses) in a
network. Addresses 224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.255 are designated as multicast
addresses.
IVA NATO Skynet Designations
IVB NATO Skynet Designations
-J-

-K-
K Kilobytes
kbps Kilobits per second
KDU Keypad Display Unit
KEK Key Encryption Key
kg Kilogram or 1 x 103 gram
kHz Kilohertz
km/h Kilometers per hour

7
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-L-

L Length
LAN Local Area Network
LAT Latitude
LB Low Band
lbs Pounds
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LD Load
LNA Low Noise Amplifier. In-line receive system
amplifier used in SATCOM systems to improve
performance. They are usually placed near the
antenna and powered by a bias DC voltage sent
by the transceiver through the transmission line.
LNE Late Net Entry - A receive function which permits
a radio to enter a SINCGARS net when its TOD
clock has drifted away from the net TOD or when
a radio must join an existing net. The entering
transceiver must be loaded with the proper TEK
(not necessary in P mode) and FH Fill data.
Loadset Consists of (up to) five TEKs, one KEK, six
ESETs, and any applicable lockout sets. This
provides one step loading by an AN/CYZ-10 into
a standard SINCGARS radio. This type of
SINCGARS fill is referred to as Mode 2.
Local Fill The procedure used to load hopset and lockout
set information from the front panel.
Lockout Set A set of frequencies that are excluded during
frequency hopping operations. A lockout set
effects all loaded hopsets in the radio.
LONG Longitude
LOS Line-of-Sight
LP Land Portable
LPC Linear Predictive Coding - A method of digitizing
analog voice signals.
LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling

8
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-M-

m Meter
MAC Machine Address Code
Manual Channel Channel used in SINCGARS operations to
perform Cold Start Net Openings.
Mbps One Million (Mega) bits per second
MED MEDLEY Key
MELP Mixed-Excitation Linear Predictive Vocoder
MGRS Military Grid Reference System
MH Multi-Hop
MHz, MHZ Abbreviation for megahertz, or millions of cycles
per second.
MIL Military
MIL-STD Military Standard
MIL-STD-188-181B The current Military Standard for 5 kHz NB and 25
kHz WB Dedicated UHF SATCOM. Has
provisions and standards for increased data rates.
MK Manual Key
Mission Plan Communication plan file that contains all radio
configuration parameters such as station and net
information. Does not include COMSEC fill.
MM Month (Two digit format),
Minutes (HAVEQUICK/ANW2)
mph Miles per hour
MWOD Multiple Word of Day. Up to 31 MWODs can be
loaded into the radio. The MWOD elements are
entered into memory locations 1 - 31. The MWOD
is only valid on the date assigned to it. Used with
HAVEQUICK II.
-N-

N/A Not Applicable

NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NAVCEN Navigation Center

9
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-N- - Continued

NB Narrowband
NCD Net Control Device, KYX-15 or AN/CYZ-10 DTD
NCS Net Control Station
Net A group of radios that share common
communications parameters, such as
frequencies, etc.
Net Master In SINCGARS operations, the station responsible
for establishing and maintaining a net. Only one
can exist in a net as it maintains net time.
Net Member In SINCGARS operations, the name used for net
members who are not the Net Master.
Net Numbers A five digit code that programs the entry point in
the WOD frequency hopping pattern allowing for
multiple radio net operations using a common
WOD and TOD.
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
NOI Noise (Squelch)
NSA National Security Agency
NUM Number
-O-

Operational Date The TOD message includes the operational date.

This information allows the radio to select the
MWOD assigned to the current date.
ORTH Orthogonal
OSI Open Systems Interconnection. The OSI model
describes layers within a computer network
protocol design. The layers from top to bottom
typically include application, presentation,
session, transport, network, data link, and
physical. Each layer provides services to the layer
above and receives services from the layer below.
OTA Over-The-Air
OTAR Over The Air Rekey
OTG On-The-Go
OVR Override

10
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-P-

PA Power Amplifier
PC Personal Computer
PDN Push Down
PGM Program Mode
PIN Personal Identification Number
PLGR Portable Lightweight GPS Receiver, AN/PSN-11
POST Power-On Self-Test
PPK Pre-Placed Keys
PPP Point-To-Point Protocol
PSK Phase Shift Keying. The varying of the phase of a
signal in accordance with the modulating signal.
Each phase shift represents a different bit value.
PT Plain Text
PTT Push-To-Talk
PUP Push Up
-Q-

-R-

R Radio Silence Indicator, Receive

Radio Presets A predefined set of radio parameters including
frequency, modulation, COMSEC, and data
parameters.
RBECS Revised Battlefield Electronic Communications
System
RDS Revised Battlefield Electronic Communications-
Electronics Operating Instructions (CEOI) System
(RBECS) Data Transfer Device (DTD) Software
RES Receiver Exciter Synthesizer
RETRANS Retransmit
RF Radio Frequency
ROVER Remotely Operated Video Enhanced Receiver
RSSI Receive Signal Strength Indication
RT Receiver-Transmitter
RTS Request to Send

11
 GLOSSARY - Continued

RX Receive
RXMT Retransmit
-S-

SA Situational Awareness
SAP Service Announcement Protocol
SAT Satellite
SATCOM Satellite Communications
SBPSK Shaped Binary Phase Shift Keying
SC Single Channel
SCM Special Communications Mode
SCPS-TP Space Communications Protocol Standard
Transport Protocol
SDM SINCGARS Data Mode
SHF Super High Frequency
SINAD (Signal + Noise +Distortion)/(Noise +Distortion)
SINCGARS Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio
System
SINCGARS TSK A COMSEC Key that determines the pseudo-
random hopping pattern of the SINCGARS
waveform.
Single Channel A SINCGARS net that uses a separate fixed
frequency channel to coordinate actions such as
Cold Start ERF.
SKL Simple Key Loader
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio
SQL, Squelch Squelch - The ability to mute the receive audio
until the radio receives the appropriate signal.
Can be either digital squelch, tone squelch, or
noise squelch.
SS Seconds (Two digit format)
STD Standard
STI Sierra Terminal Interface
Streck Swedish angular unit (1/6300 of a circle)
SW Software
SWOD Single Word of Day

12
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-S- - Continued

SWOD Mode HAVEQUICK I frequency hopping mode that

allows radios with identical TOD, WOD, and net
number to synchronize and communicate. The
TOD with date 00/00/80 is used to place it in
HAVEQUICK I.
Sync, SYNC Synchronous
System Preset System Presets contain radio network parameters
that define how the radio will operate. Up to 99
System Presets can be assigned in the AN/PRC-
117G. Note that a Waveform Preset includes
parameters associated with a particular
waveform’s operation, where a System Preset
includes other parameters necessary for net
operation.
-T-

T Transmit indicator
TacChat Tactical Chat
TACSAT Tactical Satellite
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TCS CTCSS (Squelch Display)
TCXO Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator
TEK Traffic Encryption Key
TNC Threaded Neill-Concelman
TOD Time-of-Day. Allows for synchronization of all
radios in a HAVEQUICK frequency hopping net.
TON Tone
T/R Transmit/Receive
TRANSEC Transmission Security
TRF Traffic Mode
TRKEK Transfer KEK. A COMSEC key used to unwrap
black TEKs loaded to the radio set. The TRKEK
must be loaded prior to attempting to load a black
TEK. Only used with the AN/CYZ-10 DTD.

13
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-T- - Continued

TSK Transmission Security Key. A key used to encrypt

some aspect of the communications system other
than the traffic information.
TSS Time Signal Station. A beacon station setup to
continuously transmit HAVEQUICK TOD to
stations requiring the sync. A fixed frequency
UHF-AM channel is used to receive this signal.
TX Transmit
-U-

UAS User Application Software

UDP User Datagram Protocol
UFO UHF Follow On Satellite. Newer generation of US
Military UHF geosynchronous communications
satellites.
UHF Ultra High Frequency
UK United Kingdom
UPS Universal Plotting Sheet
US United States
USB Universal Serial Bus
USCG United States Coast Guard
USIM Universal Subscriber Identity Module
UTC Universal Time Coordinated or Universal
Coordinated Time, same as time zone ZULU or
GMT
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
-V-

V Voice
VAA Vehicular Adapter Amplifier
VDC Volts Direct Current
VHF Very High Frequency
VHF-Low Very High Frequency Low (30 - 90 MHz)
VHF-High Very High Frequency High (90 - 225 MHz)
VINSON 16 kbps data rate encryption using CVSD, KY-57
compatible for voice or data.
14
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-V- - Continued

VIU Vehicular Interface Unit

VOC Voice
VOL Volume
VPN Virtual Private Network
VPOD Voice Priority Over Data
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
VTS Vessel Traffic Service
VULOS VHF/UHF Line-of-Sight
-W-

W watts
W Width
Waveform Preset Waveform presets contain radio network
parameters such as frequency, squelch, and data
rates that define how the radio will operate. Up to
99 waveform presets can be installed in the
AN/PRC-117G for each waveform type.
WB Wideband
WF Waveform
WGD World Geodetic Datum
WGS World Geodetic Standard
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WMT Wireless Message Terminal
WOD Word of Day. Configures the frequency hopping
pattern and rate. WODs may vary in length from
one to six segments.
-X-

-Y-

YY Year (Two digit format)

15
 GLOSSARY - Continued

-Z-

Zeroize A command sequence which erases all

programmed channel parameters, option settings,
frequency hopping data and COMSEC keys.
ZULU Julian - Time zone indicator for Universal Time
used in synchronizing frequency hopping modes.

16
 Copyright © 2010
By Harris Corporation
All Rights Reserved

HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 585-244-5830. Fax: 585-242-4755. http://www.harris.com